Table of Contents
Feature Index

DIGITAL CAMERA

Instruction Manual1.

Preparation2.

Shooting

3.

Playback

4.

Menu functions

5.

Connecting the Camera toExternal Devices

6.

Cautions

7.

Information

8.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

9.

Additions/modifications byfirmware update

Model No. : IM019
Thank you for purchasing an Olympus digital camera. Before you start to use your new camera,
please read these instructions carefully to enjoy optimum performance and a longer service life.
Be sure you have read and understood the contents of “8. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS”, before using
this product. Keep these instructions available for future reference.
We recommend that you take test shots to get accustomed to your camera before taking important
photographs.
The screen and camera illustrations shown in this manual were produced during the development
stages and may differ from the actual product.
If there are additions and/or modifications of functions due to firmware update for the camera, thecontents will differ. For the latest information, please visit the Olympus website.

Product Manuals
Product Manuals

In addition to the “Instruction Manual”, we also offer a “Camera Function Guide”.
Consult these manuals when using the product.
Instruction Manual (this pdf)
A how-to guide to the camera and its features. The Instruction
Manual can be downloaded from the OLYMPUS website or directly
using the “OLYMPUS Image Share” (OI.Share) smartphone app.

Camera Function Guide
A function and setting guide that helps you use camera features to the full. It has been
optimized for display on mobile devices and can be viewed using OI.Share.
https://cs.olympus-imaging.jp/jp/support/cs/webmanual/index.html

Indications used in this manual
The following symbols are used throughout this manual.

$
%
g
2 EN

Notes and other supplementary information.
Tips and other helpful information for using the camera.
References to other pages in this manual.

Table of Contents
2

2. Shooting

Before You Begin

11

Information displays whileshooting ......................................36

Feature Index

12

Switching between displays......38
Switching the information
display ..........................................39

Names of parts

16

1. Preparation

18

Unpacking the box contents .....18
Attaching the Strap ....................19
Charging and inserting
the battery ...................................20
Using External Power
Sources .......................................22
Connecting via USB .....................22
HLD-9 Power Battery Holder ........24
Inserting the card .......................26
Using Two Memory Cards ............27
Attaching a lens to thecamera .........................................28
Removing Lenses.......................30
Using the monitor.......................31
Turning the camera on ...............32
Sleep Mode ..................................32
Initial setup .................................33
What to Do If You Can’t Readthe Display ..................................35

36

Shooting still pictures................41
Shooting with touch screen
operations.....................................43
Letting the camera choose
aperture and shutter speed(P: Program AE)...........................44
Choosing aperture (A: AperturePriority AE) ...................................46
Choosing shutter speed(S: Shutter-Priority AE) ................48
Choosing aperture and shutter
speed (M: Manual Exposure).......50
Long Exposures (B: Bulb/Time)...52
Lighten Blending (B: Live
Composite Photography)..............54

Table of Contents

Product Manuals

Saving Custom Settings to
the Mode Dial (C1/C2/C3/C4
Custom Modes) ..........................56
Saving Settings (Assign toCustom Mode) ..............................56
Using Custom Modes(C1/C2/C3/C4) ...........................57
Recording Movies ......................59
Recording movies in photoshooting modes ............................59
Recording movies in movie mode(n) ..............................................60
Touch Controls (Silent Controls)...61

EN 3

Table of Contents
4 EN

Shooting Settings.......................62
Direct Buttons ...............................63
Choosing a focus mode
(AF Mode).................................64
Controlling exposure(Exposure Compensation) ........68
Choosing an AF Target Mode
(AF Target Mode)......................69
Choosing a Focus Target(AF Target Point) ......................72
Zoom frame AF/Zoom AF(Super Spot AF) ........................73
Changing ISO sensitivity(ISO) .........................................75
Choosing how the camera
measures brightness(Metering) .................................77
Locking the exposure(AE Lock) ..................................77
Performing the sequential/
self-timer shooting ....................78
Self-Timer Options(c Custom Self-timer) ............80
Shooting without the vibration
caused by shutter button
operations (Anti-Shock r) ......80
Shooting without shutter sound(Silent s) ................................81
Shooting without a releasetime lag (Pro Capture
shooting) ...................................81
Shooting still pictures ina higher resolution(High Res Shot) ........................83
Using a flash(Flash photography) .................84
Choosing a Flash Mode
(Flash Mode) ............................86

The Super Control/LV Super
Control Panel................................88
Changing ISO
sensitivity (ISO) ........................91
Choosing a focus mode
(AF Mode).................................91
Positioning and Sizing
the AF Target (AF Area) ............91
Choosing how the camera
measures brightness(Metering) .................................92
Face priority AF/Eye priority AF(I Face Priority) ......................92
Adjusting color(WB (white balance)) ................94
Making fine adjustments towhite balance(WB Compensation) .................96
Reducing camera shake(Image Stabilizer) .....................97
Performing the sequential/
self-timer shooting ....................98
Setting the image aspect ..........98
Setting the saving method forshooting data
(K Save Settings) ...................99
Photo File and Image Size
Options (KK) .....................100
Frame Size, Rate, andCompression (nK) .............101
Filming Slow- or Fast-Motion
Movies (Slow- and Fast-Motion
Movies) ...................................104
Choosing a Flash Mode
(Flash Mode) ..........................105
Adjusting flash output (x) ....105

3. Playback

126

Information display during
playback ....................................126
Playback image information .......126
Switching the information
display ........................................127
Viewing photographs andmovies .......................................128
Finding Pictures Quickly (Index
and Calendar Playback) .............129
Zooming In (Playback Zoom) .....129
Rotating Pictures (Rotate) ..........130
Watching movies ........................130
Protecting Pictures (0) ...........131
Copying an image (Copy)...........131
Deleting Pictures (Erase) ...........132
Selecting Pictures for Sharing(Share Order) .............................132
Selecting Multiple Pictures (0,Copy Select, Erase Selected,
Share Order Selected) ...............133
Print order (DPOF) .....................134
Adding Audio to Pictures (R) ......136

Table of Contents

Processing options(Picture Mode) ........................106
Adjusting overall color(Color Creator)........................108“Leave Color” Effects(Partial Color) .........................109
Making fine adjustments to
sharpness (Sharpness) .......... 110
Making fine adjustments tocontrast (Contrast) .................. 110
Making fine adjustments tosaturation (Saturation) ............ 110
Making fine adjustments totone (Gradation) ..................... 111
Applying filter effects tomonochrome pictures(Color Filter)............................ 112
Adjusting the tone ofa monochrome image(Monochrome Color)............... 113
Adjusting i-Enhance effects(Effect) .................................... 113
Setting the color reproduction
format (Color Space) .............. 114
Changing the brightnessof highlights and shadows(Highlight&Shadow Control) ... 115
Assigning functions to buttons(Button Function) .................... 116

Playback Using Touch
Controls.....................................137
Selecting and protecting
images ........................................138

EN 5

4. Menu functions

139

Basic menu operations ............139

Table of Contents
6 EN

Using Shooting Menu 1/
Shooting Menu 2 ......................141
Restoring Default Settings(Reset)........................................141
Saving Settings(Assign to Custom Mode) ...........142
Processing options(Picture Mode) ............................142
Photo File and Image Size
Options (KK).........................142
Digital Zoom
(Digital Tele-converter) ...............143
Shooting automatically with afixed interval (Intrvl. Sh./Time
Lapse) ........................................144
Varying settings over a series ofphotographs (Bracketing) ...........146
Taking HDR (High Dynamic
Range) images (HDR) ................152
Recording multiple exposuresin a single image (Multiple
Exposure) ...................................154
Keystone correction andperspective control (KeystoneComp.)........................................156
Setting anti-shock/silent shooting(Anti-Shock r/Silent s) ..........157
Setting high resolution shooting(High Res Shot) ..........................158
Slowing the Shutter in BrightLight (Live ND Shooting) ............159

Using the Video Menu ..............161
Choosing an Exposure Mode(n Mode (Movie Exposure
Modes)) ......................................165
Reducing Flicker Under LED
Lighting (n Flicker Scan) ..........166
Frame Size, Rate, andCompression (nK).................167
Assigning Roles to the Front andRear Dials (n Dial Function) .....168
Sound Recording Options(Movie R) ...................................169
Using the Playback Menu ........170
Automatically Rotating PortraitOrientation Pictures for Playback(R)............................................170
Retouching Pictures (Edit)..........170
Combining Pictures(Image Overlay)..........................172
Creating Movie Stills(In-Movie Image Capture) ..........173
Trimming movies(Movie Trimming)........................174
Removing Protection from All
Pictures (Reset Protect) .............175
Cancelling a share order(Reset share Order) ...................175
Copying All Pictures (Copy All) ...175
Using the setup menu ..............176
Formatting the card
(Card Setup) ...............................177
Deleting all images(Card Setup) ...............................177
Wireless LAN Options(Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings) ..........178

Using “My Menu” .....................179

Table of Contents

Using the custom menus.........181
J AF/MF ...................................181
K AF/MF ...................................182
L AF/MF ...................................183
I AF/MF ...................................184
J Button/Dial/Lever ..................185
K Button/Dial/Lever ..................185
N Release/j/
Image Stabilizer..........................186
O Release/j/
Image Stabilizer..........................186
P Disp/8/PC ...........................187
Q Disp/8/PC ...........................188
R Disp/8/PC ...........................189
S Disp/8/PC ...........................190
T Exp/ISO/BULB/p ................191
U Exp/ISO/BULB/p ................192
V Exp/ISO/BULB/p ................193
W #Custom ..............................193
X K/WB/Color ........................194
Y Record/Erase ........................195
Z Record/Erase ........................196
a EVF .......................................196
b K Utility ...............................198
c K Utility ...............................198

Combined Auto and Manual
Focus (K AF+MF) ....................200
Setting Focus and Exposure with
the AEL/AFL Button(K AEL/AFL) ............................201
C-AF Tracking Sensitivity(K C-AF Sensitivity) .................203
C-AF Starting Focus Target(K C-AF Center Start) ..............204
C-AF Center Target Priority(K C-AF Center Priority) ..........205
Choosing the AF Home Position(N Set Home) ..........................206
AF-Target Selection(N Select Screen Settings)......207
Enabling AF-Target Selection
Wrap (N Loop Settings) ..........208
AF Target Size and Positioning(t Target Mode Settings) ........209
Matching AF-Target Selection
to Camera Orientation(K Orientation Linked N).......210
Lens Focus Range(AF Limiter)................................. 211
Fine-Tuning Autofocus(AF Focus Adj.)...........................212
Manual Focus Assist(MF Assist) .................................215
Adjusting Focus During
Exposures(Bulb/Time Focusing) .................216

EN 7

Table of Contents
8 EN

Multi Selector Press(S Center Button) .....................217
Multi Selector Tilt
(T Direction Key) ......................217
Assigning Roles to the Front andRear Dials (K Dial Function) ....218
Customizing the Fn Lever(K Fn Lever Function) ..............219
Burst Shooting Options(jL Settings/jH Settings) ....220
Reducing Flicker (Flicker
Reduction) ..................................222
Choosing the control panel
displays (K Control Settings) ...224
Adding information displays(G/Info Settings) .......................226
Choosing the Playback Zoom
Ratio (qa Default Setting)......229
Selfie Assist (Selfie Assist) .........229
Viewing camera images on TV(HDMI) ........................................230
Choosing a USB Connection
Mode (USB Mode)......................231
Live Bulb Update Frequency(Live Bulb) ..................................232
Live Time Update Frequency(Live Time)..................................232
Choosing the Shutter Speed(Composite Settings) ..................233
Reducing Flicker Under LED
Lighting (K Flicker Scan) .........234
Fine-Tuning Exposure(Exposure Shift)..........................235
Shutter speeds when the flash
fires (#X-Sync./#Slow Limit) ....236

Combinations of JPEG image
sizes and compression rates(K Set) .....................................236
Setting the card to record to(Card Slot Settings) ....................237
Saving lens info (Lens Info
Settings) .....................................239
Selecting the display style of the
viewfinder (EVF Style) ................240
Viewfinder Info Display Options(V Info Settings) .......................241
Button Hold Options(Press-and-hold Time) ................241
Correcting Fisheye Distortion(Fisheye Compensation) ............242

5. Connecting the Camera
to External Devices
244
Precautions for Using Wi-Fi
and Bluetooth® .........................244
Connecting to Smartphones
via Wi-Fi.....................................245
Installing Apps ............................245
Connecting to Smartphones(Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings) ..........246
Connecting When the Camera Is
Off (Power-off Standby) ..............249
Copying Pictures to
Smartphones ..............................251
Remote Photography Using a
Smartphone ................................253
Adding position information toimages ........................................254
Ending the Connection ...............255

Network Settings ......................272
Changing Passwords(Connection Password) ..............272
Restoring Default Wi-Fi/
Bluetooth® Settings(Reset Settings)..........................273
Connecting to Computers via
USB ............................................274
Compatible Computers...............274
Installing Software ......................274
Uploading Pictures as They Are
Taken (0) .............................275
Connecting the Camera for
High-Speed RAW Processing(M PC RAW) .............................276
Copying Pictures to theComputer (Storage/MTP) ...........277

Powering the Camera via USB(USB Power Delivery)...............278
Connecting to TVs or External
Displays via HDMI ....................279
Viewing Pictures on a TV
(HDMI) ........................................280
Using a TV Remote(HDMI Control) ...........................282

6. Cautions

283

Battery and charger .................283

Table of Contents

Connecting to Computers via
Wi-Fi...........................................256
Installing Software ......................256
Readying the Computer(Windows) ..................................257
Pairing the Computer with the
Camera (New Link) ....................258
Adjusting Wi-Fi Settings(TWi-Fi Connect) ...................260
Uploading Pictures as They Are
Taken ..........................................268
Ending the Connection ...............270

Using your charger abroad .....284
Usable cards .............................284
Interchangeable lenses............285
MF Clutch Lenses.....................286
Optional Accessories ...............287
Designated External
Flash Units .................................287
Wireless remote control flash
photography ...............................288
Other external flash units ...........290
Principal Accessories .................291
System chart .............................292

EN 9

7. Information

294

Table of Contents

Cleaning and storing thecamera .......................................294
Cleaning the camera ..................294
Storage .......................................294
Cleaning and checking the image
pickup device..............................295
Pixel Mapping - Checking theimage processing functions ........295
Shooting tips andinformation................................296
Error codes ...............................299
Default Settings ........................301
Memory Card Capacity ............316
Specifications ...........................318

10 EN

8. SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS321

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..........321

9. Additions/modifications
by firmware update
326
Index

330

Before You Begin
Read and Follow “8. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS”

While using the camera, consult this manual to ensure safe and correct operation. Be
sure to keep the manual in a safe place once it is read.
Olympus will not be held liable for violations of local regulations arising from use of thisproduct outside the country or region of purchase.
• Use of these features outside the country or region of purchase may violate local wirelessregulations; be sure to check with local authorities before use. Olympus will not be held
liable for the user’s failure to comply with local regulations.

Before You Begin

To prevent incorrect operation resulting in fire or other damage to property or harm to
yourself or to others, read “8. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” (P. 321) in its entirety before
using the camera.

Wireless LAN and Bluetooth®

The camera features built-in wireless LAN and Bluetooth®. Use of these features
outside the country or region of purchase may violate local wireless regulations; besure to check with local authorities before use. Olympus will not be held liable for theuser’s failure to comply with local regulations.
Disable wireless LAN and Bluetooth® in areas where their use is prohibited.
g “Disabling Wi-Fi/Bluetooth®” (P. 255, 271)
 User Registration
Visit the OLYMPUS website for information on registering your OLYMPUS products.

EN 11

Feature Index
FeatureFeature Index

Shooting Modeg

Feature41

n Specification Settings

Custom Mode

57

Monitor Display

39, 127

Viewfinder Display

240

Direct Button Functions

63

Live Controls

225n All x161

LV Super Control Panel88, 90nW Keep Warm Color

161n Picture Mode161

W Shooting Menu 1
Reset / Custom Modes

141

Picture Mode

106, 142

KK

100, 142

Image Aspect

98

Digital Tele-converter

143

j/Y (Drive Mode)78, 98Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse

144

X Shooting Menu 2
Bracketing

146

HDR

152

Multiple Exposure

154

Keystone Comp.

156

Anti-Shock r/Silent s

157

High Res Shot83, 158

Live ND Shooting

159

n Video Menu
n Mode Settings

12 EN

g

n Mode165

n Flicker Scan

166

nK

167

b ISO-Auto Set

161

n Noise Filter

161

n WB

161

n AF/IS Settingsn AF Mode64, 91n C-AF Speed

162

n C-AF Sensitivity

162

n Image Stabilizer

97n IS Level

162

n Button/Dial/Levern Button Function

116

n Dial Function

163

n Fn Lever Function

163

n Shutter Function

163

n Elec. Zoom Speed

163

n Display Settingsn Control Settings

164n Info Settings

164

Time Code Settings

164

8 Display Pattern

164

a View Assist

164

Movie R169

n HDMI Output

164

FeatureFeatureg

I AF/MF

R

170

Starry Sky AF Setting

184

Edit

170

Preset MF distance184

Print Order134

MF Assist

215

Reset Protect

175

MF Clutch

184

Reset share Order

175

Focus Ring

184

Copy All

175

Bulb/Time Focusing

216

TWi-Fi Connect

247

Reset Lens

184

Feature Indexg

q Playback Menu

J Button/Dial/Lever

G Custom Menu

K Button Function

116

K AF Mode

64

S Center Button

217

K AF+MF

200

T Direction Key217

K AEL/AFL

201

K Dial Function

185

AF Scanner

181

Dial Direction

185

K C-AF Sensitivity

203

K Fn Lever Function

219

K C-AF Center Start

204

Fn Lever/Power Lever

185

K C-AF Center Priority

205

J AF/MF

K AF/MF

K Button/Dial/LeverK Elec. Zoom Speed

185

KNMode Settings

182

qR Function

185

AF Area Pointer182

9 Lock185

N Set Home

206

v Lock185

N Select Screen Settings

207

N Release/j/Image Stabilizer

N Loop Settings

208

S-AF Release Priorityt Target Mode Settings

209

C-AF Release Priority

K Orientation Linked N

210

jL Settings
jH Settings

L AF/MF

Flicker Reduction

186
220
222

AF Targeting Pad

183

AF Limiter

183

AF Illuminator

183

K Image Stabilizer

97

I Face Priority

92

j Image Stabilizer

186

AF Focus Adj.

183

Half Way Rls With IS

186

Lens I.S. Priority

186

O Release/j/Image Stabilizer

EN 13

FeatureFeature Indexg

P Disp/8/PC
K Control Settings
G/Info Settings

224
226, 228g

Bulb/Time Timer

192

Live Composite Timer

192

Picture Mode Settings

187

Bulb/Time Monitor

192

j/Y Settings

187

Live Bulb

232

Multi Function Settings

187

Live Time232

Composite Settings

233
234

Q Disp/8/PC
Live View Boost

188

K Flicker Scan

Art LV Mode188

V Exp/ISO/BULB/p

Frame Rate

188

Metering

77

LV Close Up Settings

188

AEL Metering

193

qa Default Setting

229

N Spot Metering

193

z Settings

189

Exposure Shift193

W #Custom

R Disp/8/PC
Grid Settings

189#X-Sync.

236

Peaking Settings

189#Slow Limit

236

Histogram Settings

189

x+F

193

Mode Guide

189

#+WB

193

Selfie Assist

229#RC Mode288

S Disp/8/PC

X K/WB/Color

8

190

HDMI

230

USB Mode

190

T Exp/ISO/BULB/p

14 EN

FeatureU Exp/ISO/BULB/p

EV Step

191

ISO Step

191

K ISO-Auto Set

191

K ISO-Auto

191

K Noise Filter

191

K Low ISO Processing

191

Noise Reduct.

192

K Set

100, 142,
236

Pixel Count

100, 142,
236

Shading Comp.

194

K WB

94

K All x

194

KW Keep Warm Color

94, 96

Color Space

114

FeatureFeaturegc K Utility

Card Slot Settings

237

Battery Settings

198

File Name

195

Backlit LCD

198

Edit Filename

195

Sleep

32

dpi Settings

195

Auto Power Off

199

Copyright Settings

195

Quick Sleep Mode

199

Lens Info Settings

239

Certification

199

Feature Indexg

Y Record/Erasee Setup Menu

Z Record/Erase
Quick Erase

196

Card Setup

177

RAW+JPEG Erase196

X Settings

33

Priority Set

196

W

35

s

176

a EVF
EVF Auto Switch

196

Rec View

176

EVF Adjust

196

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings

178

EVF Style240

Firmware176

V Info Settings

196

EVF Grid Settings

197

V Half Way Level

197

S-OVF

197

My Menu179

b K Utility
Pixel Mapping

295

Press-and-hold Time198

Level Adjust

198

Touchscreen Settings

198

Menu Recall

198

Fisheye Compensation

242

EN 15

Names of parts
Names of parts

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
a
b
1 Mode dial lock .................................P. 41
2 Mode dial ........................................P. 41
3 Rear dial* (o).........................P. 44 – 50, 124, 128, 228
4 F (Exposure compensation) button................................P. 45, 47, 49, 51, 68
5 R (Movie)/H button ............P. 59/P. 133
6 Shutter button .................................P. 42
7 Front dial* (r)...........................P. 44 – 50, 75, 124, 128
8 Self-timer lamp/AF illuminator.......................................P. 78, 98/P. 183
9 Y (One-touch white balance) button........................................................P. 95
0 Z (Preview) button .......................P. 117
a Lens attachment mark ....................P. 28
b Mount (Remove the body cap before
attaching the lens.)c Stereo microphone ...............P. 136, 169
d ON/OFF lever ................................P. 32

c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l

m
n
o
p

e v button .......................................P. 185
AFm (AF/metering mode) button..................................................P. 64, 77
jY# (Sequential shooting/self-timer/
flash) button ....................................P. 78
f External flash terminal ....................P. 84
g Microphone jack coverh Cover for headphone jack.............P. 169
i Connector coverj Strap eyelet.....................................P. 19
k Lens release button ........................P. 30
l Lens lock pin
m Microphone jack (ø3.5 mm stereo minijack for third-party microphones)...P. 169
n Headphone jack (ø3.5 mm stereo minijack for third-party headphones) ...P. 169
o HDMI connector (Type D) .............P. 230
p USB connector (Type C)......................................P. 258, 275, 277* In this manual, the r and o icons represent operations performed using the front dial
and rear dial.

16 EN

1
2
3
4

d

5

e

6

Names of parts

9
0
a
b
c

f
g

7
8

h
m
n
i
o

j

p
k
l

1 Diopter adjustment dial ...................P. 38
2 MENU button ...............................P. 139
3 u (LV) button ..............................P. 38
4 Monitor (Touch screen)......................P. 36, 38, 43, 88, 126, 137
5 Viewfinder ...............................P. 38, 240
6 Eye sensor
7 Eyecup ..........................................P. 291
8  (Erase) button ..........................P. 132
9 Hot shoe .................................P. 84, 287
0 Fn lever ...........................P. 44 – 50, 219
a AEL/AFL / 0 (Protect) button.....................................P. 77, 201/P. 131
b Multi selector (S/T) *1 ............P. 69, 72
c ISO button ..............................P. 75, 226qd Arrow pad *2 ..................................P. 128
e Q button ........................P. 88, 128, 139
f INFO button ...........................P. 39, 127
g q (Playback) button....................P. 128
h Speaker
i PBH cover.......................................P. 24
j Tripod socket
k Battery compartment cover.............P. 20
l Battery compartment lock ...............P. 20
m CHARGE (Battery charge) lamp ...P. 22
n Card compartment cover ................P. 26
o Card slot 1 ......................................P. 26
p Card slot 2 ......................................P. 26
q Remote cable terminal cover(Remote cable terminal) ...............P. 291*1 The multi selector is designed to be used in two ways. You can place a finger lightly on
the multi selector and pivot it in the desired direction (T). You can also press down on thecenter of the multi selector much as you would a button (S).
*2 In this manual, the FGHI icons represent operations performed using the arrow pad.

EN 17

1 Preparation
1

Unpacking the box contents

Preparation

At purchase, the package contains the camera and the following accessories.
If anything is missing or damaged, contact the dealer from whom you purchased thecamera.

CameraCB-USB11 USB cable

Body cap *EP-12 eyecup *BLH-1 rechargeable
lithium-ion battery

Hot shoe cover *BCH-1 charger for
lithium-ion batteries

Strap

CC-1 cable clip

• Warranty Card

Basic Manual* The body cap, eyecup, and hot shoe cover attached to or inserted in the camera.

18 EN

Attaching the Strap

1

Before attaching the strap, remove the end
from the keeper loop and loosen the strap
as shown.

1

2

Pass the end of the strap through the strap eyelet and backthrough the keeper loop.

3

Pass the end of the strap through the buckle and tighten as shown.

Preparation

Keeper loop

• Attach the other end of the strap to the other eyelet.
• After attaching the strap, pull on it firmly to ensure that it will not come loose.

Attaching the cable clip
Use the cable clip to secure the cable, then attach itto the strap.
The cable clip can also be attached to the strap
eyelet.

EN 19

Charging and inserting the battery

11Charge the battery.
Charging indicator

Preparation

Charging inprogress

Less than 50%

Blinks in orange 1 time/second

50% or more
Less than 80%

Blinks in orange 2 times/second

80% or more
Less than 100%

Blinks in orange 3 times/second

Charging complete

Lights up in green

Charging error

Blinks in green 5 times/second(Charging time: Approximately 2 hours)
Direction indicating mark (C)Lithium ion charger

1

3

AC wall outlet

Charging indicator
Lithium ion battery

2
AC cable• Unplug the charger when charging is complete.
• Batteries inserted in the camera will charge when the camera is connected to an
external device via USB. g “Charging via USB” (P. 22)

2

20 EN

Confirm that the camera is off.

3Open the battery compartment cover.

Battery compartment cover

2

1

Battery compartment lock4

Loading the battery.

5

Close the battery compartment cover.

Direction indicating markPreparation

1• Use only BLH-1 batteries(P. 18, 320).

$• It is recommended to set aside a backup battery for prolonged shooting in case thebattery in use drains.
• Also read “Battery and charger” (P. 283).

 Removing the battery
Turn off the camera before opening or closing the battery
compartment cover. To remove the battery, first push thebattery lock knob in the direction of the arrow and thenremove.
• Contact an authorized distributor or service center if you
are unable to remove the battery. Do not use force.
• Never remove batteries or memory cards while thememory card access indicator (P. 36, 37) is displayed.

EN 21

Using External Power Sources
Connecting via USB

1
Preparation

The battery inserted in the camera will charge when the camera is connected via a
USB cable to a USB device such as a computer or to an optional USB-AC adapter
such as the F-5AC. The battery charges only when the camera is off.
Devices that conform to the USB Power Delivery (USB PD) standard can also be used
to power the camera. g “Powering the Camera via USB (USB Power Delivery)”(P. 278)
 Charging via USB

1

Confirm that the camera is off.

2

Connect the camera to the external device via USB.

• The CHARGE lamp light during charging. Charging
times vary with the output of the USB device. The lamp
goes out as the batteries reach full charge.

3

Charging stops when the camera is turned on.

• The battery cannot be charged via USB when the camera is on.
• If a charging error occurs, the CHARGE lamp will blink. Disconnect and reconnect theUSB cable.
• USB charging is available when the battery temperature is between 0 and 40 °C.
• Batteries inserted in optional HLD-9 power battery holders will not charge (P. 24).

%
• The supply of power ends when the battery is charged. Disconnect and reconnect theUSB cable to resume charging.
• The battery will not charge while the camera is off if pictures are being uploaded to asmartphone via Wi-Fi (background auto upload). g “Connecting When the Camera Is
Off (Power-off Standby)” (P. 249)

22 EN

 Powering the Camera via USB
The camera can be powered using mobile batteries or similar devices connected via
USB. The devices must:
Standard: Conform to the USB Power Delivery (USB PD) standard
Output: Be rated for an output of 9 V 3 A, 15 V 2 A, or 15 V 3 A

1Preparation

For more information, see “Powering the Camera via USB (USB Power Delivery)”(P. 278).

EN 23

HLD-9 Power Battery Holder

1

An optional HLD-9 battery holder can be used to power the camera for extended
periods. You can assign functions to the arrow pad and B-Fn button using the camera[Button Function] options. The optional AC adapter can be used with the HLD-9.
Make sure to turn the camera off when attaching and removing the holder.

Preparation

 Part names

AC terminal coverB-Fn2 button
Front dial
Shutter button
Rear dial
B-Fn1 button

Removal knob
Arrow padQ button
Vertical shooting lock

 Attaching the holder
Remove the PBH cover (a) on thebottom of the camera before attaching
the HLD-9. Once attached, make surethe HLD-9 removal knob is tightly
secured. Make sure to attach the PHB
cover to the camera when not using
the HLD-9.

aaStore the PBH cover (a) in the HLD-9.

 Loading the battery
Use BLH-1 battery. Once you load the battery, make sure to lock the battery cover.
1

Direction indicating mark2%
• The monitor battery-level indicator (P. 32) shows
when the camera is powered by the battery in the HLD-9.

24 EN

PBH

 Using the AC adapter (AC-5)
Open the AC terminal cover and connect the optional AC-5 AC
adapter to the AC terminal.
• The AC adapter cannot be used to charge the camera battery.

1
Preparation

 Using the buttons
The roles performed by the arrow pad and B-Fn buttons on the HLD-9 can beselected using the [Button Function] item. g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button
Function)” (P. 116)
 Main Specifications (HLD-9)
Power Supply

Battery: BLH-1 Lithium-ion Battery × 1
AC power: AC-5 AC Adapter

Dimensions

Approx. 132.7 mm (W) × 55.8 mm (H) × 66.0 mm (D)(5.2" × 2.2" × 2.6")

WeightApprox. 255 g (9.0 oz.) (excluding battery and terminal cap)

Splash resistance(when attached to camera)

Type

Equivalent to IEC Standard publication 60529 IPX1

• Use only the designated battery and AC adapter. Failure to do so could result in injury,
damage to the product, and fire.
• Do not use your nail to turn the removal knob. Doing so could result in injury.
• Only use the camera within the guaranteed operating temperature range.
• Do not use or store the product in dusty or humid areas.
• Do not touch the electrical contacts.
• Use a dry, soft cloth to clean the terminals. Do not clean the product with a damp cloth,thinner, benzine, or any other organic solvents.
• Remove the batteries before putting the camera into storage for periods of a month or
more. Leaving the batteries in the camera for extended periods shortens their lives,potentially rendering them unusable.

EN 25

Inserting the card1

The camera uses third-party SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory cards conforming to the SD(Secure Digital) standard. Read “Usable cards” (P. 284) before use.

Confirm that the camera is off.

2

Open the card compartment cover.

Preparation

1• The camera has two card slots.
1

2

3

Slide the card in until it locks into place.
• Do not forcibly insert a damaged or deformed card.
Doing so may damage the card slot.

Terminal area

4

26 EN

Close the card compartment cover.
• Close it securely until you hear it click.
• Be sure the card compartment cover is closed before
using the camera.
• Cards must be formatted with this camera before firstuse (P. 177).

2
1

 Removing the card
Press the card in to eject it. Pull out the card.
• Confirm that the camera is off before removing memory
cards.
• Never remove batteries or memory cards while the memory
card access indicator (P. 36, 37) is displayed.

1

Card Slots 1 and 2 support different types of memory card.
• Slot 1: Supports UHS-II and UHS-I• Slot 2: Supports UHS-I ** UHS-II cards function as UHS-I cards when inserted in
Slot 2.

Card slot 1

Preparation%

Card slot 2

Using Two Memory Cards
When two memory cards are inserted, you can choose how each card is usedaccording to your goals. g G Custom Menu Y > [Card Slot Settings] (P. 237)
• Record only to a selected card
• Record to a selected card until it is full, then record to the second card
• Record pictures with different sizes or compression ratios to different cards• Record copies of each picture to both cards

EN 27

Attaching a lens to the camera• See page 285 for information on compatible lenses.

1
Preparation

1

Confirm that the camera is off.

2

Remove the rear cap of the lensand the body cap of the camera.

Rear cap

1

2
1

3

2

Align the lens attachment mark (red) on
the camera with the alignment mark (red)on the lens, then insert the lens into thecamera’s body.

Lens attachment mark4

Rotate the lens clockwise until you hear it
click (direction indicated by arrow 3).
• Do not press the lens release button.
• Do not touch internal portions of the camera.

28 EN

3

5

Remove the front lens cap.

1

1

2
1

2

Preparation

1

1

EN 29

Removing Lenses

1

Confirm that the camera is off.

2

Hold the lens release button and rotate the lens asshown.

1
Preparation

Lens release button
2

1

30 EN

Using the monitor
Rotate the monitor for ease of viewing. The angle of the monitor can be adjusted
according to conditions at the time of shooting.

Preparation

Up to 90°
Up to 180°

1

Up to 270°

• Gently rotate the monitor within its range of motion. Attempting to rotate the monitor
beyond the limits shown below could damage the connectors.

• The camera can be configured to display a mirror image of the view through the lens or
automatically zoom power zoom lenses all the way out when the monitor is rotated for self
portraits. g “Selfie Assist (Selfie Assist)” (P. 229)

EN 31

Turning the camera on
Set the ON/OFF lever to the ON position.

1• When the camera is turned on, the monitor will turn on.
• To turn the camera off, return the lever to the OFF position.

Preparation

1

ON/OFF leverBattery level
The camera displays the level of the battery
currently in use. The battery level is shown in
10 increments.
MonitorLevel of current battery (%)

100%

The indicator flashes red
when the level reaches 10%.

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023%• The Fn lever can be configured to turn the camera on and off using the [Fn Lever/Power
Lever] option (P. 185) in G Custom Menu J.

Sleep Mode
If no controls are used for a set period, the camera will automatically enter suspend
operation to reduce the drain on the batteries. This is referred to as “sleep mode”.
• When the camera enters sleep mode, the monitor will turn off and operation will besuspended. Pressing the shutter or q button reactivates the camera.
• If no operations are performed for a set period after the camera enters sleep mode, thecamera will turn off automatically. The camera can be reactivated by turning it on again.
• The camera may require additional time to recover from sleep mode when [On] (enabled)is selected for [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Power-off Standby]. g “Connecting When
the Camera Is Off (Power-off Standby)” (P. 249)
• The delay before the camera goes to sleep or turns off automatically can be selected in
the G custom menu. At default settings, the camera will go to sleep after one minute andturn off automatically after four hours. g G Custom Menu c > [Sleep] (P. 199), [AutoPower Off] (P. 199)

32 EN

Initial setup
After turning the camera on for the first time, perform the initial setup by choosing alanguage and setting the camera clock.

1

Press the Q button when the initial setup dialog isdisplaying prompting you to choose a language.

100%

Please select your language.
Veuillez choisir votre langue.
Bitte wählen Sie Ihre Sprache.
Por favor, selecciona tu idioma.

2

Highlight the desired language using the front orrear dial or the FGHI buttons on the arrow pad.

1
Preparation• Date and time information is recorded on the card together with the images.
• The file name is also included with the date and time information. Be sure to set thecorrect date and time before using the camera. Some functions cannot be used if the date
and time have not been set.

CursorW

100%• The language-selection dialog has two pages of
options. Use the front or rear dial or the FGHI
buttons on the arrow pad to move the cursor between
pages.

HrvatskiýHVN\Ȼɴɥɝɚɪɫɤɢ

Dansk

EnglishNederlands

Eesti

Suomi

Français

DeutschǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ

Indonesia

Italiano

日本語ଛ˯ߪLatviski/LHWXYLǐN

Norsk

PolskiPortuguês(Pt)0DJ\DU

Set

W

100%

RomanianɊɭɫɫɤɢɣ

SrpskiῚ㜴)䴭℀*

Slovensky

6ORYHQãþLQD

Español

SvenskaѳъѕῚ㜴)修℀*

Türkçeɍɤɪɚʀɧɫɶɤɚ

Viet Nam

Setare3

Press the Q button when the desired language ishighlighted.

W

100%

HrvatskiýHVN\Ȼɴɥɝɚɪɫɤɢ

Dansk

EnglishNederlands

Eesti

Suomi

Français• If you press the shutter button before pressing the Q
0DJ\DU
DeutschǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ
button, the camera will exit to shooting mode and no
Indonesia
Italiano
Latviski/LHWXYLǐN
language will be selected. You can perform the initial
PolskiPortuguês(Pt)Norsksetup by turning the camera off and then on again to
Setdisplay the initial setup dialog and repeating the processfrom Step 1.
• The language can be changed at any time from the e setup menu. g “What to Do
If You Can’t Read the Display” (P. 35)

EN 33

4

1

Set the date, time, and date format.

Preparation• Use the HI buttons on the arrow pad to highlightitems.
• Use the FG buttons on the arrow pad to change thehighlighted item.
• The clock can be adjusted at any time from the e setup
menu. g e Setup Menu > [X Settings] (P. 176)
• Press the Q button when settings are complete.

X

100%

Y

M

D

Time

2020

Y/M/D

CancelThe time is displayed using a
24-hour clock.

5

Highlight a time zone using the FG buttons and press the Q button.

6

Press the Q button to set the clock.

• Press the INFO button to enable or disable daylight saving time.

• If the battery is removed from the camera and the camera is left for a while, the date andtime may be reset to the factory default setting.
• You may also need to adjust the frame rate before shooting movies. g n Video
Menu > [n Specification Settings] > [nK] (P. 167)

34 EN

What to Do If You Can’t Read the Display
If you see unfamiliar characters or words in other languages, you may not haveselected the language you intended. Follow the steps below to choose anotherlanguage.

Press the MENU button to view themenus.

100%ѯєьѬщѥҕ ѕѓѥё111іѨѯоѶ шѱўєчдѼѥўьчѯѠк

21ѱўєчѓѥёKK

YF

ѝ Ѥчѝҕњьѓѥё

4:3

чѧлъ
ѧ ѤјѯъѯјзѠь
j/Y

юѧ ч
o

іѣѕѣѯњјѥшҕѠѓѥё/Time Lapse
дј Ѥэ

юѧ ч
шкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥ

Preparation

1

MENU button

2

Highlight the e (setup) tab using FG
on the arrow pad and press the Q
button.

ѯєьѬшкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥ

100%
1

шкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥдѥіҙч

2

X дѥішкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥ
W

ѳъѕ

s

j±0 k±0юѧ ччѬѓѥёэ Ѥьъѩд
дѥішкзҕѤҟ ѥ Wi-Fi/Bluetoothѯђѧ іҙєѰњіҙ
дј Ѥэ

шкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥ

Arrow padQ button3

Highlight [W] using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.

ѯєьѬшкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥ

100%
1

шкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥдѥіҙч

2

X дѥішкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥ
W

ѳъѕ

s

j±0 k±0юѧ ччѬѓѥёэ Ѥьъѩд
дѥішкзҕѤҟ ѥ Wi-Fi/Bluetoothѯђѧ іҙєѰњіҙ
дј Ѥэ

4

Highlight the desired language using the FGHI
buttons and press the Q button.

шкзҕ
Ѥҟ ѥ
W

100%

HrvatskiýHVN\Ȼɴɥɝɚɪɫɤɢ

Dansk

EnglishNederlands

Eesti

Suomi

Français

DeutschǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ

Indonesia

Italiano

Norsk

Back

0DJ\DU

Latviski/LHWXYLǐN

PolskiPortuguês(Pt)

Set

EN 35

2

Shooting
Information displays while shooting

2

Monitor display during still photography

Shooting

1 2 3 4

5 6

w1

9 0

a b c d

HDR

1 ND8
LV

BKT

P
O
N
M
L
K
J

100%

j
T

78

A
e f gh i

FP RC BKT

FPS

Ÿ

99

FLK

T

k
l

W

28 mm

S-IS AUTO

#

p
S-AF

WB
AUTO

ISO-A
200

o
4:3

#-2.0

YF
4K

I
H

-3

C1 AEL

P

+2

30p

+7
1:02:03

250 F5.6 +2.0

GFED

C

mn

W
28 mm

o
p
q
r
s
t
u

Q
P

v

1:02:03

1023

BA

PC

z y x w

R

-3

S

G

Monitor display during movie mode

TU

±0 P 8V

L
R[

123min
TC 00:00:00:12 DF

W

X

BT.
709

off

T

C-AF

W
28 mm

M-IS 1

1

WB
AUTO

B
TO

ISO-A
200

M
M
4K

-3

n

36 EN

250 F5.6 +2.0

+2

30p

+7
● REC 00:12

0:29:47

YZK\

w Number of storable still pictures ...P. 316
x Card slot settings
Top: n Save slot..........................P. 237
Bottom: K Save settings ..............P. 99
y Highlight & shadow control ...........P. 115
z Top: Flash intensity control ...........P. 105
Bottom: Exposure compensation ....P. 68
A Level gauge ....................................P. 40
B Exposure compensation value........P. 68
C Aperture value .........................P. 44 – 50
D Shutter speed ..........................P. 44 – 50
E Histogram .......................................P. 39
F Preview .........................................P. 117
G AE lock....................................P. 77, 201
H Shooting mode.........................P. 41 – 60
I Custom mode .........................P. 57, 142
J Touch operation ..............................P. 43
K Flash intensity control ...................P. 105
L ISO sensitivity ...........................P. 75, 91
M AF mode ...................................P. 64, 91
N Metering mode ................................P. 77
O Flash mode .....................................P. 86
P Battery level ....................................P. 32
Q Flicker scan...................................P. 234
R Active connection to computer (USB)......................................................P. 274
S Live view boost .............................P. 188
T Audio recording level * ............P. 61, 169
U Headphone volume *...............P. 61, 169
V Recording level meter ...................P. 169
W a View assist .............................P. 164
X Movie audio recording ..................P. 169
Y n mode (movie exposure mode)......................................................P. 165
Z Recording time (displayed during
recording)........................................P. 59[ Time code .....................................P. 164\ Silent control tab .............................P. 61

2Shooting

1 Card write indicator ...................P. 21, 27
2 Wireless LAN connection
status ....................................P. 245, 256
3 Active Bluetooth® connection ......P. 246
4 Active connection to computer (Wi-Fi)......................................................P. 256
5 Wireless LAN connection......P. 247, 270
6 Pro Capture active ..........................P. 81
7 Super FP flash ..............................P. 287
8 RC mode.......................................P. 288
9 Bracketing .....................................P. 146
0 HDR ..............................................P. 152
a Multiple exposure..........................P. 154
b D Keystone compensation .........P. 156
c Fisheye compensation ..................P. 242
d Live ND filter photography ............P. 159
e High frame rate .............................P. 188
f Digital Tele-converter ....................P. 143
g Time lapse shooting......................P. 144
h Face priority/Eye priority .................P. 92
i Anti-flicker shooting ......................P. 223
j Zoom operation direction/Focal lengthk Internal temperature warning ........P. 300
l Flash ...............................................P. 84(blinks: charging in progress, lights up:
charging completed)m AF confirmation mark......................P. 42
n Dust reduction...............................P. 295
o Image stabilizer...............................P. 97
p Picture mode.........................P. 106, 142
q White balance .................................P. 94
r Drive mode (single-frame/sequential
shooting/self-timer/vibration reduction/
silent photography/Pro Capture/
High Res Shot) ..................P. 78 – 83, 98
s Aspect ratio .....................................P. 98
t K Image quality ..................P. 100, 142
u n Image quality ...........................P. 101v Available recording time ...............P. 317* Displayed during adjustments to [R VOL] and [P VOL]. g “Touch Controls (Silent
Controls)” (P. 61) and [n Dial Function] (P. 163)

EN 37

Switching between displays
The camera uses an eye sensor to automatically switch between the monitor andviewfinder displays. The monitor live view display and viewfinder also show information
on camera settings. Options are available for controlling display switching andchoosing the information shown.

2

Framing photos in the monitor

Framing photos in the viewfinder

Shooting

Put youreye to theviewfinder

MonitorViewfinder
100%

100%

S-IS AUTO

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

ISO-A
200

YF

YF
4K

4K

1:02:03

1:02:03

30p

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1023

Live view is displayed on the monitor.

• If the viewfinder is not in focus, put your eye to theviewfinder and focus the display by rotating the
diopter adjustment dial.
• Pressing the u (LV) button switches the display
in the monitor from live view to the super control
panel. Putting your eye to viewfinder displays theview through the lens. The monitor turns off.
• Shooting information can be viewed by pressing
the INFO button when the super control panel isdisplayed (P. 40).

P

250 F5.6 0.0

The viewfinder turns on automaticallywhen you bring it to your eye. Whenthe viewfinder is lit up, the monitor
turns off.
Diopter adjustment dialu (LV) button%• Display switching and viewfinder display options are available in the menus.
g G Custom Menu a > [EVF Auto Switch] (P. 196), [EVF Style] (P. 240)

38 EN

1023

Switching the information display
You can switch the information displayed in the monitor during
shooting using the INFO button.

2
100%

S-IS AUTO

INFO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Image Only

Basic Information

INFO

Shooting

INFO button

INFO

100%

100%

S-IS AUTO

S-IS AUTO

INFO
ISO-A
200

ISO-A
200

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Level Gauge display(Custom2)

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Histogram display(Custom1)• The items shown in the Custom 1 and Custom 2 displays can be chosen using [G/Info
Settings] > [LV-Info] (P. 227).
• The information shown in movie (n) mode can differ from that displayed in still
photography mode. g n Video Menu > [n Display Settings] > [n Info Settings](P. 164)• The information display screens can be switched in either direction by rotating the dial
while pressing the INFO button.
• To choose the items displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway, highlight[Image Only] in the [LV-Info] menu and press I.
Histogram display
More
A histogram showing the distribution of brightness
in the image is displayed. The horizontal axis
gives the brightness, the vertical axis the numberLessof pixels of each brightness in the image. Areas
Dark
Brightabove the upper limit at shooting are displayed inred, those below the lower limit in blue, and those within the spot metering range in green.
You can choose the upper and lower limits. g G Custom Menu R > [Histogram Settings](P. 189)
Highlights and Shadows
Highlights and shadows, defined according to the upper and lower limits for thehistogram display, are shown in red and blue. You can choose the upper and lower limits.
g G Custom Menu R > [Histogram Settings] (P. 189)

EN 39

Level gauge display
The orientation of the camera is indicated. The “tilt” direction is indicated on the vertical bar
and the “horizon” direction on the horizontal bar.
• The level gauge is intended as a guide only.
• Calibrate the gauge if you find it is no longer truly plumb or level. g G Custom Menub > [Level Adjust] (P. 198)

2
Shooting

Shooting Information
Shooting information can be viewed by pressing the INFO button when the super control
panel (P. 88) is displayed. Press the INFO button again to return to the super control
panel.
• Shooting information can be hidden using the [G/Info Settings] > [LV OFF-Info] (P. 227)
option in G Custom Menu P.
100%

2020.02.15 12:30:00
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
#
S-AF
# ± 0.0Offop
S-IS Auto
YF
M-IS
YF

P

Natural±0Normal
±0

S ±0

100%

P

1/

ISO
250 F5.6 AUTO
1600

F

sRGB
4K

S-AF

30p

250 F5.6 0.0

Super control panel

40 EN

INFO

1:02:03

1023

YF

WB
AUTO

0.0
Off

o p

YF

Shooting information

1023

Shooting still pictures
Use the mode dial to select the shooting mode, and then shootthe image.

Mode icon

2
Shooting

Indicator

 Types of shooting modes
For how to use the various shooting modes, see the following.
P

Program AE (P. 44)

A

Aperture-priority AE (P. 46)

S

Shutter-priority AE (P. 48)

M

B

Manual exposure (P. 50)
Bulb/time (P. 52)
Live composite (P. 54)

C1/C2/C3/C4 Custom (P. 57)
n1

Movie (P. 60)

Press the mode dial lock to unlock it, and then turn to set the mode you wish
to use.
• When the mode dial lock has been pressed down, the mode dial is locked. Each time
you press the mode dial lock, it switches between locked/released.

2

Frame the shot.
• Be careful that your fingers or thecamera strap do not obstruct thelens or AF illuminator.

Landscape position

Portrait position

EN 41

3

Adjust the focus.
• Lightly press the shutter button down to the first position (press the shutter button
halfway).
The AF confirmation mark (() will be displayed, and a green frame (AF target) will
be displayed in the focus location.
Press the shutter
button halfway

2
100%

AF confirmation markT

100%

Shooting

S-IS AUTO

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

ISO-A
200

YF

YF

4K

4K

30p

P

W
28 mm

250 F5.6 0.0

30p

1:02:03

P

1023

250 F5.6 0.0

AF frame

1:02:031023

AF target• If the camera is unable to focus, the AF confirmation mark will flash (P. 296).
• The AF frame varies with the option chosen for AF-target mode. The area coveredby the AF target can be chosen in the AF-target selection display (P. 69). The AF
frame is not displayed when q (all targets) is chosen for AF-target mode.

4

Release the shutter.
• Press the shutter button all the way (fully).
• The camera will release the shutter and take a picture.

• You can focus and take pictures using touch controls. g “Shooting with touch screen
operations” (P. 43)

Pressing the shutter button halfway and all the way down
The shutter button has two positions. The act of lightly pressing the shutter button to thefirst position and holding it there is called “pressing the shutter button halfway”, that ofpressing it all the way down to the second position “pressing the shutter button all (or the
rest of) the way down”.
Press halfway

42 EN

Press the rest of
the way downShooting with touch screen operations
Tap d to cycle through touch screen settings.
100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

2

1023

Shootingd Tap a subject to focus and automatically release the shutter. This option is notavailable in mode B (bulb), in n (movie) mode, or when [FAF] or [FAFb] isselected for AF mode (P. 64).
U Touch screen operations are disabled.
V Tap to display an AF target and focus on the subject in the selected area. You
can use the touch screen to choose the position and size of the focus frame.
Photographs can be taken by pressing the shutter button.
L Tap to choose the subject used for focus when multiple portrait subjects aredetected. L is displayed when an option other than [Face Priority Off] is selected
for [I Face Priority] (P. 92, 183). Subject selection is not available when a frame(high-speed movie recording) is selected in n (movie) mode (P. 103).
rate of Previewing the subject (V)1

Tap the subject in the display.
• An AF target will be displayed.
• Use the slider to choose the size of the frame.
• Tap S to turn off the display of the AF target.

100%

S-IS AUTO

14
10
7
5
Off

P

2

Use the slider to adjust the size of the AF
target, and then tap Y to zoom in at the frame
position.
• Use your finger to scroll the display when the
picture is zoomed in.
• Tap Z to cancel the zoom display.

3x

250 F5.6 0.0

100%

10x

• The situations in which touch screen operations are not available include the following.
In the one-touch capture white-balance display and when buttons or dials are in use• Do not touch the display with your fingernails or other sharp objects.
• Gloves or monitor covers may interfere with touch screen operation.
• You can disable the touch screen operation. g G Custom Menu b > [Touchscreen
Settings] (P. 198)

EN 43

Letting the camera choose aperture and shutter speed(P: Program AE)
The camera chooses the optimal aperture and shutter speed according to subject
brightness.

1

Rotate the mode dial to P.

2

Focus and check the display.

2
Shooting

3

100%

S-IS AUTO• The shutter speed and aperture chosen by the camera
are displayed.

ISO-A
200

Take pictures.

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Aperture
Shutter speed
Shooting mode

Subject Too Dark or Too BrightIf the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure, the shutter-speed and aperture
displays will flash as shown.
Display
Large aperture (low f/-number)/slow shutter speed

60" F2.8

Small aperture (high f/-number)/fast shutter speed

8000 F22

Problem/solution
The subject is too dark.
• Use a flash.
Subject is too bright.
• The limits of the camera metering system have been
exceeded. Use a third-party ND (Neutral Density)
filter to reduce the amount of light entering thecamera.
• Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available
in s (silent) mode. g “Shooting without shutter
sound (Silent s)” (P. 81), “Performing thesequential/self-timer shooting” (P. 98)• When using a fixed [K ISO] setting, change the setting. g “Changing ISO sensitivity(ISO)” (P. 75, 91)• The aperture value shown when the displays flash varies with the lens and focal length.

44 EN

 Adjusting Settings in Mode P
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 68)
Rear dial: Program shift• Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the F
button. Press the F button and then rotate the front or rear
dial.

2

• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g G Custom Menu
J > [K Dial Function] (P. 218)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever
can also be assigned other roles. g G Custom Menu J > [K Fn Lever Function](P. 219)

 Program ShiftWithout changing exposure, you can choose from different
combinations of aperture and shutter speed selected
automatically by the camera. This is known as program
shift.
• Rotate the rear dial until the camera displays the desired
combination of aperture and shutter speed.
• The shooting mode indicator in the display changes from P
to Ps while program shift is in effect. To end program shift,rotate the rear dial in the opposite direction until Ps is nolonger displayed.

Shooting%

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

Ps

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023

Program shift%• You can choose whether the display reflects the effects of exposure compensation or
maintains a constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the effects of
exposure settings are visible in the display. g G Custom Menu Q > [Live View Boost](P. 188)

EN 45

Choosing aperture2(A: Aperture-Priority AE)

In this mode, you choose the aperture (f/-number) and the camera automatically sets
the shutter speed for optimal exposure according to subject brightness. Lower aperture
values (larger apertures) reduce the depth of the area that appears to be in focus(depth of field), blurring the background. Higher aperture values (smaller apertures)increase the depth of the area that appears to be in focus in front of and behind thesubject.
Lower aperture values…

Shooting

F2.8

F4.0

…reduce depth of field and increase
blur.

1

Rotate the mode dial to A.

2

Choose an aperture.

3

Higher aperture values…

F5.6

F8.0

…increase depth of field.

• At default settings, aperture is selected by rotating therear dial.
• The shutter speed selected automatically by the camera
will appear in the display.

Take pictures.

F11

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

250 F5.6 0.0

Aperture value

46 EN

1:02:031023

Subject Too Dark or Too BrightIf the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure, the shutter-speed display will
flash as shown.
Display

Problem/solution

Slow shutter speed

60" F5.6

8000 F5.6

Overexposure.
• Choose a higher aperture value.
• If the subject is still overexposed at the higher value, the limitsof the camera metering system have been exceeded. Use athird-party ND (Neutral Density) filter to reduce the amount oflight entering the camera.
• Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available in s(silent) mode. g “Shooting without shutter sound (Silents)” (P. 81), “Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting”(P. 98)2
Shooting

Fast shutter speed

Underexposure.
• Choose a lower aperture value.

• When using a fixed [K ISO] setting, change the setting. g “Changing ISO sensitivity(ISO)” (P. 75, 91)

 Adjusting Settings in Mode A
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 68)
Rear dial: Aperture• Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the F
button. Press the F button and then rotate the front or reardial.

%
• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g G Custom Menu
J > [K Dial Function] (P. 218)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever
can also be assigned other roles. g G Custom Menu J > [K Fn Lever Function](P. 219)• You can choose whether the display reflects the effects of exposure settings or maintains
a constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the effects of exposure
settings are visible in the display. g G Custom Menu Q > [Live View Boost] (P. 188)
• You can stop aperture down to the selected value and preview depth of field.
g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)” (P. 116)

EN 47

Choosing shutter speed(S: Shutter-Priority AE)

In this mode, you choose the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets aperturefor optimal exposure according to subject brightness. Faster shutter speeds appear
to “freeze” fast-moving subjects. Slower shutter speeds add blur to moving objects,
lending them a sense of motion for a dynamic effect.
Slower shutter speeds…

2

60”

15

Faster shutter speeds…
30

Shooting…produce dynamic shots with a senseof motion.

1

Rotate the mode dial to S.

2Choose a shutter speed.

60

125

250

8000

…“freeze” the motion of fast-moving
subjects.

100%

S-IS AUTO• At default settings, shutter speed is selected by rotating
the rear dial.
• Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/8000 and
60 s.
• Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available in
S
250 F5.6 0.0
s (silent) mode. g “Shooting without shutter soundShutter speed(Silent s)” (P. 81), “Performing the sequential/selftimer shooting” (P. 98)• The aperture selected automatically by the camera will appear in the display.
ISO-A
200

3

48 EN

Take pictures.

YF
4K

30p

1:02:031023

Subject Too Dark or Too BrightIf the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure, the aperture display will flash as
shown.
Display

Problem/solution

Low aperture value

2000 F2.8

125 F22

Overexposure.
• Choose a faster shutter speed. Shutter speeds as fast as
1/32000 s are available in silent mode.
• If the subject is still overexposed at the higher speed, thelimits of the camera metering system have been exceeded.
Use a third-party ND (Neutral Density) filter to reduce theamount of light entering the camera.

2
Shooting

High aperture value

Underexposure.
• Choose a slower shutter speed.

• When using a fixed [K ISO] setting, change the setting. g “Changing ISO sensitivity(ISO)” (P. 75, 91)• The aperture value shown when the display flashes varies with the lens and focal length.

 Adjusting Settings in Mode S
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 68)
Rear dial: Shutter speed• Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the F
button. Press the F button and then rotate the front or reardial.

%
• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g G Custom Menu
J > [K Dial Function] (P. 218)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever
can also be assigned other roles. g G Custom Menu J > [K Fn Lever Function](P. 219)• You can choose whether the display reflects the effects of exposure settings or maintains
a constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the effects of exposure
settings are visible in the display. g G Custom Menu Q > [Live View Boost] (P. 188)
• To achieve the effect of a slow shutter in brightly-lit settings in which slow shutter speeds
are not otherwise available, use the live ND filter. g X Shooting Menu 2 > [Live ND
Shooting] (P. 159)
• Depending on the shutter speed selected, you may notice banding in the display causedby flicker from fluorescent or LED light sources. The camera can be configured to reduce
the effects of flicker during live view or when pictures are taken. g G Custom Menu
N > [Flicker Reduction] (P. 222), G Custom Menu U > [K Flicker Scan] (P. 234)

EN 49

Choosing aperture and shutter speed(M: Manual Exposure)In this mode, you choose the aperture and shutter speed. You can adjust settings
according to your goals, for example by combining fast shutter speeds with small
apertures (high f/-numbers) for increased depth of field.

1

Rotate the mode dial to M.

2Adjust aperture and shutter speed.

2
Shooting

100%

S-IS AUTO• At default settings, aperture is selected with the front
dial and shutter speed with the rear dial.
• Choose from shutter speeds of 1/8000–60 s.
YF• Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available insilent mode. g “Shooting without shutter soundM
250 F5.6 -2.01023
(Silent s)” (P. 81)• The display shows the difference between the exposure
Difference from optimal
produced by the selected aperture and shutter speed
exposure
and the optimal exposure metered by the camera. The
display will flash if the difference exceeds ±3 EV.
• When [AUTO] is selected for [K ISO], ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted
for optimal exposure at the selected exposure settings. [K ISO] defaults to [AUTO].
g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 75, 91)
ISO
200

4K

30p

1:02:03

3

Take pictures.

Subject Too Dark or Too BrightIf the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure with [AUTO] selected for [K ISO],
the ISO sensitivity display will flash as shown.
Display

50 EN

Problem/solution

ISO-A
LOW

Overexposure.
• Choose a higher aperture value or faster shutter speed.

ISO-A
6400

Underexposure.
• Choose a lower aperture value or slower shutter speed.
• If the warning does not clear from the display, choose a higher
value for ISO sensitivity. g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)”(P. 75, 91), G Custom Menu T > [K ISO-Auto Set]
(P. 191) Adjusting Settings in Mode M
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following settings.
Front dial: Aperture
Rear dial: Shutter speed2• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g G Custom Menu
J > [K Dial Function] (P. 218)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever
can also be assigned other roles. g G Custom Menu J > [K Fn Lever Function](P. 219)• Depending on the shutter speed selected, you may notice banding in the display causedby flicker from fluorescent or LED light sources. The camera can be configured to reduce
the effects of flicker during live view or when pictures are taken. g G Custom Menu
N > [Flicker Reduction] (P. 222), G Custom Menu U > [K Flicker Scan] (P. 234)
• You can choose whether the display reflects the effects of exposure settings or maintains
a constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the display maintains a
constant brightness for ease of viewing. g G Custom Menu Q > [Live View Boost](P. 188)

Shooting%

 Using Exposure Compensation in Mode M
In mode M, exposure compensation is available when [AUTO] is selected for [K ISO].
Because exposure compensation is performed by adjusting ISO sensitivity, apertureand shutter speed are not affected. g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 75,91), G Custom Menu T > [K ISO-Auto Set] (P. 191)
• Exposure compensation can be adjusted using the F
button. Hold the F button and rotate the front or rear dial.
• Exposure compensation is added to the exposure difference
shown in the display.

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

M

250 F5.6 -2.0

1:02:03

1023

Exposurecompensation
Exposure compensation plus
exposure difference

EN 51

(B: Bulb/Time)Long Exposures

Select this mode to leave the shutter open for a long exposure. You can preview thephoto in live view and end the exposure when the desired results have been achieved.
Use when long exposures are required, for example when photographing night scenes
or fireworks.

2
Shooting“Bulb” and “Live Bulb” Photography
The shutter remains open while the shutter button is pressed. Releasing the button ends the
exposure.
• The amount of light entering the camera increases the longer the shutter is open.
• When live bulb photography is selected, you can choose how often the camera updates
the live view display during the exposure.
“Time” and “Live Time” Photography
The exposure begins when the shutter button is pressed all the way down. To end theexposure, press the shutter button all the way down a second time.
• The amount of light entering the camera increases the longer the shutter is open.
• When live time photography is selected, you can choose how often the camera updates
the live view display during the exposure.

1

Rotate the mode dial to B.

2

Select bulb or time photography.

3• At default settings, the selection is made with the rear
dial.

100%

S-IS OFF

ISO
200

Press the MENU button.
• You will be prompted to choose the interval at which thepreview is updated.

YF
4K

30p

B

1:02:03

G

BULB F5.6

1023

Bulb or time photography

4
5

6

52 EN

Highlight an interval using FG on the arrow pad.

100%

Live Bulb
1sec

Press the Q button to select the highlighted option.
• The menus will be displayed.

Display CountISO L64 ~ISO 400 ~ISO 800 ~ISO 1600 ~Back

24 times
19 times
14 times
9 times
Set

Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• If an option other than [Off] is selected, [LIVE BULB] or [LIVE TIME] will appear in thedisplay.

7

Adjust aperture.
• At default settings, aperture can be adjusted using thefront dial.

100%

S-IS OFF

ISO
200

YF
4K

30p

B

BULB F5.6

G

1:02:03

1023

Aperture

Take pictures.
• In bulb and live bulb modes, keep the shutter button pressed. The exposure ends
when the button is released.
• In time and live time modes, press the shutter button all the way down once to start
the exposure and again to end it.
• The exposure ends automatically when the time selected for [Bulb/Time Timer] isreached. The default is [8 min]. The time can be changed. g G Custom Menu
U > [Bulb/Time Timer] (P. 192)
• [Noise Reduct.] is applied after shooting. The display shows the time remaining until
the process is complete. You can choose the conditions under which noise reduction
is performed (P. 192).

2
Shooting

8• During live time photography, you can refresh the preview by pressing the shutter button
halfway.
• Some limitations apply to the choice of ISO sensitivity settings available.
• Bulb photography is used in place of live bulb photography when multiple exposure,keystone compensation, or fisheye correction is in effect.
• Time photography is used in place of live time photography when multiple exposure,keystone compensation, or fisheye correction is in effect.
• During shooting, there are limits on the settings for the following functions.
Sequential shooting, self-timer shooting, time lapse shooting, AE bracket shooting,image stabilizer, flash bracketing, focus bracketing, multiple exposure, etc.
• [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 97) turns off automatically.
• Depending on camera settings, the temperature, and the situation, you may notice noiseor bright spots in the monitor. These may sometimes appear in pictures even when [Noise
Reduct.] (P. 192) is enabled.

%• Starry sky AF can be used for shots of the night sky. g “Choosing a focus mode (AFMode)” (P. 64), G Custom Menu I > [Starry Sky AF Setting] (P. 184)
• Display brightness can be adjusted during bulb/time photography. At default settings, thedisplay is darker than normal. g G Custom Menu U > [Bulb/Time Monitor] (P. 192)
• During bulb/time photography, the brightness of the subject in the display is enhanced forease of viewing when lighting is poor. You can choose whether to prioritize display quality
or display speed. g G Custom Menu Q > [Live View Boost] (P. 188)
• In mode B (bulb), you can adjust focus manually while the exposure is in progress.
This allows you to defocus during the exposure or focus at the end of the exposure.
g G Custom Menu I > [Bulb/Time Focusing] (P. 216)

EN 53

$ Noise2

While shooting at slow shutter speeds, noise may appear on screen. These phenomena
occur when the temperature rises in the image pickup device or image pickup device internal
drive circuit, causing current to be generated in those sections of the image pickup device
that are not normally exposed to light. This can also occur when shooting with a high ISO
setting in a high-temperature environment. To reduce this noise, the camera activates thenoise reduction function. g G Custom Menu T > [Noise Reduct.] (P. 192)

Lighten Blending(B: Live Composite Photography)

Shooting

Leave the shutter open for a long exposure. You can view the light trails left by
fireworks or stars and photograph them without changing the exposure of the
background. The camera combines multiple shots and records them as a single
photograph.

1

Rotate the mode dial to B.

2

Select [LIVE COMP].

3

Press the MENU button.

100%• At default settings, the selection is made with the rear
dial.
Press shutter button once
to prepare for composite
shooting.

• The [Composite Settings] menu will be displayed.

B

LIVE COMP F5.6 –0.3

1:02:03

1023

Live composite photography

4Highlight an exposure time using FG on the arrow
pad.

1sec

• Choose an exposure time of from 1/2 to 60 s.

5

Exposure time per image.
Exposure time and aperture
will determine your base exposure.

Press the Q button to select the highlighted option.
• The menus will be displayed.

Set

Back

6
7

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

8

Press the shutter button all the way down to readythe camera.

Adjust aperture.
• At default settings, aperture can be adjusted using the front dial.

• The camera is ready to shoot when [Ready forcomposite shooting] is displayed.

100%

ISO
200

Ready for composite shooting

B

54 EN

Composite Settings

100%

LIVE COMP F5.6 –0.3

YF
4K

30p

1:02:031023

9Press the shutter button to start shooting.
• Live composite photography will start. The display will be updated after eachexposure.

10 Press the shutter button again to end shooting.

• Some limitations apply to the choice of ISO sensitivity settings available.
• Limitations apply to some features during shooting, including:sequential shooting, the self-timer, interval timer photography, AE bracketing, flash
bracketing, focus bracketing, High Res Shot, HDR photography, multiple exposure,keystone compensation, the live ND filter, and fisheye correction.
• [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 97) turns off automatically.

2
Shooting• Shooting ends automatically after the time selected for [Live Composite Timer](P. 192). The default is [3h]. Other options can be selected.
• The maximum recording time available varies with battery level and shooting
conditions. For long recording times, use an optional power battery holder (P. 24)
and AC adapter (P. 25).

%
• Starry sky AF can be used for shots of the night sky. g “Choosing a focus mode (AFMode)” (P. 64), G Custom Menu I > [Starry Sky AF Setting] (P. 184)
• Display brightness can be adjusted during live composite photography. At default settings,
the display is darker than normal. g G Custom Menu U > [Bulb/Time Monitor](P. 192)• The exposure time for each exposure made during live composite photography can bechosen in advance using the menus. g G Custom Menu U > [Composite Settings](P. 233)

EN 55

Saving Custom Settings to the Mode Dial
(C1/C2/C3/C4 Custom Modes)

2• Save settings to positions C1 through C4.
• At default settings, custom modes are equivalent to mode P.

Shooting

Frequently-used settings and shooting modes can be saved as custom modes andrecalled as needed simply by rotating the mode dial. Saved settings can also berecalled directly from the menus.

Saving Settings

1(Assign to Custom Mode)

Choose a mode other than n and adjust settings
as desired.
• For information on the settings that can be saved, see
the menu list (P. 301).

2

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

3

Highlight [Reset / Custom Modes] in W Shooting
Menu 1 and press I on the arrow pad.

Shooting Menu 1

100%
11
2

• [Reset / Custom Modes] options will be displayed.

Reset / Custom Modes
Picture Mode
KK

YF

Image Aspect

4:3

Digital Tele-converter
j/Y

Off
o
Off

Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
Set

Back

4

Highlight [Assign to Custom Mode] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.

Reset / Custom Modes

100%

Reset

Basic

Assign to Custom Mode
Custom Mode Save Settings• [Assign to Custom Mode] options will be displayed.

Recall from Custom Mode

Set

Back

5

Highlight the desired custom mode ([Custom Mode
C1]–[Custom Mode C4]) using FG buttons andpress the I button.

Assign to Custom Mode

100%

Custom Mode C1--

Custom Mode C2--

Custom Mode C3--

Custom Mode C4--• The menu for the selected custom mode will be
displayed.
Back

56 EN

Set

6

Highlight [Set] using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.
• The [Assign to Custom Mode] menu will be displayed
again.
• Any existing settings will be overwritten.
• To restore default settings for the selected custom
mode, highlight [Reset] and press the Q button.

7

Custom Mode C1

100%

Set
Set current shooting
mode and settings.

Set

Back

2

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

• Custom modes can be updated automatically to reflect any changes made to settings
while the mode is selected during shooting.

Using Custom Modes(C1/C2/C3/C4)

Shooting$

To recall all saved settings, including the shooting mode:

1

Rotate the mode dial to the desired custom mode
(C1, C2, C3, or C4).
• The camera will be set to the settings for the selected
mode.

2

Take pictures.

• By default, changes made after recall will not be applied to the stored settings. The saved
settings will be restored when next you select the custom mode with the mode dial.
• If [Hold] is selected for [Custom Mode Save Settings], custom modes will be updated
automatically to reflect any changes made to settings while the mode is selected during
shooting. The changes will remain stored in the custom mode even after the mode dial isrotated to another setting. Custom modes can used in much the same way as modes P,
A, S, B, and M.

 Updating Custom Modes AutomaticallyCustom modes can be updated automatically to reflect any changes made to settings
while the mode is selected during shooting.

1

Highlight [Reset/Custom Modes] in W Shooting Menu 1 and press the Q
button.

23Highlight [Custom Mode Save Settings] and press I on the arrow pad.

4

Highlight [Hold] and press the Q button.

Highlight a custom mode ([Custom Mode C1]–[Custom Mode C4]) and press
the Q button.

EN 57

 Recalling Saved Settings
In modes other than n, you can recall the settings stored in custom modes [Custom
Mode C1] through [Custom Mode C4] but not the shooting mode. The shooting moderemains that currently selected with the mode dial.

2

1
2

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Highlight [Reset / Custom Modes] in W Shooting
Menu 1 and press I on the arrow pad.

Shooting Menu 1

100%
11
2

• [Reset / Custom Modes] options will be displayed.

Reset / Custom Modes
Picture Mode
KK

YF

Shooting

Image Aspect

4:3

Digital Tele-converter
j/Y

Off
o
Off

Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
Back3

Highlight [Recall from Custom Mode] using theFG buttons and press the I button.

Set
Reset / Custom Modes

100%

Reset

Basic

Assign to Custom Mode
Custom Mode Save Settings• The [Recall from Custom Mode] menu will be displayed.

Recall from Custom Mode

Back

4

Highlight the desired custom mode using the FG
buttons and press the I button.

Set
Recall from Custom Mode

100%

Custom Mode C1
Custom Mode C2
Custom Mode C3
Custom Mode C4

Back

5

Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.

Set
Custom Mode C1100%

Apply C1 settings? Current camera
settings will be overwritten.

• W Shooting Menu 1 will be displayed.

Yes
No

Back

6

Set

Press the MENU button to exit the menus.

%• [K Button Function] (P. 116) can be used to assign custom modes [Custom Mode C1]
through [Custom Mode C4] (P. 119) to a camera control, allowing the stored settings to
be recalled at the touch of a button in all modes except n. The selected shooting mode isalso recalled. Press the control to turn the custom mode on or off.
• Settings recalled by pressing a button cease to apply when you:
- Turn the camera off- Rotate the mode dial to another setting- Press the MENU button during shooting- Perform a reset- Save or recall custom settings

58 EN

Recording Movies
Recording movies in photo shooting modes
The R button can be used for movie recording even when the mode dial is not in the
n position.

1

Press the R button to begin recording.

2
Shooting• Movie you are recording will be displayed on the monitor.
• If you put your eye to the viewfinder, movie you are recording will be displayed in the
viewfinder.
• You can change the focus location by tapping the screen while recording.
• The camera will start the recording count and display the recording time.
R buttonLR
123min
TC 00:00:00:12 DF

T

W
28 mm

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

REC 00:12

0:29:47

Recording time2

Press the R button again to end recording.
• The sound of touch operations and button operations may be recorded.

• The AF target takes on the shape selected for movie mode. Rotate the mode dial ton (movie mode) and choose target shape in the AF target selection display (P. 69).
• The situations in which touch screen operations are not available include the following.
In the one-touch capture white-balance display and when buttons or dials are in use• CMOS image sensors of the type used in the camera generate a so-called “rolling
shutter” effect that can cause distortion in pictures of moving objects. This distortion isa phenomenon that occurs in pictures of fast-moving subjects or if the camera is moved
during shooting. It is particularly noticeable in pictures taken at long focal lengths.
• Movies over 4 GB in size are recorded over multiple files (depending on shooting
conditions, the camera may start recording to a new file before the 4 GB limit is reached).
The files can be played back as a single movie. g “Viewing Movies over 4 GB in Size”(P. 130)• When recording movies, use an SD card that supports an SD speed class of 10 or higher.
• A UHS-II or UHS-I card with a UHS speed class of 3 or better is required when:a movie resolution of [4K] or [C4K] is selected in the [nK] menu or a bit rate of [A-I](All-Intra) is selected in the [nK] menu
• When the camera is used continuously for extended periods, the temperature of theimage sensor will rise and noise and color splotches may be visible in the display.
Should this occur, turn the camera off and wait for it to cool. Noise and color splotches
are particularly likely to occur at high ISO sensitivities. If the temperature of the sensor
increases further, the camera will turn off automatically.

EN 59

• When using a Four Thirds system lens, the AF will not operate while recording movies.
• The R button cannot be used to record movies in the following instances:
During a multiple exposure (still photography also ends), while the shutter button ispressed halfway, in mode B, during sequential shooting, time-lapse photography,
keystone compensation, or fish-eye correction, or while the live ND filter is in use• When high-speed movie recording is selected for [nK], movies shot with [i-Enhance],[e-Portrait], or an art filter selected for picture mode will be recorded in [Natural] mode.

2$

Shooting• Some settings, such as AF mode, can be set separately for movies and photographs.
g “Using the Video Menu” (P. 161)

Recording movies in movie mode (n)Rotate the mode dial to n (movie mode) to record movies using the effects available
in P, A, S, and M modes (P. 165).
• Configuring the shutter button so that it can be used to record movies requires changes to[n Shutter Function] (P. 163).
• A beep does not sound when the camera focuses in movie mode.

60 EN

Touch Controls(Silent Controls)

You can prevent the camera from recording operating
sounds that occur due to camera operations whileshooting. Tap the silent shooting tab to display thefunction items. After tapping an item, tap the displayedarrows to select the settings.

Silent control tab
LR
123min
TC 00:00:00:12 DF

T

W
28 mm

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

250 F5.6 0.0

2

REC 00:12

0:29:47

Y (power zoom)

Zoom power zoom lenses in or out.

P (headphone volume)

Adjust volume when using headphones.

R (recording level)

Choose the recording level.

SS (shutter speed)

Adjust shutter speed when [S] (shutter-priority AE) or [M](manual) is selected for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode)(P. 165).

FNo (aperture)

Adjust aperture when [A] (aperture-priority AE) or [M] (manual) is
selected for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode) (P. 165).

F (exposurecompensation)

Adjust exposure compensation. If [M] is selected for [n Mode](movie exposure mode) (P. 165), exposure compensation isavailable when [AUTO] is selected for [n ISO] (P. 75).

ISO (n ISO sensitivity)

Adjust [n ISO] (P. 75). This option is available when [M] isselected for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode) (P. 165).

Shootingn• Silent controls are not available during high-speed movie recording (P. 103).

EN 61

Shooting Settings
The camera offers many photography-related functions. Depending on how often you
use them, you can access settings via buttons, icons in the display, or menus that canbe used for detailed adjustments.
DescriptiongDirect buttons

Adjust settings directly using buttons, including thoselisted below. Commonly-used functions are assigned to
buttons for quick access during viewfinder photography.
• The F, jY#, and ISO buttons

63

LV super control panel/
super control panel

Choose from a list of settings showing current camera
status. You can also view current camera settings.

88

Live controls

Adjust settings while viewing your subject in the display.

225

Menus

Adjust settings from menus displayed in the monitor.

139

Method2
Shooting
62 EN

Direct Buttons
Frequently-used photographic functions are assigned to buttons. These are referred toas “direct buttons”. Included are the buttons listed below, which can be used for basic
shooting settings.

3
4
5

2
Shooting

1
6
2
7

9
0

8
Direct button
1 Y button

Assigned function
One-touch white balance (P. 95)

2 Z button

Preview (P. 117)

3 u (LV) button

Display (monitor/viewfinder) selection (P. 38)

4 AEL/AFL button

AEL/AFL (P. 77)

5 ISO button

ISO sensitivity (P. 75)

6 Arrow pad

N (AF-target position) (P. 69)

7 jY# button

Sequential/self-timer shooting (P. 78, 86)

8 AFm button

AF/metering mode (P. 64, 77)

9 F button

Exposure compensation (P. 68)

0 R button

Movie recording (P. 59)%• Buttons can be assigned different roles. g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button
Function)” (P. 116)

EN 63

Choosing a focus mode

(AF Mode)

You can select a focusing method (focus mode).

2

1
2
3

Press the AFm button.

100%

p B C D E

Rotate the rear dial to select an option.

p

ESP

S-AF

Press the shutter button halfway to exit to theshooting display.

Single AF

P

S-AF C-AF MF C-AF+TR PreMF FAF

Shooting

AF ModeS-AF(Single AF)

The camera focuses once when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
When the focus is locked, a beep sounds, and the AF confirmation markand the AF target mark light up. This mode is suitable for taking picturesof still subjects or subjects with limited movement.

The camera repeats focusing while the shutter button remains pressedhalfway. When the subject is in focus, the AF confirmation mark lights up
C-AF
on the monitor and the beep sounds when the focus is locked at the first(Continuous AF) time.
Even if the subject moves or you change the composition of the picture,
the camera continues trying to focus.
Near

MF(Manual focus)

This function allows you to manually focus on
any position by operating the focus ring on thelens.

C-AF+TR(AF tracking)Press the shutter button halfway to focus; the camera then tracks andmaintains focus on the current subject while the shutter button is held inthis position.
• The AF target is displayed in red if the camera can no longer track thesubject. Release the shutter button and then frame the subject again
and press the shutter button halfway.
• Autofocus does not work while the AF target is displayed in red even if thecamera is tracking the subject.
• Tracking AF cannot be used with:
keystone compensation, High Res Shot, focus stacking, focus
bracketing, interval-timer photography, HDR photography, the live
ND filter, or fisheye correction.

PreMF(Preset MF)

The camera automatically focuses on the preset focus point whenshooting.

FAF(Starry Sky AF)

Choose this mode for pictures of stars in the night sky. Press the AEL/
AFL button to focus on the stars. g “Using Starry Sky AF” (P. 66))

Focus ring

• The camera may be unable to focus if the subject is poorly lit, obscured by mist or smoke,or lacks contrast.
• When using a Four Thirds system lens, AF will not be available during movie recording.

64 EN• [AF Mode] selection is not available when the lens focus ring is in the MF position and[Operative] is selected for [MF Clutch] (P. 184) in G Custom Menu I (P. 286).
• The Fn lever can be used to choose between the [AF Mode] settings assigned to Fn lever
Positions 1 and 2. g G Custom Menu J > [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 185, 219),
n Video Menu > [n Button/Dial/Lever] > [n Fn Lever Function] (P. 163)
Adjusting Focus Manually During Autofocus• Before proceeding, select [On] for [K AF+MF] (P. 200) in G Custom Menu J. b will
be displayed in [S-AF], [C-AF], [C-AF+TR], and [FAF] modes.

Choose a focus mode marked with an b icon (P. 64).

2

Press the shutter button halfway to focus using autofocus.

3

Keeping the shutter button pressed halfway, rotate the focus ring to adjust
focus manually.

• When recording movies, choose [S-AFb] for [n AF Mode] (P. 162).
• In [FAFb] mode, press the AEL/AFL button to initiate starry sky AF.

2
Shooting

1• To refocus using autofocus, release the shutter button and press it halfway again.
• Manual focus adjustment during autofocus is not available in [FAFb] mode.
• Manual focus adjustment during autofocus is available via the focus ring on M.ZUIKOPRO (Micro Four Thirds PRO) lenses. For information on other lenses, see the
OLYMPUS website.

4

Press the shutter button the rest of the way down to take the picture.

EN 65

Using Starry Sky AF

1
2

Select [FAF] for AF mode and press the Q button.

3

Press the shutter button all the way down to take the picture.

2

Press the AEL/AFL button to initiate starry sky AF.

Shooting• To interrupt starry sky AF, press the AEL/AFL button again.
• At default settings, starry sky AF does not start when the shutter button is pressedhalfway. To configure the camera so that starry sky AF does start when the shutter
button is pressed halfway, use [K AEL/AFL] (P. 201) in G Custom Menu J.
• The camera displays [Starry Sky AF is Running] during starry sky AF. The in-focus
indicator (() is displayed for about two seconds after the camera focuses; if thecamera is unable to focus, the in-focus indicator will instead flash for about two
seconds.

%• The [Starry Sky AF Setting] (P. 184) item in G Custom Menu I offers a choice of[Accuracy] and [Speed]. Mount the camera on a tripod before taking photographs with[Accuracy] selected.
• Your choice of AF-target modes (P. 69) is restricted to single target, 9-target group(3 × 3), and 25-target group (5 × 5).
• The camera will not be able to focus in bright locations.
• Starry sky AF cannot be used with Pro Capture.
• [K Orientation Linked N] (P. 210), [N Loop Settings] (P. 208), [AF Limiter](P. 211), and [AF Illuminator] (P. 183) are fixed at [Off], [I Face Priority] (P. 92) at[Face Priority Off], [Frame Rate] (P. 188) at [Normal], and [AF Scanner] (P. 181) at[mode1].
• The camera automatically focuses at infinity when starry sky AF is selected.
• When [On] is selected for [S-AF Release Priority] (P. 186) in G Custom Menu N, theshutter can be released even when the subject is not in focus.
• Manual focus is selected when a Four Thirds lens is attached.
• Starry sky AF is available with OLYMPUS Four Thirds lenses. It cannot, however, be usedwith lenses with a maximum aperture over f/5.6. For more information, visit the OLYMPUS
website.

66 EN

Setting a focus position for PreMF

1
2

Select [PreMF] for AF mode, and press INFO button.

3

Press the Q button.

Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
• Focus can be adjusted by rotating the focus ring.

2
Shooting• The PreMF function can be recalled by pressing the button to which [Preset MF] isassigned in [Button Function] (P. 116). Press the button again to return to the original AF.
• The distance for the preset focus point can be set with [Preset MF distance] in G Custom
Menu I (P. 184).
• The camera also focuses at the preset distance:- when turned on and- when you exit the menus to the shooting display.

Manual Focus Adjustment
When [S-AFb], [C-AFb], [MF], [C-AF+TRb], [PreMF], or [FAFb] is selected for
AF mode, focus can be adjusted manually during exposures or while pictures are being
taken in [Sequential Low] mode.
• In mode B (bulb), manual focus adjustment can be performed according to the option
selected for [Bulb/Time Focusing] (P. 216).

EN 67

Controlling exposure(Exposure Compensation)

The exposure selected automatically by the camera can be altered to suit your artistic
intent. Choose positive values to make pictures brighter, negative values to make themdarker.
• Exposure compensation is available in modes P, A, S, and n. To enable exposurecompensation in mode M, select [AUTO] for [K ISO] (P. 75).

2
Shooting

Negative (–)

No compensation (0)Positive (+)• Exposure compensation can be adjusted by up to ±5.0 EV.
S-IS AUTO
The exposure bar in the display shows values of up to±3.0 EV. The bar flashes when a value outside this range isselected.
YF• During movie recording, exposure compensation can be
adjusted by ±3.0 EV.
P
250 F5.6 +1.3
1023
• The viewfinder and live view show the effects of values notexceeding ±3.0 EV.
Exposure Exposure• To preview the effects of exposure compensation incompensation bar
live view, select [Off] for [Live View Boost] (P. 188) in
G Custom Menu Q.
• The front and rear dials or touch controls can be used to adjust exposure during movie
recording.
100%

ISO-A
200

4K

30p

1:02:03

 Adjusting Exposure Compensation
Modes P, A, and S• In movie mode, exposure compensation can be adjusted when [P], [A], or [S] is selected
for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode).

1

Rotate the front dial to adjust exposure compensation.

2

Take pictures.

• You can also choose a value by pressing the F button and using HI on the arrowpad.
• To reset exposure compensation, press the Q button.

Mode M• In movie mode, exposure compensation can be adjusted when [M] is selected for[n Mode] (movie exposure mode). You must first however select [On] for n Video
Menu > [n Specification Settings] > [b ISO-Auto Set] > [b ISO-Auto] (P. 161) and[AUTO] for [n ISO] (P. 75).

68 EN

1

Press the F button and then rotate the front dial or rear dial to adjust
exposure compensation.

2

Take pictures.

%• F (exposure compensation) can be assigned to other controls. g “Assigning functions
to buttons (Button Function)” (P. 116)

Choosing an AF Target Mode1

(AF Target Mode)

Keep the multi selector pressed whilerotating the front or rear dial.

2

Multi selector

Shooting+• The camera cycles through AF target modes as shown.
100%

100%

100%

q

M

o

100%

100%

100%

s

r

n

• At default settings, custom target modes (P. 71) are not displayed. Display can be
enabled by going to [KNMode Settings] (P. 182) in G Custom Menu K placing
checks (v) next to the desired options.

2

Release the multi selector when the desired mode is displayed.
• AF target mode options will no longer be displayed.

• The following reduce the number of AF targets available:- Selecting [On] for [Digital Tele-converter] (P. 143)
- Selecting an option other than [4:3] for [Aspect] (P. 98)%• Settings can also be adjusted by first pressing a button and then using the front orrear dial. Access the AF-target display by pressing the control to which [N] has been
assigned via [Button Function] (P. 116). You can then adjust settings by rotating the frontor rear dial. At default settings, [N] is assigned to the arrow pad.
• The AF target display can be accessed by pressing the multi selector. The multi selector
can be configured using [S Center Button] (P. 217) in G Custom Menu J.
• Separate AF target modes can be selected according to camera orientation.
g G Custom Menu K > [K Orientation Linked N] (P. 210)

EN 69

2
Shooting• The following focus settings can be recalled simultaneously using the Fn lever. Separate
settings can be assigned to Positions 1 and 2. Use this option to quickly adjust settings
according to shooting conditions.
[AF Mode] (P. 64), [AF Target Mode] (P. 69), and [AF Target Point] (P. 72)
The Fn lever can be configured using the [K Fn Lever Function] item (P. 219) in
G Custom Menu J or the [n Button/Dial/Lever] > [n Fn Lever Function] item (P. 163)in the video menu.
• You can adjust AF target settings for [C-AF]. g G Custom Menu J > [K C-AF Center
Start] (P. 204) and [K C-AF Center Priority] (P. 205)
• Separate options can be selected for still photography and movie mode.

 AF Target Modes• The only options available when FAF is selected are single target, 9-target group (3 × 3),
and 25-target group (5 × 5) modes.
• The only options available during movie recording are single target, 9-target group (3 × 3),
25-target group (5 × 5), and all target (11 × 9) modes.
M Single Target

100%

Select a single focus target.

M

o Small Target

100%

Further reduce the target size for single-target AF-target
selection. Use for pinpoint focus on small subjects.
o

N 5-Target Group100%

Select a group of 5 targets, arranged in a cross. The
camera chooses the target used for focus from within theselected group.
nr 9-Target Group (3 × 3)

100%

Select a group of 9 targets, arranged in a square. The
camera chooses the target used for focus from within theselected group.
r

70 EN

s 25-Target Group (5 × 5)

100%

Select a group of 25 targets, arranged in a square. The
camera chooses the target used for focus from within theselected group.
sq All Targets

100%• The camera chooses from 121 (11 × 11) targets during still
photography and from 99 (11 × 9) targets in movie mode.

q2
Shooting

The camera chooses the target used for focus from allavailable targets.

u/v/w/x Custom Target

Custom target modes can be displayed by going to [KNMode Settings] (P. 182) in
G Custom Menu K and placing checks (v) next to the desired options.
Use the AF target mode selected for [t Target Mode Settings] (P. 209) in
G Custom Menu K. The default setting is single target.

%• To enable cluster AF targeting when q (all targets) is
selected and either [C-AF] is chosen for [n AF Mode]or [S-AF], [S-AFb], [C-AF], or [C-AFb] is chosen for[K AF Mode] (P. 64), select [On2] for [AF Area Pointer](P. 182). The camera will display AF targets for all areasthat are in focus.

100%

EN 71

Choosing a Focus Target(AF Target Point)

The frame showing the location of the focus point is referred to as the “AF target”. You
can position the target over your subject. At default settings, the multi selector is used
to position the AF target.

1

2

Use the multi selector to position the AF target.
• The target can also be positioned using the arrow pad.
Pressing FGHI buttons displays the AF target.

Shooting

Multi selector• The AF target is displayed at the start of the operation.
• To select the center AF target, press the multi selector
or press and hold the Q button.
• You can choose whether AF-target selection “wraps
around” the edges of the display (P. 208).

100%

M

AF target

2

Take pictures.
• The AF-target selection display will clear from the monitor when the shutter button ispressed halfway.
• The AF frame is displayed in place of the selected AF target.

• If [N] is assigned to a control using [Button Function] (P. 116), you can press thecontrol and then use the arrow pad or multi selector to choose the AF target.
• You can reposition the AF target during focusing when [C-AF] or [C-AFb] is selected instill photography mode.
• You can also reposition the AF target during movie recording.
• The size and number of the AF target changes depending on the [Digital Tele-converter](P. 143), [Aspect] (P. 98), and group target (P. 69) settings.

%• When [On] is selected for [AF Targeting Pad] (P. 183), you can reposition the AF target
using monitor touch controls while framing your subject in the viewfinder.

72 EN

Zoom frame AF/Zoom AF(Super Spot AF)

You can zoom in on the display during shooting. For greater precision during focusing,zoom in on the focus area. At higher zoom ratios, you can focus on areas smaller than
the standard focus target. You can reposition the focus area as desired during zoom.
• Before you will be able to use Super Spot AF, you must use [Button Function] (P. 116) toassign [a] (P. 119) to a camera control.
100%

S-IS AUTO

a

100%

ISO-A
200

YF

Off

YF

4K

4K

1:02:03

1:02:03

30p

P

2

100%

S-IS AUTO

Shooting

ISO-A
200

a

250 F5.6 0.0

Shooting display

1023

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1023

Zoom frame AF display

10xaZoom AF displaya (Press and hold) / Q

1

Press the button to which [a] (magnify) is
assigned.
• The zoom frame will be displayed.

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

Off

YF
4K

30p

P

2

Position the frame using the multi selector.
• To re-center the frame, press the multi selector or press
and hold the Q button.
• The frame can also be positioned using the arrow pad(FGHI).

Adjust the size of the zoom frame to choose thezoom ratio.
• Press the INFO button and then use the FG buttons
or the front or rear dial to adjust the size of the zoom
frame.
• Press the Q button to accept and exit.

1023

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

Off

YF
4K

30p

P

3

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

100%

3x

EN 73

4

Press the button to which [a] is assigned once
more.
• The camera will zoom the selected area in to fill thedisplay.
• Use the front or rear dial to zoom in or out.
• Use the multi selector to scroll the display.
• Use the arrow pad (FGHI) to scroll the display.
• In shooting mode M (manual) or B (bulb), you canpress the INFO button during zoom to choose apertureor shutter speed.
• Press the a button to return to the zoom frame.
• Press the Q button to end focus zoom.
• You can also end focus zoom by pressing and holding
the a button.

2
Shooting

5

100%

10x

100%

250 F5.6

Exposure adjustment display
for modes M and B

Press the shutter button halfway to focus using autofocus.

• Focus zoom applies to the display only. Pictures taken with the camera are not affected.

%• Touch controls can be used for focus zoom. g “Shooting with touch screen operations”(P. 43)• You can make the area in the zoom frame brighter for easier focus or configure thecamera to exit focus zoom when the shutter button is pressed halfway to focus.
g G Custom Menu Q > [LV Close Up Settings] (P. 188)

74 EN

Changing ISO sensitivity(ISO)

Select a value according to subject brightness. Higher values let you photographdarker scenes but also increase image “noise” (mottling). Select [AUTO] to let thecamera adjust sensitivity according to lighting conditions.
• ISO sensitivity is fixed at [AUTO] during movie recording when [P], [A], or [S] is selected
for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode). Setting [n Mode] to [M] allows other options to be
selected.

1

Press the ISO button, and rotate the front or rear dial to select a value.

L64, L100,
200–25600(still photography)

Choose a value for ISO sensitivity. ISO 200 offers a good balance
between noise and dynamic range. Choose [L100] or [L64] for larger
apertures (higher f-numbers) or slower shutter speeds. [L64] isequivalent to ISO 64, [L100] to ISO 100.
• [L64] and [L100] are available at all exposure step values.
• [L64] and [L100] reduce dynamic range.

200–6400(movie recording)Choose a value for [n ISO]. ISO 200 offers a good balance between
noise and dynamic range. This option is available when [M] isselected for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode).

Shooting

AUTO

Sensitivity is adjusted automatically according to shooting conditions.
Use [K ISO-Auto Set] (P. 191) in G Custom Menu T to choose
the maximum sensitivity selected by the camera and the shutter
speed at which auto sensitivity control takes effect during still
photography.
During movie recording, ISO sensitivity will be set to values offrom ISO 200 to 6400. When [M] is selected for [n Mode] (movie
exposure mode), auto ISO sensitivity control can be enabled by
selecting [On] for [b ISO-Auto Set] (P. 161) > [b ISO-Auto].
You can also choose maximum and standard values for ISO
sensitivity.

2• Combining values over ISO 8000 with settings that use an electronic shutter (for example,
silent mode or focus bracketing) sets the flash sync speed to 1/20 s.
• Regardless of the value selected for ISO sensitivity, the flash sync speed for photos takenusing ISO bracketing in silent mode is 1/20 s.
• When [M] is selected for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode), ISO sensitivity can be
adjusted during recording using touch controls (P. 61) or by rotating the front or reardial.
• If [Dramatic Tone] or [Watercolor] is chosen for picture mode during still photography,
sensitivity will not exceed ISO 1600 when [AUTO] is selected.

EN 75

2
Shooting
76 EN• The following restrictions apply when [M] is selected for [n Mode] (movie exposuremode):• [l OM-Log400] selected for picture mode:- If the frame rate selected for [nK] is 24p, 25p, or 30p, [AUTO] is restricted tosensitivities of ISO 400–3200.
- If the frame rate selected for [nK] is 50p or 60p, [AUTO] is restricted tosensitivities of ISO 400–6400.
- The lowest value that can be selected manually is ISO 400.
• Other picture modes:- If the frame rate selected for [nK] is 24p, 25p, or 30p, [AUTO] is restricted tosensitivities of ISO 200–3200.

%• The role performed by the ISO button can also be assigned to other controls.
g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)” (P. 116)

Choosing how the camera measures brightness(Metering)

You can choose how the camera meters subject brightness.

1
2
3

Press the AFm button.
Rotate the front dial to select an option.
Press the shutter button halfway to exit to theshooting display.

Metering
100%

p B C D E

p

ESP

S-AF

2

P

S-AF C-AF MF C-AF+TR PreMF FAF

p Digital ESP metering

Suited to most scenes, including back-lit subjects. The
camera meters 324 areas of the frame and calculates optimal
exposure taking into consideration the nature of the scene.

Center weighted
Baveraging metering

Suited to compositions that place the main
subject at the center of the frame. The camera
sets exposure based on the average light level
for the entire frame while assigning the greatest
weight to the area in the center.

C Spot metering

Use a specific area of the subject meter
exposure. The camera meters a small portion(approximately 2%) of the frame.

D

Spot metering(highlight)

Increases spot metering exposure. Ensures bright subjects
appear bright.

E

Spot metering(shadow)

Lowers spot metering exposure. Ensures dark subjects
appear dark.

Shooting

Single AF• The spot metering position can be set at the selected AF target. g G Custom Menu
V > [N Spot Metering] (P. 193)

Locking the exposure(AE Lock)

You can lock the exposure by pressing the AEL/AFL button. Use this when you wantto adjust the focus and exposure separately or when you want to shoot several images
at the same exposure.
AE lock is available only when [mode1] or [mode2] is selected for [K AEL/AFL](P. 201) during still photography (note, however, that when [FAF] or [FAFb] isselected for AF mode, AE lock is available only in [mode1]).
• If the AEL/AFL button has been assigned a different role, you will need to assign [AEL/
AFL] (P. 117) to a control using [Button Function] (P. 116).
• If you press the AEL/AFL button once, the exposure is locked and u is displayed.
g “Setting Focus and Exposure with the AEL/AFL Button (K AEL/AFL)” (P. 201)
• Press the AEL/AFL button once again to release the AE Lock.
• The lock will be released if you operate the mode dial, MENU button, or Q button.

EN 77

Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting
Adjust settings for burst or self-timer photography. Choose an option according to yoursubject. Other options, including anti-shock and silent modes, are also available.

2

1
2

Press the jY# button.
Rotate the rear dial to select a value.
• Custom self-timer options can be viewed by pressing the INFO button.

Shooting

SingleT

The camera takes photos at up to about 15 fps while the
shutter button is held all the way down. Focus, exposure,and white balance are locked at the values for the first shot
Sequential Highin each series. You can choose the frame advance rate andthe maximum number of shots in each series (P. 220). The
frame advance rate drops at [K ISO] settings over 8000.

S

Sequential Low

The camera takes photos at up to about 10 fps while the
shutter button is held all the way down. You can choose
the frame advance rate and the maximum number of shotsin each series (P. 220). Focus and exposure conform to
the options selected for [K AF Mode] (P. 64, 91) and[K AEL/AFL] (P. 201). If [C-AF], [C-AFb], [C-AF+TR],
or [C-AF+TRb] is selected for [K AF Mode], the camera
will focus before each shot. The frame advance rate drops at[K ISO] settings over 8000.

X

Y 12sec

The shutter is released 12 seconds after the shutter button
is pressed all the way down. The self-timer lamp will light for
about 10 seconds and then start to flash about 2 seconds
before the shutter is released. The camera focuses when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.

Z

Y 2secWhen the shutter button is pressed all the way down, theself-timer lamp will start to flash and a photo will be taken
after about 2 seconds. The camera focuses when the shutter
button is pressed halfway.

cCustom
Self-Timer

Adjust self-timer settings, including the self-timer delay andthe number of shots taken when the timer expires (P. 80).

♦S
(sample Anti-Shock r
icon)

78 EN

Single-frame advance. The camera takes one photo eachtime the shutter button is pressed all the way down.

oReduce the slight blur caused by shutter motion (P. 80).
Available in single-frame, sequential low, and self-timer
modes.

♥S(sample Silent s
icon)

Pro CaptureHighq

Pro Capture
LowhHigh Res Shot

Capture starts when the shutter button is pressed halfway. The
camera starts recording pictures, including those captured while
the button was pressed halfway, when the button is pressed
all the way down (P. 81). In p mode, focus, exposure, andwhite balance are locked at the values metered when the shutter
button is pressed halfway. At [K ISO] settings over ISO 8000,
the maximum frame advance rate drops to 30 fps.

2
Shootingp

Take pictures with the electronic shutter. Use for shutter
speeds faster than 1/8000 s or in settings where the sound of
the shutter would be unwelcome (P. 81). Available in singleframe, sequential low, sequential high, and self-timer modes.
Frame advance rates of up to 60 fps are available whensequential high is selected. In ♥T mode, focus, exposure,and white balance are locked at the values for the first shotin each series. The flash sync speed is 1/50 s. At [K ISO]settings over ISO 8000, the flash sync speed drops to 1/20 s
and the maximum frame advance rate to 30 fps.

Take high-resolution photos (P. 83). Use [High Res Shot](P. 158) > [Shooting Method] in X Shooting Menu 2 tochoose a shooting method.

• To cancel the activated self-timer, press G.
• Fix the camera securely on a tripod for self-timer shooting.
• If you stand in front of the camera to press the shutter button when using the self-timer,
the picture may be out of focus.
• In S and q modes, the camera displays the view through the lens during shooting. In
T and p modes, it displays the shot immediately preceding the current frame.
• The speed of sequential shooting varies depending on the lens you are using and thefocus of the zoom lens.
• During sequential shooting, if the battery level icon blinks due to low battery, the camera
stops shooting and starts saving the pictures you have taken on the card. The camera
may not save all of the pictures depending on how much battery power remains.
• Some drive modes are not displayed by default. Use [j/Y Settings] (P. 187) in
G Custom Menu P to choose the modes displayed.
• Photographs taken in silent and pro-capture modes may be distorted if the subject orcamera moves quickly during shooting.
• To use the flash in [Silent s] mode (P. 81), select [Allow] for [Anti-Shock r/Silent s](P. 157) > [Silent s Mode Settings] > [Flash Mode] in X Shooting Menu 2.
• The frame advance rate may slow when [On1] or [On2] is selected for [Live View Boost].
Select [Off] to maintain a consistent frame rate. g G Custom Menu Q > [Live View
Boost] (P. 188)

EN 79

Self-Timer Options(c Custom Self-timer)

Adjust self-timer settings, including the shutter release delay and the number of shots
taken when the timer expires.

2
Shooting

1
2

Press the jY# button.

3

Highlight items using HI on the arrow pad anduse FG to choose an option.

100%

#

0 $ 1 2 M 3Fill In

Highlight c (custom self-timer) by rotating the rear
dial and press the INFO button.

Settings o
Y1s

×3

0.5s

Off

Custom Self-timerP

p S ƆS qh

Number of Frames

Choose the number of shots taken when the timer expires.

Y Timer

Choose how long the camera waits to begin shooting after the
shutter button is pressed all the way down.

Interval Length

If the number of shots is 2 or more, choose the interval between the
shots taken when the timer expires.

Every Frame AF

If the number of shots is 2 or more, choose whether the camera
focuses before each shot.

Shooting without the vibration caused by shutter button operations(Anti-Shock r)
Reduce the slight blur caused by shutter motion.
Use this option when even slight camera motion can cause blur, for example during
macro or telephoto photography.
You must first enable display of this option by selecting [j/Y Settings] (P. 187) in
G Custom Menu P and placing a check (v) next to the appropriate item.
The delay between the shutter button being pressed all the way down and the startof shooting can be selected using [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] > [Anti-Shock r] in
X Shooting Menu 2 (P. 157).

1
2
3

80 EN

Press the jY# button.
Select one of the items marked ♦ using the rear dial and press the Q button.
Take pictures.
• When the set time has elapsed, the shutter is released and the picture is taken.

(Silent s)

Shooting without shutter soundIn situations where the shutter sound is a problem, you can shoot without making asound. An electronic shutter is used to reduce the minuscule camera shake caused by
the motion of the mechanical shutter, much as is the case for anti-shock photography.
The delay between the shutter button being pressed all the way down and the shutter
being released can be selected using [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] > [Silent s] in
X Shooting Menu 2 (P. 157).

Press the jY# button.
Select one of the items marked ♥ using the rear dial and press the Q button.
Take pictures.
• When the shutter is released, the monitor screen will go dark for a moment. No
shutter sound will be emitted.

2
Shooting

1
2
3• The desired results may not be achieved under flickering light sources such as fluorescentor LED lamps or if the subject moves abruptly during shooting.
• The fastest available shutter speed is 1/32000 s.

Shooting without a release time lag(Pro Capture shooting)Capture starts when the shutter button is pressed halfway; the moment the button
is pressed the rest of the way down, the camera will start saving the last n captured
pictures to the memory card, where n is a number selected before shooting begins. If
the button is held all the way down, shooting will continue until the selected numberof pictures is recorded. Use this option to capture moments you might otherwise missdue to your subject’s reactions or shutter lag. Choose from [Pro Capture Low] and [Pro
Capture High].
Burst shooting
continues

Up to 35 frames

Shutter button pressedhalfway

Moment you
want

Shutter button pressed all
the way down

Shutter lag

EN 81

Pro Capture Low (q)The camera shoots at up to 18 fps. A maximum of 35 frames can be captured before
the shutter button is pressed all the way down. If [C-AF], [C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], or[C-AF+TRb] is selected for [K AF Mode] (P. 64), the camera will focus before
each shot. Choose this option if you anticipate that the distance to the subject willchange during shooting.

2

Pro Capture High (p)Shooting

The camera shoots at up to 60 fps. A maximum of 35 frames can be captured before
the shutter button is pressed all the way down. The camera will use [S-AF] when
[C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] is selected for [K AF Mode] (P. 64) and [S-AFb] when
[C-AFb] or [C-AF+TRb] is selected. Choose this option if the distance to thesubject is unlikely to change very much during shooting.

1
2
3

Press the jY# button.
Select p (Pro Capture High) or q (Pro Capture Low) using the rear dialand press the Q button.
Take pictures.
Capture icon
• Capture starts when the shutter button is pressedhalfway. A capture icon ( ) will be displayed. If the
button is kept pressed halfway for over a minute,
S-IS AUTO
capture will end and the Z icon will clear from thedisplay. Press the shutter button halfway again toresume shooting.
YF• Press the shutter button all the way down to start saving
pictures to the memory card.
P
250 F5.6 0.01023• Shooting will continue while the shutter button ispressed all the way down, up to the number of shots
selected for [Frame Count Limiter].
• [Max fps], [Pre-shutter Frames], and [Frame Count Limiter] can be adjusted using the[jL Settings] and [jH Settings] options (P. 220) in G Custom Menu N.
100%

T

W
28 mm

ISO-A
200

4K

30p

1:02:03• Selecting q (Pro Capture Low) restricts aperture to values between maximum apertureand f8.0.
• Pro Capture is not available while the camera is connected to a smartphone.
• Four Thirds and third-party Micro Four Thirds lenses cannot be used in q (Pro CaptureLow) mode.
• Flickering occurred by fluorescent lights or the large movement of the subject, etc. may
cause distortions in images.
• During capture, the monitor will not go dark and the sound of the shutter will not be heard.
• The slowest shutter speed is limited.
• Depending on subject brightness and the options selected for [ISO] and exposurecompensation, the display frame rate may drop below that selected for [Frame Rate](P. 188) in G Custom Menu Q.

82 EN

Shooting still pictures in a higher resolution(High Res Shot)

Shoot at resolutions higher than that of the image sensor. The camera takes a seriesof shots while moving the image sensor and combines them to create a single highresolution photo. Use this option to capture details that normally would not be visible
even at high zoom ratios.
Use the [High Res Shot] option (P. 158) in X Shooting Menu 2 to choose time
between the shutter button being pressed all the way down and the shutter being
released, the time allocated for the flash to charge when a flash is used in High Res
Shot mode, and the shooting style (tripod-mounted or hand-held).
When High Res Shot is enabled, the image quality mode for High Res Shot can beselected using [KK] (P. 100, 142).

Press the jY# button.

3

Press the Q button.

Shooting

1
2

2

Select h using the rear dial.
• To choose between tripod and hand-held modes, press the INFO button and rotate
the front or rear dial.
• A h icon will be displayed. The icon will flash if thecamera is not steady. The icon stops flashing when thecamera is steady and ready to shoot.
• After enabling High Res Shot, check the option selected
for image quality. Image quality can be adjusted in the
LV super control panel.

100%

ISO-A
200

h
IF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Camera readying for HighRes Shot (flashes)

4

Take pictures.
• The h will flash to warn that shots may be blurred by camera shake. Keep thecamera steady.
• Shooting is complete when the green h icon clears from the display.
• The camera will automatically create the composite image when shooting iscomplete. A message will be displayed during this process.

• Choose from JPEG (AF, IF, or JF) and RAW+JPEG modes. When image quality
is set to RAW+JPEG, the camera saves a single RAW image (extension “.ORI”) before
combining it with the high resolution shooting. Pre-combination RAW images can beplayed back using the latest version of Olympus Workspace.
• AF and AF+RAW are unavailable when [Handheld] is selected as the shooting method.
• [S-IS Off] is automatically selected for [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 97) when [Tripod] ischosen for [Shooting Method], [S-IS AUTO] when [Handheld] is selected.
• The maximum wait time for [Shooting Method] > [Handheld] is 1 second.
• During RC flash photography, the maximum flash wait time is 4 seconds and the flash
control mode is fixed at MANUAL.
• High Res Shot is available in modes P, S, A, and M.

EN 83

2
Shooting• The following cannot be used:interval-timer photography, multiple exposure, keystone compensation, bracketing,fisheye correction, and HDR.
• Pictures taken with [e-Portrait] or an art filter selected for picture mode will be recorded in[Natural] mode.
• Image quality may drop under flickering light sources such as fluorescent or LED lamps.
• If the camera is unable to record a composite image due to blur or other factors, only the
first shot will be recorded. If [JPEG] is selected for image quality, the shot will be recordedin JPEG format, while if [RAW+JPEG] is selected, the camera will record two copies, one
in RAW (.ORF) and the other in JPEG format.

Using a flash(Flash photography)

When using an optional flash unit designed for use with the camera, you can choose
the flash mode using camera controls and take pictures with the flash. See thedocumentation provided with the flash unit for information on flash features and theiruse.
 Attaching Compatible Flash Units
The methods used to attach and operate external flash units vary with the unit. See
the documentation provided with the unit for details. The instructions here apply to the
FL-LM3.
• Confirm that both the camera and flash unit are off. Attaching or removing a flash unit
while either the camera or flash unit is on could damage the equipment.

1

Remove the hot shoe cover and attach the flash.
• Slide the flash in until the foot clicks into place at theback of the shoe.

Hot shoe cover2

Position the flash head for bounce-flash
photography or direct lighting.
• The flash head can be rotated up and left or right.
• Note that flash output may be insufficient for correct
exposure when bounce flash lighting is used.

84 EN

3

Rotate the flash ON/OFF lever to the ON position.
• Rotate the lever to the OFF position when the flash is
not in use.

2

1

Keeping the UNLOCK button pressed, slide theflash unit from the hot shoe.

Shooting

ON/OFF lever Removing Flash Units

2

1
UNLOCK button

EN 85

Choosing a Flash Mode

(Flash Mode)

When taking pictures with a flash unit designed for use with the camera, you can selecta flash mode using camera controls. Turning an attached flash unit on automaticallylimits the fastest available shutter speed.

2

12

Shooting

3

Press the jY# button.
Rotate the front dial to select an option.
• In manual flash mode, you can adjust flash output bypressing the INFO button and rotating the front dial.
• Manual flash output cannot be adjusted if the flash
mode can be selected using the controls on the flash
unit.

Flash mode100%#

0 $ 1 2 M 3Fill InoSinglePo Ɔo T ƆT p S ƆS

Press the shutter button halfway to exit to theshooting display.

 Flash Modes#

Fill In

Enable the flash.
• Shutter speed can be set to values between that selected
for [#Slow Limit] (P. 236) and [#X-Sync.] (P. 236) in
G Custom Menu W.

$

Flash Off

Disable the flash.
• The flash will not fire even if the unit is on.

0

RedeyeReduce “red-eye” in portrait photos. In other respects, the flash
functions as it does in # (fill in) mode.

2

Slow(slow frontcurtain sync)

Slow shutter speeds are used to capture both the main subject
and the background.
• Shutter speed is set according to the exposure value meteredby the camera and is not restricted by the option selected for[#Slow Limit].

1

Red-EyeSlow

2 (slow sync) combined with red-eye reduction. The flash is
timed using front-curtain sync.

M

Slow2
(slow rearcurtain sync)

As for 2 (slow sync).
• The flash fires immediately before the shutter
closes. Moving objects appear to leave trailsof light behind them.

3, 4, Manual Value The flash fires at the selected level.
etc.

• Super FP high-speed sync must be configured using flash controls.
• In [0] (red-eye reduction) mode, the shutter will be released approximately one second
after the initial red-eye reduction pre-flash. Do not move the camera until shooting iscomplete.
• [0] (red-eye reduction) may not produce the desired results in some conditions.

86 EN

 Flash Mode and Shutter Speed
The range of shutter speeds available varies with the flash mode. The range ofavailable speeds can be further restricted using the options in the G custom menu.
g G Custom Menu W > [#X-Sync.] (P. 236), [#Slow Limit] (P. 236)
Exposure
mode

S/M

B*

Flash mode#

Fill flash

0Red-eyeFlash timing

Shutter speed

Front-curtain sync

30 – 1/250 s

—

—

$

Flash off1Red-eye slow

2

Slow

M

Slow

Rear-curtain sync

3, 4, etc.

Manual value

Front-curtain sync

30 – 1/250 s#

Fill flash

0Red-eyeFront-curtain sync

60 – 1/250 s

Front-curtain sync

60 – 1/250 s$

Flash off

—

—

M

Slow

Rear-curtain sync

60 – 1/250 s

3, 4, etc.

Manual value

Front-curtain sync

60 – 1/250 s#

Fill flash

0Red-eyeFront-curtain sync—$

Flash off

—

—

M

Slow

Rear-curtain sync—

3, 4, etc.

Manual value

Front-curtain sync—

2
Shooting

P/A

LV supercontrol panel* Rear-curtain sync is not available when [LIVE COMP] is selected (P. 54).
• The fastest shutter speed available when the flash fires is 1/250 s. Bright backgrounds inpictures taken with the flash may be overexposed.
• The flash sync speed for silent modes (P. 81), High Res Shot (P. 83), and focus
bracketing (P. 148) is 1/50 s. Setting [K ISO] to a value over ISO 8000 when using an
option that requires the electronic shutter (for example, silent mode or focus bracketing)sets the flash sync speed to 1/20 s. The flash sync speed is also set to 1/20 s during ISO
bracketing (P. 147).
• Even the minimum available flash output may be too bright at short range. To prevent
overexposure in pictures taken at short range, select mode A or M and choose a smaller
aperture (higher f-number) or choose a lower setting for [K ISO].

EN 87

The Super Control/LV Super Control Panel
The super control/LV super control panel lists shooting settings and their current
values. Use the LV super control panel when framing shots in the monitor (“live view”),
the super control panel when framing shots in the viewfinder.
• Pressing the u (LV) button during live view enables viewfinder photography anddisplays the LV super control panel in the monitor.

2u(LV button)

Shooting

100%

100%

2020.02.15 12:30:00
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
#
S-AF
# ± 0.0Offop
S-IS Auto
YF
M-IS
YF

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

1:02:03

250 F5.6 0.0

P

1023

Live view photography

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6 0.01023

Viewfinder photography (monitor
turns off while viewfinder is on)

LV Super Control Panel (Live View Photography)

To display the LV super control panel in the monitor, press the Q button during live
view.
100%

100%

S-IS AUTO

Q

KRecommended ISO
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
#
S-AF
# ± 0.0Offop
S-IS Auto
YF
M-IS
YF

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

1:02:03

250 F5.6 0.0

P

1023

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

Super Control Panel (Viewfinder Photography)

When you frame subjects in the viewfinder, the super LV control panel will be displayedin the monitor at all times. Press the Q button to activate the cursor.
100%

100%

2020.02.15 12:30:00
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
#
S-AF
# ± 0.0Offop
S-IS Auto
YF
M-IS
YF

P

88 EN

250 F5.6 0.0

Natural±0Normal±0

S ±0Q

KRecommended ISO
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
#
S-AF
# ± 0.0Offop
S-IS Auto
YF
M-IS
YF

sRGB
4K

30p
1:02:031023

P

250 F5.6

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p
1:02:031023

 Using the Super Control/LV Super Control Panel

1

Press the Q button.

Cursor• If you press the button during live view, the LV supercontrol panel will be displayed in the monitor.
• The last setting used will be highlighted.

100%

KRecommended ISO
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

#
# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

p

YF

30p

Highlight an item using FGHI
on the arrow pad or by rotating therear dial.

1023

100%

KAF Mode
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

#
# ± 0.0• The selected setting will behighlighted.
• You can also highlight items bytapping them in the display.

3

1:02:03

250 F5.6

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

p

YF

4K

30p

YF

P

Rotate the front dial to change thehighlighted setting.

1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

100%

KAF Mode
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

#
# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o

A±0
G±0
PreMF
Off

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

p

Normal

sRGB

YF

4K

30p

YF

P

4

NormalsRGB

Shooting

2

2

4K

YF

P

NormalsRGB

1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

Press the shutter button halfway to accept current settings and exit the LV
super control panel.
• If you are using the super control panel, the cursor will vanish and setting will end.

Additional Options

Pressing the Q button in Step 2 displays options for the highlighted
setting. In some cases, additional options can be viewed by pressing
the INFO button.

Q button

INFO button
100%

100%

KImage Stabilizer
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
#
S-AF
# ± 0.0Offop
S-IS Auto
YF
M-IS
YF

P

250 F5.6

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

100%

S-IS AUTO

Q

S-IS AUTO

INFO

Normal

Focal Length o

sRGB

9mm

4K

30p

0 0 0 9 . 0 mm

Auto I.S.
1:02:03

1023

P

S-IS OFF S-IS AUTO S-IS 1 S-IS 2 S-IS 3

Auto I.S.

P

S-IS OFF S-IS AUTO S-IS 1 S-IS 2 S-IS 3[K Image Stabilizer]• Touch controls can be used in place of the Q button. Lightly tap the desired setting twice
to display options.

EN 89

 Settings Available in the Super Control/LV Super Control Panel
LV super control panel

Super control panel

100%

KRecommended ISO
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
#
S-AF
# ± 0.0Offop
S-IS Auto
YF
M-IS
YF

1

2
Shooting

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

P

e

KRecommended ISO

Natural±0Normal
±0

g

#

sRGB

h
i
j

S-IS Auto
M-IS

ISO
Auto

S ±0

4K

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6
9

100%

f

1023

WB
Auto

# ± 0.0

o
YF
YF

P

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

p
4K

30p

250 F5.6

1:02:031023

0 ab c d

1 Currently selected option
2 ISO sensitivity .................................P. 75
3 AF mode .........................................P. 64
AF target .........................................P. 69
4 Flash mode .....................................P. 86
5 Flash intensity control ...................P. 105
Manual flash output ........................P. 86
6 K Image stabilizer ........................P. 97
7 n Image stabilizer .........................P. 97
8 K Storage options ........................P. 99
9 Drive mode (sequential shooting/self-timer) ........................................P. 78
0 K Image quality ..........................P. 100
a Metering mode ................................P. 77
b I Face priority ...............................P. 92
c n Image quality ...........................P. 101
d Aspect ratio .....................................P. 98

e White balance .................................P. 94
White balance compensation..........P. 96
Color temperature *1 ........................P. 94
f Picture mode.................................P. 106
g N Sharpness................................P. 110
u Contrast ...................................P. 110
t Saturation ................................P. 110
z Gradation................................. P. 111
x Color filter ................................P. 112
y Monochrome color...................P. 113
3 Effect........................................P. 113
R Color *2 .....................................P. 109
c Color/Vivid *3 .............................P. 108
Effect *4..........................................P. 109
h Color space...................................P. 114
i Highlight & shadow control ...........P. 115
j Button function assignment ..........P. 116*1 Displayed when CWB (custom white balance) is selected for white balance.
*2 Displayed when Partial Color is set.
*3 Displayed when Color Creator is set.
*4 Displayed when an art filter is selected.

90 EN

NormalsRGB

Changing ISO sensitivity(ISO)

You can set the ISO sensitivity. g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 75)• Separate options can be selected for still photography and movie mode.

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to select [ISO].

ISO
100%

KRecommended ISO
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
#
S-AF
# ± 0.0Offop
S-IS Auto
YF
M-IS
YF

Use the front dial to select an option.
P

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6

Choosing a focus mode1023

(AF Mode)2
Shooting

1

You can select a focusing method (focus mode). g “Choosing a focus mode (AFMode)” (P. 64)• Separate options can be selected for still photography and movie mode.

1
2
3

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

AF Mode100%

KAF Mode

Use FGHI to select [AF Mode].

ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

#

Use the front dial to select an option.

# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

±0

p

YF

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p

YF

P

Natural±0

S ±0

1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

Positioning and Sizing the AF Target(AF Area)

Choose an AF target. g “Choosing an AF Target Mode (AF Target Mode)” (P. 69),
“Choosing a Focus Target (AF Target Point)” (P. 72)

1
2

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

AF Area100%

AF Area

Highlight [AF Area] using FGHI on the arrow
pad and press the Q button.

ISO
Auto

• AF-target selection options will be displayed.

3

Use the front or rear dial to choose an AF-target
mode and FGHI to position the AF target.

WB
Auto

#
# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o
YF
YF

P

250 F5.6

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

p

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p
1:02:03

1023

EN 91

Choosing how the camera measures brightness(Metering)

You can choose how the camera meters subject brightness. g “Choosing how thecamera measures brightness (Metering)” (P. 77)

1

2
Shooting

2
3

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

100%

Metering
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

#

Use FGHI to select [Metering].

# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

Use the front dial to select an option.

o

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

p
4K

30p

YF

P

NormalsRGB

YF

1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

Metering

Face priority AF/Eye priority AF(I Face Priority)

The camera automatically detects and focuses on the faces or eyes of portrait
subjects. When digital ESP metering is used, exposure will be weighted according to
the value metered for the face.

1
2

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

100%

Face Priority
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

#

Use FGHI to select [I Face Priority].

# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o
YF
YF

P

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

p

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p

250 F5.6

1:02:03

1023

I Face priority

3

Use the front dial to select an option.
I Face Priority On

The camera detects and focuses on faces.

N Face Priority Off

Face priority AF off.

K Face & Eye Priority On

The camera detects faces and focuses on the eyeclosest to the camera.

M Face & L. Eye Priority On

The camera detects faces and focuses on the left eye.

L Face & R. Eye Priority On The camera detects faces and focuses on the right eye.

92 EN

4

Point the camera at your subject.

100%

S-IS AUTO• Faces detected by the camera are indicated by whiteframes. The face chosen for focus is indicated bybrackets at the corners of the frame. If eye-priority AF is
YF
enabled, a white frame will appear over one or the otherof the selected subject’s eyes.
P
250 F5.6 0.01023• If multiple faces are detected, the face used for focus
The face chosen for focus
can be selected via the control to which [I Faceis indicated by white double
Selection] (P. 122) has been assigned using [Button
brackets.
Function] (P. 116). Pressing this control selects theface nearest the AF target. To choose a different face,hold the control and rotate the front or rear dial. Release
the control when the desired subject is selected.
• The face used for focus can also be selected via touch controls (P. 43).
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

1:02:03

6

Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
• The area of the subject used for focus is indicated by agreen border.
• If the camera detects the subject’s eyes, it will focus onan eye.
• Face and eye priority are also available in [MF](P. 64). Faces and eyes detected by the camera
are indicated by white frames. Exposure will be set
according to the value metered for the center of the
face.

T

100%

Shooting

5

2

W
28 mm

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Press the shutter button the rest of the way down to shoot.

• Depending on the subject and the art filter setting, the camera may not be able to correctly
detect the face.
• We recommend selecting [Face Priority Off] when photographing non-portrait subjects
using [C-AF] or [C-AFb] in still photography mode.
• When set to [p] (Digital ESP metering) (P. 77), metering is performed with priority
given to faces.
• If the zoom frame is displayed, the camera will focus on the subject in the zoom frame.
• Even when faces or eyes are detected, you can opt to focus on a target chosen using AFtarget selection rather than on the face or eye selected by the camera. g G Custom
Menu J > [K AEL/AFL] > [Face Priority AF] (P. 201)
• [Face & Eye Priority On], [Face & L. Eye Priority On], and [Face & R. Eye Priority On] are
not available in movie mode.
• Face/eye priority is unavailable if [N Spot Metering] (P. 193) is selected during C(spot) metering (P. 77) in single-target AF-target mode (P. 69).

%
• Using [Button Function] (P. 116), you can assign [I Face Priority] (P. 122) to a camera
control that you can then press to disable or enable face detection. You can also change[I Face Priority] settings by holding the button and rotating the front or rear dial.

EN 93

Adjusting color(WB (white balance))

White balance (WB) ensures that white objects in images recorded by the camera
appear white. [AUTO] is suitable in most circumstances, but other values can beselected according to the light source when [AUTO] fails to produce the desired results
or you wish to introduce a deliberate color cast into your images.
• Separate options can be selected for still photography and movie mode.

2

1

Shooting

2

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

WB
100%

KWB

Use FGHI to select [WB].

ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

#
# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

3

±0

p

YF
YF

P

Natural±0

S ±0Normal

sRGB
4K

30p

250 F5.6

1:02:03

1023

Use the front dial to select an option.
• One-touch white balance and custom white balance options can be viewed bypressing the Q button followed by the INFO button.
Color
temperatureLight conditions

AUTO

—

Most normal scenes (scenes containing
objects that are white or close to white)• This mode is recommended in mostsituations.
• You can choose the white balance used
under incandescent lighting (P. 96).

WB modeAuto whitebalance

Preset whitebalance55300 K

Sunlit outdoor scenes, sunsets, fireworks

N

7500 K

Daylight shots of subjects in the shadeO

6000 K

Shots taken in daylight under overcast skies

1

3000 K

Subjects under incandescent lighting>

4000 K

Subjects under fluorescent lighting

U

—

n

5500 K

Underwater photography
Light sources with the same color
temperature as flash lighting

Situations in which you want to set whitebalance for a specific subject
Color temperature
One-touch white P/Q/
• Color temperature is set to a value
set by one-touchbalancemetered from a white object under the
W/X
WB
lighting what will be used in the final
photograph (P. 95).
Custom whitebalance

94 EN

CWB

2000 K – 14000 K

Situations in which you can identify theappropriate color temperature• Choose a color temperature.

 One-touch white balance
Measure white balance by framing a piece of paper or other white object under
the lighting that will be used in the final photograph. Use this option to fine-tune
white balance when you find it hard to obtain the desired results with white balancecompensation or preset white balance options such as 5 (sunlight) or O (overcast).
The camera stores the metered value for quick recall as required.

After selecting [P], [Q], [W], or [X] (one-touch white balance 1, 2, 3, or4), press the Q button followed by the INFO button.

2

Photograph a piece of colorless (white or gray) paper.

3

Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

• Frame the piece of paper so that it fills the display. Ensure that it is free of shadows.
• In still photography mode, press the INFO button and then the shutter button.
• In movie mode, press the INFO button to release the shutter.
• The one-touch white balance screen appears.

2
Shooting

1• The new value is saved as a preset white balance option.
• The new value is stored until one-touch white balance is measured again. Turning thepower off does not erase the data.

Metering White Balance with the One-Touch White Balance Button (Y)Assigning [k] to a button allows the control to be used to measure white balance. Bydefault, the Y button can be used to measure white balance during still photography.
To measure white balance during movie recording, you must first assign one-touch
white balance to a control using [n Button Function] (P. 116).

1

Frame a piece of colorless (white or gray) paper in the center of the display.

2

Hold the one-touch WB button and press
the shutter button all the way down.

• Frame the piece of paper so that it fills the display. Ensure that it is free of shadows.

• When recording movies, press the onetouch white balance button to proceed to
Step 3.
• You will be prompted to choose the onetouch white balance option that will be
used to store the new value.

3+

One-touch white balance button (Y)Highlight a one-touch white balance setting using
FG on the arrow pad and press the Q button.

100%

One Touch WB
12000K• The new value will be saved as the value for theselected setting and the camera will exit to the shooting
display.

X
Y
3
4

CancelSet

EN 95

 W Keep Warm Color
Choose how the camera adjusts white balance for pictures taken using auto whitebalance under incandescent lighting.

2

1

After selecting [AUTO], press the INFO button.

2

Highlight an option using FGHI on the arrow pad and press the Q
button.

• [W Keep Warm Color] options will be displayed.

Shooting

OffThe camera suppresses the warm tones produced by incandescent lighting.

On

The camera preserves the warm tones produced by incandescent lighting.

Making fine adjustments to white balance(WB Compensation)

Fine-tune white balance. Separate values can be selected for each white balance
option. Adjust settings as described below.
A A (amber–blue) axis

Positive values add a red cast, negative values a blue cast.

G G (green–magenta) axis

Positive values add a green cast, negative values a magenta
cast.

1
2

Press the Q button to display the LV super control panel.
Highlight [A±0] or [G±0] using the arrow pad andhighlight the desired value using the front dial.
• The effect can be previewed by pressing the Q button.

White balance compensation
100%

KAuto x
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

#
# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o
YF
YF

P

250 F5.6

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

p

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p
1:02:031023• White balance compensation can be applied to all white balance modes simultaneously.
g G Custom Menu X > [K All x] (P. 194), n Video Menu > [n Specification
Settings] > [n All x] (P. 161)%
• Changes to white balance can be previewed in live view. During still photography, theeffect can be previewed in a photograph. Press the R (movie) button in the white balancecompensation display to view an image captured at current settings.

96 EN

Reducing camera shake(Image Stabilizer)

You can reduce the amount of camera shake that can occur when shooting in low lightsituations or shooting with high magnification.

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2

Use FGHI to select the image stabilizer.

K Image Stabilizer
100%

P

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p

250 F5.6

1:02:031023

n Image Stabilizer

3

2
Shooting

KImage Stabilizer
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
#
S-AF
# ± 0.0Offop
S-IS Auto
YF
M-IS
YF

Use the front dial to select an option.
Still-I.S. Off

Image stabilization disabled. Select this option whenusing a tripod.

S-IS
AUTO

Auto I.S.

Image stabilization applies to motion on all axes.
If panning motion is detected, the camera willautomatically suspend image stabilization on that
axis.

S-IS1

All Direction
Shake I.S.

Image stabilization applies to motion on all axes.

S-IS2

Vertical Shake Image stabilization applies to vertical motion. Use
I.S.
when panning the camera horizontally.

S-IS3

Horizontal
Shake I.S.

S-IS OffStill
picture(S-IS)Movie(M-IS)

Image stabilization applies to horizontal motion. Use
when panning the camera vertically.

M-IS Off

Movie-I.S. Off

Image stabilizer is off.

M-IS1

All Direction
Shake I.S.

Electronic image stabilization combined with VCMcontrolled image sensor movement.

M-IS2

All Direction
Shake I.S.

VCM-controlled image sensor movement only.

• Image stabilization may be unable to compensate for excessive camera motion or very
slow shutter speeds. Use a tripod in these cases.
• You may notice noise or vibration while image stabilization is in effect.
• The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any, takes priority over that
selected with the camera.
• [S-IS AUTO] functions as [S-IS1] when [On] is selected for [Lens I.S. Priority].

%• You can choose whether image stabilization will be performed while the shutter button ispressed halfway. g G Custom Menu O > [Half Way Rls With IS] (P. 186)
• You can prioritize lens image stabilization. g G Custom Menu O > [Lens I.S. Priority](P. 186)

EN 97

2

Using lenses other than Micro Four Thirds/Four Thirds System lenses
When using lenses other than Micro Four Thirds or Four Thirds system lenses, you will needto specify the lens focal length.
• Set [Image Stabilizer], press the Q button, press the INFO button, then use FGHI toselect a focal length, and press the Q button.
• Choose a focal length between 0.1 mm and 1000.0 mm.
• Choose the value that matches the one printed on the lens.
• The selected value is not reset when you select [Reset / Custom Modes] (P. 141) >[Reset] (basic) in W Shooting Menu 1.

Shooting

Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting
You can take a series of pictures by keeping the shutter button pressed all the way
down. Alternatively, you can take pictures using the self-timer. Other options, including
anti-shock and silent modes, are also available. g “Performing the sequential/selftimer shooting” (P. 78 – 83)

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2

Use FGHI to select the sequential shooting/self-timer.

3

Use the front dial to select an option.

100%

Single
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

#
# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

p

YF

4K

30p

YF

P

NormalsRGB

1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

Sequential shooting/self-timer

Setting the image aspect
Choose the ratio of width to height for pictures according to your intent or your goals
for printing or the like. In addition to the standard aspect (width-to-height) ratio of [4:3],
the camera offers settings of [16:9], [3:2], [1:1], and [3:4].

1
2
3

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

100%

Aspect
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

#

Use FGHI to select [Aspect].

# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

Use the front dial to select an option.

o
YF
YF

P

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

p

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.61023

Aspect• Image aspect can only be set for still images.
• JPEG images are recorded at the selected aspect ratio. RAW images are the same sizeas the image sensor and are recorded at an aspect ratio of 4:3 with a tag indicating the
aspect ratio selected. A crop indicating the selected aspect ratio is displayed when images
are played back.

98 EN

Setting the saving method for shooting data

(K Save Settings)

Choose how the camera stores pictures when two memory cards are inserted.

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2

Use FGHI to select [K Save Settings].

100%

KSave Settings
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

#
# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

±0

p

YF
YF

Normal

2

sRGB
4K

30p

250 F5.6

1:02:03

1023

K Save Settings

3

Use the front dial to select an option.
Standard

Pictures are recorded to the memory card in the slot selected for[K Save Slot] (P. 237). Shooting ends when the card is full.

Auto Switch

Pictures are recorded to the memory card in the slot selected
for [K Save Slot] (P. 237). Pictures will be recorded to theremaining card when the card in the selected slot fills. Thissetting automatically reverts to [Standard] when only one
memory card is inserted.

1 DualIndependent 1

Each picture is recorded twice, once in each of two different
image quality formats. Choose an image quality for each slot
(P. 100). Shooting ends when either card is full. Image quality is
set separately for each slot; after changing the option selected,
check the current image quality setting.

2 DualIndependent 3

Each picture is recorded twice, once in each of two different
image quality formats. Choose an image quality for each slot
(P. 100). Recording continues to the card in the remaining slot
when either card fills. Image quality is set separately for eachslot; after changing the option selected, check the current image
quality setting.

3 Dual Same 1

Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card, using theoption currently selected for image quality. Shooting ends wheneither card is full. This setting automatically reverts to [Standard]
when only one memory card is inserted.

4 Dual Same 3

Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card, using theoption currently selected for image quality. Recording continues
to the card in the remaining slot when either card fills. Thissetting automatically reverts to [Standard] when only one
memory card is inserted.

yz

Shooting

P

Natural±0

S ±0• If you press the Q button, you can specify the card to record the shooting data to with
[Card Slot Settings] of G Custom Menu Y (P. 237).
• The image quality mode may change if you change the option selected for [K Save
Settings] or replace a memory card with one that can contain a different amount ofadditional photographs. Check the image quality mode before taking photographs.

EN 99

Photo File and Image Size Options(KK)

You can set an image quality mode for still images. Select a quality suitable for theapplication (such as for processing on PC, use on website etc.).

1

2

2

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

100%

KK
ISO
Auto

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

WB
Auto

#

Use FGHI to select [KK].

# ± 0.0

Shooting• When [Dual Independent 1] or [Dual Independent 3]
is selected for [K Save Settings], a different setting
can be used for each slot (P. 99).

S-IS AutoM-ISoNatural
±0

S ±0

±0

p

YF

4K

30p

YF

P

NormalsRGB

1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

KK

3

Use the front dial to select an option.
• Choose from the following options. The image size/compression combinations
available can be selected in the menus. g G Custom Menu X > [K Set]
(P. 236)
OptionImage size

Compression ratio

File format

YSF

5184 × 3888

SuperFine (1/2.7)

JPG

YF

5184 × 3888

Fine (1/4)

JPG

YN

5184 × 3888

Normal (1/8)

JPG

XN

3200 × 2400

Normal (1/8)

JPG

RAW

5184 × 3888

Lossless compression

ORF

RAW+JPEG

RAW plus the JPEG option selected above• When [Standard], [Dual Same 1], or [Dual Same 3], or [Auto Switch] is selected
for [Card Slot Settings] > [K Save Settings] (P. 237) in G Custom Menu Y, theselected option applies to the cards in both slots 5 and 4.
• During the high resolution shooting (P. 83), you can select between AF, IF,
JF, AF+RAW, IF+RAW, and JF+RAW.
• AF and AF+RAW are unavailable when [Handheld] is selected for High Res Shot.
• Selecting High Res Shot changes the image quality option selected; be sure to checkthe image quality setting before shooting.

$• RAW files store raw image data in an unprocessed state. Choose this format (extension“.ORF”) for pictures that will later be enhanced.
- Cannot be viewed on other cameras- Can be viewed on computers using Olympus Workspace Digital Photo Managing
software- Can be saved in JPEG format using the [RAW Data Edit] (P. 170) retouch option in
the camera menus

100 ENFrame Size, Rate, and Compression(nK)

Choose the image quality options available for movie recording.
When choosing an option, consider how the movie will be used: for example, are you
planning to process it on a computer, or is it intended for upload to a website? The
camera can store multiple combinations of frame size, rate, and compression fromwhich you can select according to your goals. Slow- and fast-motion and high-speed
movie options are also available. g “Filming Slow- or Fast-Motion Movies (Slow- andFast-Motion Movies)” (P. 104) and “Filming High-Speed Movies” (P. 103)

2

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
Use FGHI to select [nK].

123min

nK
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

#
# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o
YF
YF

n

A±0
G±0
C-AF
Off

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

p

NormalsRGB
4K

Shooting

1

2

30p

250 F5.6

1:02:03nK

3

Use the front dial to select an option.
• To change movie record mode settings, press Q followed by the INFO button androtate the rear dial.

EN 101

The Movie Quality Icon

Changes to settings are reflected in the [nK] icon as shown below.
Frame size
FHD

Full HD *1

1920 × 1080

HD

HD *1

1280 × 720

2

4K

4K *1

3840 × 2160

C4K

4K Digital Cinema *1

4096 × 2160

Shooting

Compression/bit rate
A-I

All Intra *2

SF

Super Fine

F

Fine

N

Normal• Not available when [4K] or[C4K] is selected for [Movie
Resolution].

Frame rate
60p

60p: 59.94 fps

50p

50p: 50.00 fps

30p

30p: 29.97 fps

25p

25p: 25.00 fps

24p

24p: 23.98 fps
24p: 24.00 fps (C4K)• [60p] and [50p] are notavailable when:- [FHD] is selected for[Movie Resolution] and[A-I] is selected for bitrate- [4K] or [C4K] is selected
for [Movie Resolution]• Selecting [C4K] for [Movie
Resolution] fixes [Frame Rate]at [24p].

Movie typen

Setting 1, 2, 3, or 4:
Save up to four combinations of frame size, rate, andcompression for later use.
Custom:Choose frame sizes of 4K or 4K Digital Cinema. You canalso shoot fast- or slow-motion movies (P. 104).

—

High-speed movie g “Filming High-Speed Movies”(P. 103)*1 Movies are saved in MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format. Individual movie files can be up to 4 GB
in size. Continuous shots can be no more than 29 minutes in length.
*2 “All-Intra” movies use no inter-frame compression. This suits them to editing but increases
file size.
• Depending on the card used, recording may end before the maximum length is reached.
• Bit-rate selection may be unavailable at some settings.
• Movies are recorded at an aspect ratio of 16:9. C4K movies are recorded at an aspectratio of 17:9.

102 EN

Filming High-Speed Movies

Film at high frame rates. Movies are filmed at 120 fps and play back at 60 fps.
Stretching playback to double the recording time (as is the case when 60p is selected
as the playback frame rate) lets you view in slow motion movements that in real life
took only the blink of an eye.
A high-speed movie option can be included in the movie image quality menu. Your
choice of playback frame rate determines the playback speed multiplier.
Changes to settings are reflected in the movie quality icon as shown.
FHD

Full HD (1920 × 1080)

Movie type
HS

High speed (120 fps)2
Shooting

Frame size

Playback frame rate
60p

60p: 59.94 fps; plays back at 0.5× speed

50p

50p: 50.00 fps; plays back at 0.42× speed

30p

30p: 29.97 fps; plays back at 0.25× speed

25p

25p: 25.00 fps; plays back at 0.21× speed

24p

24p: 23.98 fps; plays back at 0.2× speed

1

Select2

To edit current settings, press the INFO button in Step 1.

3

Choose the playback frame rate.

4

Press the Q button to select the highlighted option and exit.

(high-speed movie recording).

• To use current settings, press the Q button. The camera will exit the menu with thecurrent options selected.
• This places the cursor in the list of high-speed movie options.
• Use FG on the arrow pad to highlight the desired playback frame rate.

• Focus, exposure, and white balance lock during recording.
• Sound is not recorded.
• The picture angle is slightly reduced.
• Aperture, shutter speed, exposure compensation, and ISO sensitivity cannot be changed
during recording.
• Time codes cannot be recorded or displayed.
• Brightness may change if zoom is adjusted during recording.
• Individual movies can be up to 4 GB in size.
• High-speed movie recording is not available while the camera is connected to an HDMI
device.
• [n Image Stabilizer] > [M-IS1] is not available.
• [Movie H] cannot be used.
• [i-Enhance], [e-Portrait], and art filter picture modes are not available.
• [Gradation] is fixed at [Gradation Normal].
• High-speed movie recording is not available during remote photography when the camera
is connected to a smartphone.

EN 103

Filming Slow- or Fast-Motion Movies(Slow- and Fast-Motion Movies)
You can create slow motion or fast-motion movies. You can set the recording speed
using
in record mode.

2
Shooting

1
2
3

Press the Q button to display the LV super control panel.
Use FGHI to select [nK].
Use the front dial to select 24 (custom recordmode) (P. 102), then press the Q button.
C4K• The option selected for [Slow or Fast Motion] canbe changed by pressing the INFO button. After
highlighting [Slow or Fast Motion] using HI, use FG
to choose a speed multiplier and then press the Q
button. Choose high multipliers for fast-motion movies,
low multipliers for slow-motion movies. The frame ratechanges accordingly.

4

123min

nK
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

#
# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o
YF
YF

n

250 F5.6

A±0
G±0
C-AF
Off

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

p

Normal

sRGB
C4K

24p
1:02:03

Press the R button to start shooting.
• Press the R button again to end shooting.
• The movie will be played back at a fixed speed so that it appears to be in slow motion
or fast-motion.

• Sound will not be recorded.
• Any picture mode art filters will be canceled.
• Either or both of slow motion and fast-motion cannot be set for some options of [nK].
• Shutter speed is limited to values no slower than 1/24 s. The slowest speed available
varies with the option selected for [Frame Rate].

104 EN

Choosing a Flash Mode

(Flash Mode)

When taking pictures with a flash unit designed for use with the camera, you can selecta flash mode using camera controls. g “Choosing a Flash Mode (Flash Mode)”(P. 86)1

100%

Flash Mode
ISO
Auto

Use FGHI to select [Flash Mode].

# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

Use the front dial to select an option.
• Flash settings can be accessed via the LV super control
panel.

WB
Auto

#

o

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

±0

p

YF

Normal

2

sRGB
4K

30p

YF

P

Natural±0

S ±0

1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

Flash mode

Adjusting flash output(x)

Shooting

2
3

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

Flash output can be adjusted if you find that your subject is over- or under-exposedeven though the exposure in the rest of the frame is appropriate.
Flash compensation is available in modes other than [#Manual] (manual).

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to select [x].

100%

x
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

#
# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

Use the front dial to select an option.

o
YF
YF

P

250 F5.6

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

p

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p
1:02:031023

x• Changes to flash intensity made with the external flash unit are added to those made withthe camera.

EN 105

Processing options

2(Picture Mode)

Choose how pictures are processed during shooting to enhance color, tone, and otherproperties. Choose from preset picture modes according to your subject or artistic
intent. Contrast, sharpness, and other settings can be adjusted separately for eachmode. You can also add artistic effects using art filters. Art filters give you the optionof added frame effects and the like. Adjustments to individual parameters are stored
separately for each picture mode and art filter.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.

Shooting

 Picture mode options
A i-Enhance

The camera adjusts colors and contrast for optimal results
according to the type of subject (P. 113).

B Vivid

Choose for vivid colors.

C Natural

Choose for natural colors.

D MutedChoose for pictures that will later be retouched.

E Portrait

Enhance skin tones.

J Monochrome

Record pictures in monochrome. You can apply color filter effects
and choose a tint (P. 113).

K Custom

Adjust picture mode parameters to create a custom version of a
selected picture mode.

v e-Portrait

Smooth complexions.

F Underwater

Process pictures to preserve the vivid colors seen under water.
• We recommend choosing [Off] for [#+WB] (P. 193) when thisoption is selected.

c Color Creator

Adjust hue and color to suit your creative intent (P. 108).

e Pop Artf Soft Focus
g Pale&Light Colorh Light Tone
i Grainy Filmj Pin Holek Dioramal Cross Process
m Gentle Sepia
n Dramatic Toneo Key Linep Watercolorq Vintager Partial Colorv Bleach Bypass
9 Instant Film

106 EN

Uses Art Filter settings. Art effects can also be used.

k Flat *Movies are recorded using a tone curve adapted to color
grading.

l OM-Log400 *Movies are recorded using a log tone curve for greater freedom
during color grading.

* Displayed in movie mode when [On] is selected for [n Specification Settings] >[n Picture Mode] in the n Video Menu (P. 161).

%• You can hide or reveal picture modes using [Picture Mode Settings] (P. 187) in
G Custom Menu P.

1Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2

Use FGHI to select [Picture Mode].

Picture Mode100%

Picture Mode
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

#
# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

Use the front dial to select an option.

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

p

YF

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p

YF

P

3

2
Shooting• Art filters apply only to the JPEG copy. [RAW+JPEG] is automatically selected for image
quality in place of [RAW].
• Depending on the scene, the effects of some settings may not be visible, while in othercases tone transitions may be ragged or the image rendered more “grainy”.

1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

100%

Picture Mode

• Depending on the option selected, picture modeparameters may be displayed in LV super control panel.
Adjust parameters as desired (P. 110 – 113).

ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

#
# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o
YF
YF

P

250 F5.6

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

i-Enhance
±0

S ±0

±0

NormalStandard

p

sRGB
4K

30p
1:02:03

1023

Changes depending on
mode selected

EN 107

Adjusting overall color(Color Creator)

The camera permits intuitive adjustments to color saturation and hue. Choose from30 hues and 8 levels of saturation. The results can be previewed in the display.

2
Shooting

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to select [Picture Mode].

Picture Mode100%

Picture Mode
ISO
Auto

Rotate the front dial to highlight [Color Creator].
• A [c Color/Vivid] item will appear in the LV super control
panel.

4Highlight [c Color/Vivid] using FG and press the
Q button.

5

Adjust saturation and hue.

WB
Auto

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

o

p

#
# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

YF
YF

P

Color Creatorc Color/Vivid
sRGB
4K

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.61023

c Color/Vivid
100%• Rotate the front dial to adjust hue.
• Rotate the rear dial to adjust saturation.
• To restore default values, press and hold the Q button.

Color

ViVid±0Reset

6Press the Q button to save changes.
• You can also save changes by pressing the shutter button halfway.

• Photos are recorded in RAW+JPEG format when [RAW] is selected for image quality(P. 100, 142).
• Pictures taken using [HDR] (P. 152) or [Multiple Exposure] (P. 154) are recorded at the[Natural] setting.
• [Color Creator] can be assigned to a camera control. It can be accessed via buttons
assigned the [Multi Function] (P. 124) role using [Button Function] (P. 116).

108 EN“Leave Color” Effects(Partial Color)

Shoot in black-and-white while capturing objects of a selected hue in color. For
example, you can shoot in black-and-white while leaving only reds in color. The results
can be previewed in the display.
[Partial Color] is an art filter option. Settings can be adjusted when it is selected for
picture mode. Choose from three “leave color” filters (1 through 3).

1

Picture Mode100%

Picture Mode

Use FGHI to select [Picture Mode].

ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

#
# ± 0.0oS-IS Auto
M-IS

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

3

Highlight [ART141], [ART142], or [ART143] using
the front dial.

±0

p

YF

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

100%

Partial Color 1
ISO
Auto

• [R Color] and [Effect] options will be displayed in the
LV super control panel.

WB
Auto

#
# ± 0.0oS-IS Auto
M-IS

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

P

ART141
Color Effect Off

p

YF

sRGB
4K

30p

YF

1:02:03

250 F5.61023

EffectR Color4

Highlight [R Color] using FG on the arrow padand press the Q button.

100%

Color
ISO
Auto

• A color ring will be displayed.

WB
Auto

#
# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o
YF
YF

P

5
6

Normal

sRGB
4K

YF

P

Natural±0

S ±02
Shooting

2

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

250 F5.6

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

ART141
Color Effect Off

p

sRGB
4K

30p
1:02:031023

Select a color using the dials.
Press the Q button to save changes.
• You can also save changes by pressing the shutter button halfway.

EN 109Making fine adjustments to sharpness(Sharpness)

Adjust image sharpness. Outlines can be emphasized for a sharp, clear picture.
Settings are stored separately for each picture mode.

2
Shooting

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to select [Sharpness].

Sharpness
100%

Sharpness
ISO
Auto

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

WB
Auto

#

Use the front dial to select an option.

# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o

±0

p

YF

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p

YF

P

Natural±0

S ±0

1:02:03

250 F5.6

Making fine adjustments to contrast

1023(Contrast)

Adjust image contrast. Increasing contrast heightens the difference between bright anddark areas for a harder, more well-defined picture. Settings are stored separately foreach picture mode.

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to select [Contrast].

Contrast
100%

Contrast
ISO
Auto

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

WB
Auto

#

Use the front dial to select an option.

# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o

±0

p

YF

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p

YF

P

Natural±0

S ±0

1:02:03

250 F5.6

Making fine adjustments to saturation

1023(Saturation)

Adjust color saturation. Increasing saturation makes pictures more vivid. Settings are
stored separately for each picture mode.

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to select [Saturation].

Saturation
100%

Saturation
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

#

Use the front dial to select an option.

# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o
YF
YF

P

110 EN

250 F5.6

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

p

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p
1:02:031023

Making fine adjustments to tone

(Gradation)

Adjust color brightness and shading. Bring pictures closer to what you envisage by, forexample, brightening the entire picture. Settings are stored separately for each picture
mode.

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2

Use FGHI to select [Gradation].

Gradation
100%

Gradation
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

3

±0

p

YF
YF

P

Natural±0250 F5.62

S ±0

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p
1:02:03

1023

Use the front dial to select an option.

z Auto(Shadow Adj)

Divides the image into detailed regions and adjusts the brightness
separately for each region. This is effective for images with areasof large contrast in which the whites appear too bright or theblacks appear too dark.

z Normal(Gradation Normal)

Optimal shading. Recommended in most circumstances.

Shooting#

z HighUses a tone suitable for a bright subject.
(Gradation High Key)z Low(Gradation Low Key)

Uses a tone suitable for a dark subject.

EN 111

Applying filter effects to monochrome pictures(Color Filter)

Color filter effects can be added when [Monochrome] is selected for picture mode
(P. 106). Depending on the color of the subject, color filter effects can make subjects
brighter or enhance contrast. Orange adds more contrast than yellow, red more
contrast than orange. Green is a good choice for portraits and the like.

2
Shooting

1
2
3
4

Press the Q button to display the LV super control panel.
Use FGHI to select [Picture Mode].
Select [Monochrome] using the front dial.
Use FGHI to select [Color Filter].

Color Filter
100%

Color Filter
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

A ± 0 M Monochrome
S ±0
±0
G±0
Normal
S-AF
T N
F N
Off

o

p

#
# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

YF
YF

P

5

112 EN

250 F5.6

sRGB
4K

30p
1:02:03

1023

Use the front dial to select an option.

N:NoneNo filter effect.

Ye:Yellow

Reproduces clearly defined white cloud with natural blue sky.

Or:Orange

Slightly brings out blue skies or the light of the setting sun.

R:Red

Further brings out blue skies or autumn foliage.

G:GreenAdds warmth to skin tones in portraits. The green filter also emphasizes
the reds in lipstick.

Adjusting the tone of a monochrome image(Monochrome Color)

Add a tint to black-and-white pictures in the [Monochrome] picture mode (P. 106).

1
2
3
4

Press the Q button to display the LV super control panel.
Use FGHI to select [Picture Mode].
Select [Monochrome] using the front dial.
Use FGHI to select [Monochrome Color].

Monochrome Color
Monochrome Color
A ± 0 M Monochrome
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
S ±0
±0
G±0
#
Normal
S-AF# ± 0.0
T N
F N
Off
o
p
S-IS Auto
sRGB
YF
M-IS
4K
30p
YF

P

5

Shooting

100%

2

1:02:03

250 F5.61023

Use the front dial to select an option.

N:NormalCreates a normal black and white image.

S:Sepia

Shoot in sepia-tinted monochrome.

B:BlueShoot in blue-tinted monochrome.

P:Purple

Shoot in purple-tinted monochrome.

G:GreenShoot in green-tinted monochrome.

Adjusting i-Enhance effects(Effect)

Choose the strength of the i-Enhance effect when [i-Enhance] is selected for picturemode (P. 106).

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2

Use FGHI to select [Effect].

Effect100%

Effect
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

#
# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o
YF
YF

P

3

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

i-Enhance
±0

S ±0

±0

NormalStandard

p

sRGB
4K

30p

250 F5.6

1:02:03

1023

Use the front dial to select an option.

3Low (Effect: Low)

Adds a low i-Enhance effect to images.

3Standard(Effect: Standard)

Adds an i-Enhance effect between “low” and “high” to images.

3High (Effect: High)

Adds a high i-Enhance effect to images.

EN 113

Setting the color reproduction format(Color Space)

You can select a format to ensure that colors are correctly reproduced when shot
images are regenerated on a monitor or using a printer. This option is equivalent to the[Color Space] (P. 194) in G Custom Menu X.

1

2

2

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

100%

Color Space
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

#

Use FGHI to select [Color Space].

# ± 0.0

Shooting

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o
YF
YF

P

250 F5.6

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

p

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p
1:02:03

1023

Color Space3

Use the front dial to select an option.

sRGB

The established color space standard for Windows systems. It is widely
supported across displays, printers, digital cameras, and computer
applications. This setting is recommended in most circumstances.

AdobeRGB

A color space standard defined by Adobe Systems Inc. It can reproduce
a wider gamut of colors than sRGB. Accurate color reproduction isavailable only with software and devices (displays, printers, and the like)that support this standard. An underscore (“_”) appears at the beginningof the file name (e.g., “_xxx0000.jpg”).

• [AdobeRGB] is not available in HDR or movie (n) mode or when an art filter is selected
for picture mode.

114 ENChanging the brightness of highlights and shadows(Highlight&Shadow Control)
Adjust brightness separately for highlights, mid-tones, and shadows. You gain greater
control over exposure than you would with exposure compensation alone. You canselectively make highlights darker or shadows brighter.

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

100%

P

1:02:03

250 F5.61023

Highlight&Shadow Control

2

Use FGHI to select [Highlight&Shadow Control], then press the Q
button.

3

Press the INFO button to choose the desired tone
range.

100%

2
Shooting

Highlight&Shadow Control
Natural
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
S ±0
±0
G±0
#
Normal
S-AF±0# ± 0.0Offop
S-IS Auto
sRGB
YF
M-IS
4K
30p
YF

HighLight±0
HighLight+5• The tone range changes each time the button ispressed.
Shadow±0

MidtoneSelected tone range

4

5

Rotate the dials to choose the desired setting.
• [Hi. & Sh.] selected
Adjust highlights using the front dial and shadows using
the rear dial.
• [Midtone] selected
Use the front or rear dial.
• Press and hold the Q button to restore the default
curve.

100%

HighLight+5

Shadow±0

MidtoneReset

Press the Q button to save changes.
• You can also save changes by pressing the shutter button halfway.

• [Highlight & Shadow Control] can be assigned to a button. Select [Multi Function](P. 124) for [Button Function] (P. 116).

EN 115

Assigning functions to buttons(Button Function)

Other roles can be assigned to buttons in place of their existing functions.
The functions assigned using [K Button Function] take effect only during still
photography (P. 185). The functions assigned using [n Button Function] take effectin n (movie) mode (P. 163).

2

 Customizable Controls
Icon

ButtonDefault role

ShootingF

F (exposure compensation) button F (exposure compensation)R

R (movie) button

RREC (movie recording)uu (LV) button

u (display selection)t

AEL/AFL buttont (exposure/focus lock)K

ISO button

K (ISO sensitivity)d

Arrow padD

Arrow pad I (right) *E

Arrow pad G (down) *1

Still picture: j/Y (sequential shooting/self-timer)
Movie: WB (white balance)Y

One-touch white balance button

Still picture: k (one-touch white balance)
Movie: PEAK (peaking)Z

Preview button

Still picture: z (preview)
Movie: a (magnify)mOptional power battery holder
B-Fn1 button

K (ISO sensitivity)n

Optional power battery holder
B-Fn2 buttont (exposure/focus lock)v

Optional power battery holder
arrow pad

Still picture: N (AF-target position)
Movie: n (direct function)w

Optional power battery holder
arrow pad I (right) *3

Still picture: # (flash)
Movie: X (electronic zoom) *2

xOptional power battery holder
arrow pad G (down) *3

Still picture: j/Y (sequential shooting/self-timer)
Movie: WB (white balance)l

L-Fn button (lens focus function
buttons)

AF StopN (AF-target position)
1

Still picture: # (flash)
Movie: X (electronic zoom) *2*1 To use I and G on the arrow pad in their assigned roles, select [Direct Function] for[d] (arrow pad).
*2 Only available with power zoom lenses.
*3 To use I and G on the power battery holder arrow pad in their assigned roles, select[Direct Function] for [v].

116 ENTo change the function assigned to a button, follow the steps below.

1
2

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

100%

KButton Function
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
#
S-AF
# ± 0.0Offop
S-IS Auto
YF
M-IS
YF

Use FGHI to select [Button Function], thenpress the Q button.
P±0

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p
1:02:03

250 F5.6

1023

Button Function

3

Highlight the desired control using FG on the arrow pad and press the I
button.

4Highlight a function using the FG buttons and press the Q button to assign
it to the selected control.

2
Shooting• [K Button Function] of G Custom Menu J (P. 185)
is displayed in still image shooting mode, and[n Button Function] of [n Button/Dial/Lever] (P. 163)
is displayed in movie mode.

Natural±0S ±0• The options available vary from button to button.

 Available Roles
Role

Function

AF Stop

Suspend autofocus. Focus locks and autofocus is suspended while
the control is pressed. Applies only to lens l buttons.

AEL/AFL (t)Lock focus and/or exposure. When used for exposure lock, thecontrol locks exposure when pressed and releases the lock whenpressed a second time. The behavior of the control can be selectedusing [K AEL/AFL] in G Custom Menu J (P. 201).

RREC (movie
recording)

The control functions as a movie-record button. Press to start or stop
recording.

Direct Function(n)Assign roles to the buttons on the arrow pad (FGHI). The
following roles can be assigned:
H button: N (AF-target selection)
F button: F (exposure compensation)
I button: # (flash) (still picture) / electronic zoom (movie)
G button: j/Y (drive mode) (still picture) / WB (movie)• The I and G buttons can be assigned other functions.

Preview (z)Stop aperture down to the selected value. This lets you preview
depth of field. Aperture stops down to the currently-selected value
while the button is pressed. Preview options can be selected using[z Settings] in G Custom Menu Q (P. 189).
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

EN 117Role

2

k (one-touch
white balance)

AF Area Select(N)

You can choose the AF-target mode (P. 69) and position (P. 72).
Press the control to view the AF-target selection display.
Use the front or rear dial to choose AF-target mode and the multiselector or arrow pad to position the AF target.
• You can choose the controls used for this operation.
g G Custom Menu K > [N Select Screen Settings] (P. 207)

N Home(AF home position)(NH)

Recall previously-saved [AF Mode], [AF Target Mode], and [AFTarget Point] “home position” settings. Press the control to recall
saved settings and press it again to restore the settings previouslyin effect. Home position settings are saved using [N Set Home] in
G Custom Menu K (P. 206).
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
• You can save separate home positions for landscape and portrait
orientations using [K Orientation Linked N] (P. 210) in
G Custom Menu K.

MF (AF/MF toggle)

Switch between AF and MF. Press once to select MF and again to
return to the previous mode. The focus mode can also be selected byholding the button and rotating a dial.
This option will have no effect during still photography if [mode2] isselected for [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 219).
It will likewise have no effect during movie recording if [mode2] isselected for [n Fn Lever Function] (P. 163).

RAW K(RAW quality)

Switch between RAW + JPEG and JPEG [KK] settings. Press thecontrol to switch from RAW or JPEG to RAW + JPEG or from RAW +JPEG to JPEG. You can also choose an image quality setting byholding the button and rotating a dial.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

Test Picture(K TEST)

Take a test shot. You can view the effects of selected settings in an
actual photograph. If you keep the control pressed while pressing the
shutter button, you will be able to view the results but the picture will
not be saved to the memory card.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

Shooting
118 EN

Function
Measure a value for one-touch white balance (P. 94, 95).
To measure white balance during still photography, frame a reference
object (a piece of white paper or the like) in the display, then press
and hold the control and press the shutter button. A list of one-touch
white balance options will be displayed, from which you can choose
the location to which the new value will be saved.
To measure white balance during movie recording, frame a reference
object (a piece of white paper or the like) in the display and press the
button. A list of one-touch white balance options will be displayed,from which you can choose the location to which the new value will
be saved.

Role

Function

Exposure F (F)Adjust exposure settings. Hold the control and rotate the front orrear dial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings
and then rotate the dials. The adjustments available vary with theshooting mode:[P]: Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad for exposurecompensation. Use the FG buttons for program shift.
[A]: Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad for exposurecompensation. Use the FG buttons for aperture.
[S]: Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad for exposurecompensation. Use the FG buttons for shutter speed.
[M] *: Use the rear dial or FG on the arrow pad for shutter speed.
Use the front dial or the HI buttons for aperture.
[B]: Use rear dial or FG on the arrow pad to switch between bulb/
time and live composite photography. Use the front dial or HI
buttons to choose the aperture.
* For information on adjusting exposure settings when [AUTO]
is selected for [ISO] (P. 75, 91), see “Adjusting Exposure
Compensation” (P. 68).

Digital Teleconverter (b)Turn the digital teleconverter on or off (P. 143). Press once to zoom
in and again to zoom out.

Keystone Comp.
(D)

Press the control to view keystone compensation settings (P. 156).
After adjusting settings, press the control again to exit. To cancel
keystone compensation, press and hold the control.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

Fisheye
Compensation(A)

Enable fisheye correction (P. 242). Press once to enable fisheye
correction. Press again to disable. Hold the button and rotate thefront or rear dial to choose from [Angle] options 1, 2, and 3.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

Magnify (a)Press the control once to display the zoom frame and again to zoomin (P. 73). Press the control a third time to exit zoom; to hide thezoom frame, press and hold the control. Use the multi selector, touch
controls, or the arrow pad (FGHI) to position the zoom frame.

2
Shooting

Custom Mode
C1–C4

Recall settings for the selected custom mode. Press the control
once to recall saved settings, a second time to restore the settings
previously in effect (P. 58). The control continues to perform thisfunction when a custom mode is selected with the mode dial.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

EN 119Role

Function

HDR (M)

Enable HDR (P. 152). Press once to enable HDR. Press again todisable. Hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial to adjust HDR
settings, including HDR bracketing.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

2

BKT (N)

Enable bracketing (P. 146). Press once to enable bracketing. Pressagain to disable. Hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial toadjust [Bracketing] settings.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

Shooting

ISO

Adjust [ISO] settings (P. 75). Hold the control and rotate the frontor rear dial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings
and then rotate the dials. Use the front or rear dial or HI on thearrow pad to adjust settings.

WB (white balance)

Adjust [WB] settings (P. 94). Hold the control and rotate the front orrear dial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings
and then rotate the dials. Use the front or rear dial or HI on thearrow pad to adjust settings.

Multi Function

Configure the control for use as a multi-function button (P. 124).
Hold the control and rotate the front or rear dial to choose thefunction performed. The selected function can be performed bypressing the control.

Peaking (PEAK)

Toggle focus peaking on or off (P. 215). Press the control once toturn peaking on and again to turn it off. When peaking is on, peaking
options (color, amount) can be displayed by pressing the INFO
button.

V Level Disp(R)

Display the digital level gauge. The exposure bar display in the
viewfinder functions as a level gauge. Press the control again to exit.
This option takes effect when [Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for[EVF Style] (P. 240) in G Custom Menu a.

u View
Selection(display selection)

Switch between viewfinder photography and live view. If [Off] isselected for [EVF Auto Switch] (P. 196), the display will switch
between the viewfinder and the monitor. Press and hold the control todisplay [EVF Auto Switch] options.

S-OVF (n)Enable [S-OVF] (P. 197). Press once to turn OVF simulation on.
Press again to turn it off.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

AF Limiter(AFLimit)

Enable the AF limiter (P. 183). Press once to enable [AF Limiter].
Press again to disable. Hold the button and rotate the front or rear
dial to choose from three stored settings.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

120 ENRole

Function

Toggle [AF Mode] > [Preset MF] on or off (P. 64). Press the control
once to enable preset MF and again to restore the previous focus
mode. Alternatively, you can choose the [AF Mode] by holding thecontrol and rotating a dial.
Preset MF (PreMF)
This option will have no effect during still photography if [mode2] isselected for [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 219).
It will likewise have no effect during movie recording if [mode2] isselected for [n Fn Lever Function] (P. 163).
Recall previously-saved lens data (P. 239). Recall saved data for thecurrent lens after changing lenses or the like.

IS Mode (IS)Toggle [Image Stabilizer] on or off (P. 97). Press once to select[Off] and again to turn image stabilization on. Hold the control androtate the front or rear dial to access [Image Stabilizer] options.

Flicker Scan(P)

Adjust settings for [Flicker Scan] (P. 166, 234). Press the control
to select [On]. You can adjust shutter speed for best results while
viewing banding in the display. Press the control again to display
shooting information and access other settings. Press and hold thecontrol to select [Off] for [Flicker Scan].

G Lock (touch
control lock)

Lock touch controls. Press and hold the button once to lock touch
controls and again to unlock.
• This function can be assigned to the I and G buttons only. You
must first set [d] to [Direct Function].

Electronic Zoom
(X)

Zoom power zoom lenses in or out. After pressing the control, use thearrow pad to zoom in or out. Use For I on the arrow pad to zoom
in and G or H to zoom out.
• This function can be assigned to the I and G buttons only. You
must first set [d] to [Direct Function].

Flash Mode (#)

Adjust flash settings (P. 86). Press once to display flash options
and again select the highlighted option and exit. Highlight settings
using the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad.
• This function can be assigned to the I and G buttons only. You
must first set [d] to [Direct Function].
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

Shooting

Lens Info Settings(sLens)2

EN 121Role

Functionj/Y (sequential
shooting/self-timer)

Choose a drive (sequential shooting/self-timer) mode (P. 78).
Press the button to display drive mode options and then choose amode using the front or rear dial or the HI buttons on the arrowpad.
• This function can be assigned to the I and G buttons only. You
must first set [d] to [Direct Function].
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

Live ND Shooting(O)

Enable the live ND filter (P. 159). Press once to enable [Live ND
Shooting]. Press again to disable. Hold the button and rotate the frontor rear dial to adjust [Live ND Shooting] settings.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

I Face Selection(E)

Select the face used for focus when the camera detects multiple
portrait subjects. Pressing the button selects the face closest to thecurrent AF target. If q (all targets) is selected for AF-target mode,pressing the button will instead select the face closest to the centerof the frame. To focus on a different face, hold the button and rotate
the front or rear dial. This option can also be used during movie
recording.

I Face Priority(I)

Pressing the button when an option other than [Face Priority Off] isselected for [I Face Priority] (P. 92) selects [Face Priority Off]; torestore the previous setting, press the button again. To change theoption displayed in the [I Face Priority] menu, hold the button androtate the front or rear dial.

Live View Boost(G)

Pressing the button when [Off] is selected for [Live View Boost](P. 188) selects [On1]. If an option other than [Off] is selected,pressing the button selects [Off]; to restore the previous setting, press
the button again. To choose an option for [Live View Boost], hold thecontrol and rotate the front or rear dial.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.

Focus Ring Lock
(B)

Press the control once to disable, and again to enable, the lensfocus ring. This option is available when [S-AFb], [C-AFb], [MF],[C-AF+TRb], [PreMF], or [FAFb] is selected for [AF Mode].
The b portion of the AF mode indicator is displayed gray while thering is disabled.
In the case of lenses equipped with an MF (manual focus) clutch,pressing the button has no effect when the focus ring is in the MF
position (closer to the camera body).
Focus ring lock ends when you perform an operation such as turning
the camera off or attaching a different lens.

2
Shooting
122 ENRole

Function

S-AF

Focus using [S-AF]. Press the control to focus. Focus will lock while
the control is pressed.
• This role is available for [n Button Function] only.

OffThe control is not used.

2
Shooting

Movie H (H)Zoom in or out using the movie teleconverter (P. 125). Press thecontrol once to display the zoom frame and again to zoom in. Pressthe control a third time to exit zoom; to hide the zoom frame, press
and hold the control. Use the multi selector, touch controls, or thearrow pad (FGHI) to position the zoom frame.
• This role is available for [n Button Function] only.

EN 123

 Using multi function options (Multi Function)
Assign multiple roles to a single button.
• To use the multi function feature, you must first assign [Multi Function] to a camera control
using [Button Function] (P. 116).
Choosing a function

2

1

Hold the button to which [Multi Function] is assigned
and rotate the front or rear dial.

100%

Shooting• Rotate the dial until the desired feature is highlighted.
Release the button to select the highlighted feature.

2

Press the button to which [Multi Function] is
assigned.

3

Adjust settings.

Highlight&Shadow Control

P

ISO

WB

a

The multi-function button can be used to:Highlight&Shadow Adjust brightness using the front or rear dial. Press the INFO button
Control
to choose the tone range (highlights, shadows, or mid-tones).
Color CreatorISO
WB

Use the front dial to adjust hue and the rear dial to adjust saturation.
Choose a setting using the front or rear dial.

Magnify

The zoom frame will be displayed.

Image Aspect

Choose a setting using the front or rear dial.

S-OVF
Peaking

Press the button to turn the feature on or off.

• You can choose the options displayed. g G Custom Menu P > [Multi Function
Settings] (P. 187)

124 EN Adjusting Zoom During Filming (Movie H)
You can zoom in on a selected area of the frame for movie recording without using lenscontrols. Use for instant close-ups or cuts to wider angle. Buttons or touch controls
can be used to choose the zoom location and cut to close ups or wide angles duringfilming.
[Movie H] is a [n Button Function] option. It turns on or off with a button and so must
be assigned to a control using [n Button Function] (P. 116).

Using [Movie H]

1

Press the button to which [Movie H] is assigned.
• A frame will appear in the center of the display.

L

R
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

2
Shooting• This feature is not available when [4K] or [C4K] is selected for [nK] > [Movie
Resolution].
• This feature cannot be used to film high-speed movies.
• [Movie H] cannot be combined with [Digital Tele-converter] (P. 143).

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

n

2

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

Position the frame as desired.
• Position the frame using touch controls, the multiselector, or the arrow pad (FGHI).
• To re-center the frame, press the multi selector once orpress and hold the Q button.
Multi selector

3

Press the button to which [Movie H] is assigned once more.

4

To end zoom, press the Q button once, or press and hold the button to which[Movie H] is assigned.

• The camera will zoom the selected area in to fill the display.
• To return to the zoom frame, press the button to which [Movie H] is assigned a thirdtime.

EN 125

3 Playback
Information display during playback
Playback image information

3

Simplified display

Playback

2 3 4

1

w1

5

6 7 8 9 0a

100% w1

×10

HDR1

j

48kHz

JPEG

YF 100-0015

4:3

2020.02.15 12:30:00

15

b
c

ihg f e d
ND8

d

HDR1

Overall display

k

l

no

m

100% w1

×10

48kHz

JPEG

P 250

F5.6

+2.0

45mm

-18

+1.0

A+4
ISO 400

G+4
sRGB

WB
AUTO

Natural5184×3888
HDR1

4:3

2020.02.15 12:30:00

B

126 ENAzyx

1/8

YF 100-0015

15

w

p
q
r
s
t
u
v

3
Playback

i Live ND filter .................................P. 159
j Date and time .................................P. 33
k Aspect border .................................P. 98
l AF target display .............................P. 69
m Shooting mode..........................P. 41–60
n Shutter speed ...........................P. 44–50
o Exposure compensation .................P. 68
p Aperture value ..........................P. 44–50
q Focal lengthr Flash intensity control ...................P. 105
s White balance compensation..........P. 96
t Color space...................................P. 114
u Picture mode.........................P. 106, 142
v Compression rate .........................P. 236
w Pixel count ....................................P. 236
x ISO sensitivity ...........................P. 75, 91
y White balance .................................P. 94
z Focus adjustment .........................P. 183
A Metering mode ................................P. 77
B Histogram

1 Battery level ....................................P. 32
2 Wireless LAN connection
status ....................................P. 245, 256
3 Active Bluetooth® connection ......P. 246
4 Active connection to computer (Wi-Fi)......................................................P. 256
5 Wireless LAN connection......P. 247, 270
6 GPS data indicator........................P. 254
7 Print order
Number of prints ...........................P. 134
8 Sound record ................................P. 136
9 Share order ...................................P. 132
0 Protect ..........................................P. 131
a Image selected .............................P. 133
b File number ...................................P. 195
c Frame number
d Playback slot.................................P. 237
e Image quality ........................P. 100, 142f Aspect ratio .....................................P. 98
g HDR image ...................................P. 152
h Focus stacking ..............................P. 149

Switching the information display
You can switch the information displayed during playback by pressing
the INFO button.

INFO button
100% w1

INFO

×10

HDR1

4:3

48kHz

JPEG

INFO

YF 100-0015

2020.02.15 12:30:00

15

Simplified display
100% w1

100%

×10

48kHz

JPEG

P 250

F5.6

+2.0

45mm

-18

+1.0

A+4
ISO 400

G+4
sRGB

WB
AUTO

Natural

INFO

5184×3888
HDR1

4:3

Image only

1/8

YF 100-0015

2020.02.15 12:30:00

15

Overall display• You can add histogram, highlight & shadow, and Light Box to the information displayed
during playback. g G Custom Menu P > [G/Info Settings] > [q Info] (P. 226)

EN 127

Viewing photographs and movies

1

Press the q button.
• Your most recent photograph or movie will be displayed.
• Select the desired photograph or movie using the front dial or arrow pad.
• Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode.

%

3
Playback• The q button can be used to switch between cards while playback is in progress. To
choose a card, hold the q button and rotate the front or rear dial. This does not change
option selected for [Card Slot Settings] > [q Slot] (P. 237) in G Custom Menu Y.
Displaysthe previous frame

Displays
the next frame

100%

Front dial
4:3

YF 100-0015

2020.02.15 12:30:00

15

Still image
48kHz

123minArrow padP
4K

TC 00:00:00:00 DF

30p

2020.02.15 12:30:00

q button

WB
AUTO

100-0004
4

Movie

Rear dial (o)Zoom in (p)/Index (q)Front dial (r)Previous (t)/Next (s)Operation also available during close-up playback.

Single-frame playback: Next (I)/previous (H)/playback volume(FG)
Close-up playback: Changing the close-up position• You can display the next frame (I) or the previous frame (H)during close-up playback by pressing the INFO button.
• Press the INFO button again to display a zoom frame and use
FGHI to change its position.
Arrow pad (FGHI)/
multi selector (S/T) Index/calendar playback: Highlight image
The above operations can also be performed using the multiselector.
• The operations performed using FGHI can also be
performed by pressing the multi selector up, down, left, or right.
• The operations performed by pressing the INFO button canalso be performed by pressing the center of the multi selector.

128 ENINFO button

View image info

H (R) button

Select picture (P. 133)

0 (AEL/AFL) button Protect picture (P. 131) button

Delete picture (P. 132)

Q button

View menus (in calendar playback, press this button to exit tosingle-frame playback)Finding Pictures Quickly(Index and Calendar Playback)• In single-frame playback, rotate the rear dial to G for index playback. Rotate further for
calendar playback.
• Turn the rear dial to a to return to single-frame playback.

4:3

YF 100-0015

2020.02.15 12:30:00

15

Single-frame
playback

p

q

100%

2020.02.15 12:30:00

20

Index display

2020.2

100%

Sun

p

Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

26

27

28

29

30

31

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

1

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

1

2

3

4

5

3
Playbackq

100%

Calendar display

Q• You can change the number of frames for index display. g G Custom Menu P > [G/Info Settings] > [G Settings] (P. 228)

Zooming In(Playback Zoom)

In single-frame playback, turn the rear dial to a to zoom in. Turn to G to return tosingle-frame playback.

p

100%

4:3

YF 100-0015

2020.02.15 12:30:00

Single-frame
playback

p

100%

100%

14x

2x

15

q

2× zoomq

14× zoom

Close-up playback

EN 129

Rotating Pictures(Rotate)Choose whether to rotate photographs.

1
2
3Play the photograph back and press the Q button.
Select [Rotate] and press the Q button.
Press F to rotate the image counterclockwise, G to rotate it clockwise; theimage rotates each time the button is pressed.
• Press the Q button to save settings and exit.
• The rotated image is saved in its current orientation.
• Movies and protected images cannot be rotated.

3
Playback%• The camera can be configured to automatically rotate portrait-orientation pictures during
playback. g q Playback Menu > [R] (P. 170)
[Rotate] is not available when [Off] is selected for [R].

Watching movies
Select a movie and press the Q button to display the
playback menu. Select [Play Movie] and press the Q
button to begin playback. Fast-forward and rewind using
H/I. Press the Q button again to pause playback. While
playback is paused, use F to view the first frame and G
to view the last frame. Use HI or the front dial to view
previous or next frame. Press the MENU button to end
playback.

123minMovie
Play from Beginning
Play Movie
Movie Edit
Share Order
0
Copy

Back

Set

Viewing Movies over 4 GB in SizeLong movies may exceed 4 GB in size. Movies over 4 GB in size are recorded over multiple
files. The files can be played back as a single movie.

1

Press the q button.

2

Display a long movie you want to view and press the Q button.

• The most recent picture will be displayed.
• The following options will be displayed.
[Play from Beginning]: Plays back a split movie all the way through[Play Movie]:
Plays back files separately
Deletes all parts of a split movie[Delete entire n]:[Erase]:Deletes files separately• We recommend using the latest version of Olympus Workspace to play back movies on acomputer (P. 274). Before launching the software for the first time, connect the camera to
the computer.

130 ENProtecting PicturesProtect images from accidental deletion. Display theimage you want to protect and press the 0 (AEL/AFL)
button to add 0 to the image (protection icon). Press the
0 (AEL/AFL) button again to cancel protection. You
can also protect multiple selected images. g “Selecting
Multiple Pictures (0, Copy Select, Erase Selected, Share
Order Selected)” (P. 133)(0)0 (protect) icon
100%

4:3

YF 100-0020

Copying an image

3
Playback

2020.02.15 12:30:00• Formatting the card erases all data including protected20
images.
• When an unprotected image is displayed, you can hold the 0 (AEL/AFL) button androtate the front or rear dial to protect all images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any
previously-protected images displayed while the dial is rotated will be unaffected.
• When a protected image is displayed, you can hold the 0 (AEL/AFL) button androtate the front or rear dial to remove protection from all images displayed while the dialis rotated. Any previously-unprotected images displayed while the dial is rotated will be
unaffected.
• The same operations can be performed during playback zoom or when a picture isselected in the index display.

(Copy)

When there are cards with available space in both slots 1 and 2, you can copy an
image to the other card.

1
2
3

Display an image you want to copy and press the Q button.

4

Highlight [Yes] and press the Q button.

Highlight [Copy] and press the Q button.
Choose whether to specify the destination folder.
• If you select [Assign], choose a destination folder.
• The picture will be copied to the other card.

• You can also copy all images on a card to the other card at a time. g q Playback
Menu > [Copy All] (P. 175)

EN 131

Deleting Pictures(Erase)Display an image you want to delete andpress the  button. Select [Yes] and press
the Q button.
You can erase images without theconfirmation step by changing the button
settings. g G Custom Menu Z > [Quick
Erase] (P. 196)

3
Playback• You can choose whether deleting
pictures recorded in RAW+JPEG image
quality modes deletes both copies, only
the JPEG copy, or only the RAW copy.
g G Custom Menu Z > [RAW+JPEG
Erase] (P. 196)

100%

Erase

Yes
No
Back

Set

 button

Selecting Pictures for Sharing(Share Order)

You can select images you want to transfer to a smartphone in advance. When playing
back images you want to transfer, press the Q button to display the playback menu.
Highlight [Share Order], press the Q button, and press F or G to mark the image forsharing; a h icon and the file type will be displayed.
To cancel a share order, press F or G. You can select images you want to transfer
in advance and set a share order all at once. g “Selecting Multiple Pictures (0,Copy Select, Erase Selected, Share Order Selected)” (P. 133), “Copying Pictures to
Smartphones” (P. 251)
• Up to 200 pictures on each slot can be marked for sharing at a time.

$• Pictures can also be marked for sharing using the H (R)button. If the H (R) button is currently assigned a role otherthan [h], assign it the [h] role using the [qR Function]
option in G Custom Menu K (P. 185).
• When an unmarked image is displayed, you can hold the
H (R) button and rotate the front or rear dial to mark for2020.02.15 12:30:00
21
sharing all images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any
previously-marked images displayed while the dial is rotatedwill be unaffected.
• When a marked image is displayed, you can hold the H (R) button and rotate the front orrear dial to remove share marking from all images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any
previously-unmarked images displayed while the dial is rotated will be unaffected.
• The same operations can be performed during playback zoom or when a picture isselected in the index display.
100%

132 EN Selecting RAW+JPEG Pictures for Sharing
In the case of pictures recorded with [RAW+JPEG] for image quality, you can choose
to share only the JPEG copies, only the RAW copies, or both the JPEG and RAW
copies.

1
2

Press the MENU button to view the menus.

3
4Highlight [RAW+JPEG h] using FG and press I.

Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup menu and press I on thearrow pad.
Highlight an option using FG and press the Q button.
Only the JPEG copies will be marked for sharing.

RAW

Only the RAW copies will be marked for sharing.

RAW+JPEG

Both RAW and JPEG copies will be marked for sharing.

Playback

JPEG

3• Changing the option selected for [RAW+JPEG h] does not affect pictures already marked
for sharing.
• Regardless of the option selected, removing share marking removes the marking fromboth copies.

Selecting Multiple Pictures(0, Copy Select, Erase Selected, Share Order Selected)
You can select multiple images for [0], [Copy Select], [Erase Selected] or [Share
Order Selected].
Press the Q button to display the menu, and then selectfrom [0], [Copy Select], [Erase Selected] or [Share Order
Selected].
This function is also available in single-frame playback.

100%• When an unmarked image is displayed, you can hold the
H (R) button and rotate the front or rear dial to select all
2020.02.15 12:30:00
21
images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any previouslymarked images displayed while the dial is rotated will be
unaffected.
• When a marked image is displayed, you can hold the H (R) button and rotate the frontor rear dial to deselect all images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any previouslyunmarked images displayed while the dial is rotated will be unaffected.

EN 133

Print order(DPOF)

You can save digital “print orders” to the memory card listing the pictures to be printed
and the number of copies of each print. You can then have the pictures printed at a
print shop that supports DPOF. A memory card is required when creating a print order.
 Creating a print order

3

1
2

Press the Q button during playback and select [<] (Print Order).
Select [<] or [<ALL] and press the Q button.

Playback

Individual picture
Press HI to select the frame that you want to set as print
reservation, then press FG to set the number of prints.
• To set print reservation for several pictures, repeat thisstep. Press the Q button when all the desired pictures
have been selected.
All pictures
Select [<ALL] and press the Q button.

3

Select the date and time format and press the Q
button.

100%

Print Order

<

ALL

Back

100%

Set

X

No

No
Date

The pictures are printed without the date and time.

Date
Time

The pictures are printed with the shooting date.

Time The pictures are printed with the shooting time.

Back

Set

• When printing images, the setting cannot be changed
between the images.

4

Select [Set] and press the Q button.
• The setting will be applied to the images saved on the card being used for playback.

• The camera cannot be used to modify print orders created with other devices. Creating a
new print order deletes any existing print orders created with other devices.
• Print orders cannot include RAW images or movies.

134 EN Removing all or selected pictures from the print order
You can reset all print reservation data or just the data for selected pictures.

1
2

Press the Q button during playback and select [<] (Print Order).

3

Press HI to select images you wish to remove from the print order.

4

Select the date and time format and press the Q button.

5

Select [Set] and press the Q button.

Select [<] and press the Q button.
• To remove all pictures from the print order, select [Reset] and press the Q button. To
exit without removing all pictures, select [Keep] and press the Q button.
• You can also remove all pictures from the print order by selecting [<ALL] andchoosing [Reset].

• This setting is applied to all frames with print reservation data.
• The setting will be applied to the images saved on the card being used for playback.

3
Playback• Use G to set the number of prints to 0. Press the Q button once you have removed
all the desired pictures from the print order.

EN 135

Adding Audio to Pictures(R)

You can record audio using the built-in stereo microphone or an optional external
microphone and add it to pictures. The recorded audio provides a simple replacement
for written notes about the pictures.
• Audio recordings can be up to 30 s long.

3
Playback

1

Display the image to which you want to add audio and press the Q button.

2

Select [R] and press the Q button.

• Audio recording is not available with protected images.
• Audio can also be added to pictures using the [Edit] option in the playback menu. Use[Edit] > [Sel. Image] to select the picture, then press the Q button and select [R].
100%

JPEG
JPEG Edit• To exit without adding audio, select [No].

Share Order
0
R
Rotate
<
Set

Back

3

Select [R Start] and press the Q button to begin
recording.

4

Press the Q button to end recording.
• Pictures with audio are indicated by H icons andindicators showing the recording rate.
• To delete recorded audio, select [Erase] in Step 3.

100%

R

No
R Start
Erase
Back

Set

%
• Audio is recorded at the rate selected for movies. The rate can be selected using[Movie R] (P. 169) in the n video menu.

 Audio Playback
Playback begins automatically when a picture with audio is displayed. To adjust thevolume:12

136 EN

Press the q button to display a picture.
Press F or G on the arrow pad.
• F button: Raise volume.
• G button: Lower volume.

100%

Playback Using Touch Controls
Use touch controls to zoom pictures in and out, scroll pictures, or choose the picture
displayed.
 Full-frame playback
Displaying the previous or next image• Slide your finger to the left to view the next image, andright to view the previous image.

3
Playback

Magnify• Lightly tap the screen to display the slider and P.
• Slide the bar up or down to zoom in or out.
• Slide your finger to scroll the display when the picture iszoomed in.
• Tap P to display index playback.
Tap Q for calendar playback.

100%

100%

 Index/Calendar playback
Displaying the previous or next page
• Slide your finger up to view the next page, and down toview the previous page.
• Tap Q or R to switch the number of images
displayed. g G Custom Menu P > [G/Info
Settings] > [G Settings] (P. 228)
• Tap R several times to return to single-frame playback.

100%

21

Viewing images• Tap an image to view it full frame.

EN 137

Selecting and protecting images
In single-frame playback, lightly tap the screen to display the touch menu. You canthen perform the desired operation by tapping the icons in the touch menu.

3
Playback
138 ENH

Select an image. You can select multiple images and delete them collectively.

h

Images you want to share with a smartphone can be set. g “Selecting Pictures
for Sharing (Share Order)” (P. 132)0

Protects an image.

• Do not tap the display with your fingernails or other sharp objects.
• Gloves or monitor covers may interfere with touch screen operation.

4 Menu functions
Basic menu operations
The menus contain shooting and playback options that are not displayed by the LV
super control panel, etc., and let you customize the camera settings for easier use.
Tab

Description

W

Shooting Menu 1

Photography-related items. Ready the camera for shooting oraccess basic photo settings.

X

Shooting Menu 2

Photography-related items. Adjust advanced photo settings.

nVideo Menu

Items related to movie recording. Adjust basic and custom
settings.

q

Playback Menu

Playback- and retouch-related items.

G

Custom Menu

Items for customizing the camera.

e

Setup Menu

Items for setting the clock, choosing a language, and the like.

P

My Menu *A customizable menu containing only items you select.

4* “My Menu” contains no items at shipment. Use “My Menu” to store and organize
frequently-used items from other menus. Select items for addition to “My Menu” from thecamera menus (P. 179).

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Shooting Menu 1

100%
11

Tab
Operation guide2

Reset / Custom Modes
Preliminary and basic
Picture Modeshooting options.
KK

YF

Image Aspect

4:3

Digital Tele-converter
j/Y

o

Off
Off

Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
Back

Guide

Menu functions (Basic operations)

Tab name

Press the Q button toconfirm the setting

Set

Press the MENU button
to go back one screen• A guide is displayed about 2 seconds after you select an option. Press the INFO
button to view or hide guides.

2

Use FG to select a tab and press the Q button.
• The menu group tab appears when the G Custom
Menu is selected. Use FG to select the menu groupand press the Q button.

A1. AF/MF

100%
1
2

A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2

KAF Mode

S-AF

KAF+MF
KAEL/AFLOff
S3/C4/M3/F3

AF Scanner
KC-AF Sensitivity

mode2

±0

KC-AF Center Start
KC-AF Center Priority

Back

Set

Menu group

EN 1393

Select an item using FG and press the Q button to display options for theselected item.
Function

The current setting
is displayed

Shooting Menu 2

100%

Off

22

HDR

Off

Multiple Exposure

Off

Multiple Exposure

Off

Keystone Comp.

Off

Keystone Comp.

Off

Menu functions (Basic operations)
140 EN

1

Bracketing

22

HDR

Anti-Shock r/Silent s

Anti-Shock r/Silent s

High Res Shot

High Res Shot
Off

Live ND Shooting

4

Shooting Menu 2

100%

Bracketing

Back

4

Q

1

Set

Off
On

Off
Off

Off

Live ND Shooting
Back

Set

Use FG to highlight an option and press the Q button to select.
• Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu.

• For the default settings of each option, refer to “Default Settings” (P. 301).
• Depending on camera status and settings, some items may be unavailable. Items that are
not available are grayed out and cannot be selected.
• You can also navigate the menus using the multi selector or the front and rear dials inplace of the arrow pad.

Using Shooting Menu 1/Shooting Menu 2
Shooting Menu 1

100%
11
2

Reset / Custom Modes
Picture Mode
KK

YF

Image Aspect

4:3

Digital Tele-converter
j/Y

Off
o
Off

Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
Back

Set

Shooting Menu 1

Shooting Menu 2

W

X

Bracketing (P. 146)
HDR (P. 152)
Multiple Exposure (P. 154)
Keystone Comp. (P. 156)
Anti-Shock r/Silent s (P. 157)
High Res Shot (P. 158)
Live ND Shooting (P. 159)

Restoring Default Settings

4(Reset)Camera settings can be easily restored to default settings. You can opt to reset almost
all settings or only those directly related to photography.

1

Select [Reset / Custom Modes] in W Shooting Menu 1 and press the Q
button.

2

Select [Reset] and press the I button.

Reset / Custom Modes

100%

Reset

Basic

Assign to Custom Mode
Custom Mode Save Settings
Recall from Custom Mode

Back

3

Highlight [Full] or [Basic], and press the Q button.

4
5

Press the Q button in the [Reset / Custom Modes] menu.

Menu functions (Shooting menu)

Reset / Custom Modes (P. 141)
Picture Mode (P. 106, 142)
KK (P. 100, 142)
Image Aspect (P. 98)
Digital Tele-converter (P. 143)
j/Y (drive) (P. 78, 80)
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse (P. 144)

Set

• To reset all settings except the time, date, and a few others, highlight [Full] and press
the Q button. g “Default Settings” (P. 301)

Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

EN 141

Saving Settings(Assign to Custom Mode)

Frequently-used settings and shooting modes can be saved to custom modes (C1through C4) and recalled for use as required simply by rotating the mode dial. Saved
settings can also be recalled directly from the menus. g “Recalling Saved Settings”(P. 58)• At default settings, custom modes are equivalent to mode P.

Processing options

4(Picture Mode)

You can make individual adjustments to contrast, sharpness and other parameters in[Picture Mode] (P. 106) settings. Changes to parameters are stored for each picturemode separately.

1

Menu functions (Shooting menu)

Select [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1 andpress the Q button.
• The camera will display the picture mode available in thecurrent shooting mode.

Shooting Menu 1

100%
11
2

Reset / Custom Modes
Picture Mode
KK

YF

Image Aspect

4:3

Digital Tele-converter
j/Y

Off
o
Off

Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
Back

2

Set

Select an option with FG and press the Q button.

• Press I to set the detailed options for the selected picture mode. Detailed options are notavailable for some picture modes.
• Changes to contrast have no effect at settings other than [Normal].

%• You can reduce the number of picture mode options displayed in the menu.
g G Custom Menu P > [Picture Mode Settings] (P. 187)

Photo File and Image Size Options(KK)

g “Photo File and Image Size Options (KK)” (P. 100)
• You can change the JPEG image size and compression ratio combination, and [X] and[W] pixel counts. [K Set], [Pixel Count] g “Combinations of JPEG image sizes andcompression rates (K Set)” (P. 236)

142 EN

Digital Zoom

(Digital Tele-converter)

This option takes a crop at the center of the frame the same dimensions as the size
option currently selected for image quality and zooms it in to fill the display. The zoom
ratio increases by about 2×. This allows you to zoom in past the lens’ maximum focal
length, making it a good choice when you are unable to switch lenses or find it difficult
to get any closer to your subject.

1

Select [Digital Tele-converter] in W Shooting Menu 1, and press the Q
button.

23Highlight [On], and press the Q button.
Press the MENU button to exit the menus.

4

Digital teleconverter
100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023• The digital teleconverter cannot be used with multiple exposure, keystone compensation,or, fisheye correction.
• This function is not available when [Movie 6] is assigned to a button using the[n Button/Dial/Lever] > [n Button Function] option (P. 116, 163) in the video menu.
• JPEG images are recorded at the selected zoom ratio. In the case of RAW images, aframe shows the zoom crop. A frame showing the zoom crop is displayed on the image
during playback.
• During zoom, the size of the AF targets increases and their number decreases.

%

Menu functions (Shooting menu)• When [On] is selected, the zoom ratio increases by 2×and a H icon is displayed. Pictures will be recorded at
the new zoom ratio.

• [Digital Tele-converter] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button
to enable it. g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)” (P. 116)

EN 143

Shooting automatically with a fixed interval (Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse)
You can set the camera to shoot automatically with a set time lapse. The shot frames
can also be recorded as into a single movie. This setting is only available in P/A/S/M
modes.

1

Select [Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse] in W Shooting
Menu 1 and press the Q button.

Shooting Menu 1

100%
11
2

Reset / Custom Modes
Picture Mode
KK

YF

Image Aspect

4:3

Digital Tele-converter
j/Y

Off
o
Off

Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse

4

Set

Back

Menu functions (Shooting menu)

2
3

Select [On] and press I.
Adjust the following settings and press the Q button.

Number of Frames

Choose the number of frames shot.

Start Waiting Time

Choose how long the camera waits before starting interval timer
photography and taking the first shot.

Interval Length

Choose how long the camera waits between shots once shooting
has begun.

Time Lapse Movie

Choose whether to record a time-lapse movie.
[Off]: The camera saves the individual shots but does not use themto create a time-lapse movie.
[On]: The camera records the individual shots and also uses them tocreate a time-lapse movie.

Movie Settings

Choose the frame size ([Movie Resolution]) and frame rate ([FrameRate]) for movies created using [Time Lapse Movie].

4

Press the Q button repeatedly to return to W Shooting Menu 1.
• Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• A 99 icon will appear in the shooting display (the icon
shows the selected number of shots).

Interval-timer photography
99

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

5

250 F5.6 0.0

Take pictures.

• The 99 icon will turn green and the number of shots remaining will be displayed.
• Frames are shot even if the image is not in focus after AF. If you wish to fix the focus
position, shoot in MF.
• [Rec View] (P. 176) starts in 0.5 seconds.

144 EN

1:02:031023

4Menu functions (Shooting menu)• If the time until shooting or the shooting interval is 1 minute 31 seconds or longer, themonitor will go dark and the camera will enter sleep mode if no operations are performedfor 1 minute. The camera and monitor will reactivate automatically 10 seconds before a
picture is taken, and can be reactivated manually by pressing the shutter button.
• The camera automatically selects [S-AF] for AF mode (P. 64) in place of [C-AF] and[C-AF+TR], and [S-AFb] in place of [C-AFb] and [C-AF+TRb].
• When [FAF] is selected as the AF mode, focus to initiate shooting, then lock focus andstart recording.
• Touch operations are disabled during time lapse shooting.
• Time-lapse shooting cannot be combined with bracketing, multiple exposure, HDR, or thelive ND filer.
• The flash will not work if the flash charging time is longer than the interval between shots.
• Choosing a value over 1000 for [Number of Frames] selects [Off] for [Time Lapse Movie].
• If any of still pictures are not recorded correctly, the time lapse movie will not be
generated.
• If there is insufficient space on the card, the time lapse movie will not be recorded.
• Time lapse shooting will be canceled if any of the following is operated:
Mode dial, MENU button, q button, lens release button, or connecting the USB cable.
• Turning the camera off ends interval-timer photography.
• If there is not enough charge left on the battery, the shooting may end partway through.
Make sure the battery is charged enough before shooting.
• Time-lapse movies created at a size of [4K] may not display on some computer systems.
More information is available on the OLYMPUS website.

EN 145

Varying settings over a series of photographs(Bracketing)

Bracketing is used to vary shooting settings such as exposure and white balanceover a series of shots. Depending on the setting, you may be able to combine several
different forms of bracketing. Use bracketing if you are unsure what settings to use orlack the time needed to change settings during shooting. You can also store bracketing
settings and later recall them simply by turning bracketing on.
AE BKT (AE bracketing)
Bracketing
The camera varies the exposure of each shot. You can selectOff3f 1.0EV
AE BKT
the bracketing increment from 0.3 EV, 0.7 EV, and 1.0 EV. In
2f 0.3EVWB BKTA-- G-single-frame shooting mode, one photograph is taken each
2f 0.7EV-FL BKT2f 1.0EV-ISO BKT
time the shutter button is pressed all the way down, while in
3f 0.3EV-ART BKT
sequential shooting mode the camera continues to take shots
3f 0.7EV-Focus BKTin the following order while the shutter button is pressed all the
3f 1.0EV
Back
Set
way down: no modification, negative, positive.
• Number of shots: Choose from 2, 3, 5, or 7.
• A t icon is displayed in green until all the shots in the bracketing sequence have beentaken.
• The camera modifies exposure by varying aperture and shutter speed (mode P), shutter
speed (mode A), aperture (mode S), or ISO sensitivity (mode M).
• If an option other than [AUTO] is selected for [ISO] (P. 75, 91) in mode M, thecamera will instead modify exposure by varying shutter speed.
• The camera brackets the value currently selected for exposure compensation.
• The size of the bracketing increment changes with the value selected for [EV Step](P. 191).
• Exposure bracketing cannot be combined with FL or focus bracketing.
100%

4Menu functions (Shooting menu)
146 ENWB BKT (WB bracketing)
WB BKT
Three images with different white balances (adjusted in
specified color directions) are automatically created from one
A-B
G-M
shot, starting with the value currently selected for white balance.
3f 4Step
3f 4Step• White balance can be varied by 2, 4, or 6 steps on each of
the A – B (Amber – Blue) and G – M (Green – Magenta) axes.
• The camera brackets the value currently selected for whiteBack
Setbalance compensation.
• WB bracketing cannot be combined with ART or focus bracketing.
100%

FL BKT (FL bracketing)
Bracketing
The camera varies flash level over three shots (no modification
3f 1.0EV
AE BKTon the first shot, negative on the second, and positive on the
WB BKTA-- G-third). The amount can be chosen from 0.3, 0.7, and 1.0 EV.
Off
FL BKT-3f 0.3EV -ISO BKTIn single-frame shooting mode, one photograph is taken each
3f 0.7EV -ART BKTtime the shutter button is pressed all the way down, while in3f 1.0EV -Focus BKT
sequential shooting mode the camera continues to take shots
BackSet
in the following order while the shutter button is pressed all theway down: no modification, negative, positive.
• A t icon is displayed in green until all the shots in the bracketing sequence have beentaken.
• The size of the bracketing increment changes with the value selected for [EV Step](P. 191).
• Flash bracketing cannot be combined with AE or focus bracketing.
100%

100%

ART BKT (ART bracketing)
Create multiple copies of each picture, each with a different art
filter (picture mode) applied. The options selected are indicatedby checks (v).
• With the exceptions of AE and FL bracketing, ART bracketing
cannot be combined with other forms of bracketing.

ART BKT100%

Menu functions (Shooting menu)

ISO BKT (ISO bracketing)
Bracketing
The camera varies the sensitivity over three shots while keeping
3f 1.0EV
AE BKT
the shutter speed and aperture fixed. You can select theWB BKTA-- G-bracketing increment from 0.3 EV, 0.7 EV, and 1.0 EV. Each
FL BKT
-Off
-ISO
BKT
time the shutter button is pressed, the camera shoots three
3f 0.3EV -ART BKT
frames with the set sensitivity (or if auto sensitivity is selected,
3f 0.7EV -Focus BKT
the optimal sensitivity setting) on the first shot, negative
3f 1.0EV
Back
Set
modification on the second shot, and positive modification on
the third shot.
• The size of the bracketing increment does not change with the value selected for [ISOStep] (P. 191).
• Bracketing is performed regardless of the upper limit set with [K ISO-Auto Set] (P. 191).
• During silent photography, the flash sync speed is set to 1/20 s.
• ISO sensitivity bracketing cannot be combined with ART or focus bracketing.

4

Pop Art 1
Pop Art 2
Soft Focus
Pale&Light Color 1
Pale&Light Color 2Light Tone
Grainy Film 1
Back

H

EN 147

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
148 EN

Focus BKT (Focus bracketing)Take a series of shots at different focus positions. Focus moves
successively farther from the initial focus position. Choose thenumber of shots using [Set number of shots] and the change
in focus distance using [Set focus differential]. Choose smaller
values for [Set focus differential] to narrow the change in focus
distance, larger values to widen it. If you are using a flash otherthan the dedicated flash unit, you can specify the time it takes tocharge using the [#Charge Time] option.
Press the shutter button all the way down and release it
immediately. Shooting will continue until the selected number ofshots is taken or until the shutter button is pressed all the way
down again.
• Focus bracketing is not available with lenses that havemounts conforming to the Four-Thirds standard.
• Focus bracketing ends if zoom is adjusted during shooting.
• Shooting ends when focus reaches infinity.
• Pictures taken using focus bracketing are shot in silent
mode.
• To use the flash, select [Allow] for [Silent s Mode Settings](P. 157) > [Flash Mode].
• Focus bracketing cannot be combined with other forms ofbracketing.
• The flash sync speed is set to 1/50 s. Selecting a value overISO 8000 for [K ISO] sets the flash sync speed to 1/20 s.
• Olympus Workspace can be used to stack [Focus BKT]
pictures taken using lenses that support [Focus Stacking].
• See the OLYMPUS website for information on the lenses
that can be used with [Focus Stacking].

Bracketing

100%

AE BKT

3f 1.0EVWB BKTA-- G--FL BKT---

ISO BKT
ART BKT

Off

Focus BKT

On

---

Back

Set
Set number of shots

100%

0

0

3

Back

Set
Focus BKT

100%

Focus Stacking

Wide

Set number of shots
Set focus differential#Charge Time

3

Narrow

On
10
8
5
0sec
1

Back

Set
#Charge Time

100%

30sec
Select time between shutter
release for flash recharge.
This setting is not necessary
when using an Olympus flash.
Back

Set

Focus BKT (Focus Stacking)
Focus BKTThe camera automatically shifts focus over a series of from 3 toOff
Focus Stacking
15 shots and combines to create a single JPEG image that is in
Set number of shots
8
focus all the way from the foreground to background.
5
Set focus differential#Charge Time0sec
The camera automatically takes 3 to 15 shots bracketing thecurrent focus position.
• If focus stacking fails, the camera will record the selected
Back
Set
number of photos without creating a composite image.
• Shooting will end if zoom is adjusted after the shutter button has been pressed all the way
down to start focus stacking photography.
• The angle of view for composited images is narrower than the original images.
• A frame indicating the final crop will be shown in the display.
S-IS AUTO
Compose the shot with your subject in the frame.
• Guide line selected in [Displayed Grid] (P. 189) will not be
displayed.
YF• Pictures taken with [e-Portrait] or an art filter selected for
picture mode are recorded in [Natural] mode.
P
250 F5.6 0.01023• See the OLYMPUS website for information on the lenses
that can be used with [Focus Stacking].
• Focus stacking cannot be combined with other forms of bracketing.
100%

BKT

100%

4K

30p

1:02:03

 Using Bracketing1

Select [Bracketing] in X Shooting Menu 2 andpress the Q button.

Shooting Menu 2

100%
1

Bracketing

Off

22

HDR

Off

Multiple Exposure

Off

Keystone Comp.

Off

Anti-Shock r/Silent s
High Res Shot
Off

Live ND Shooting
Back2

After selecting [On], press I and select a bracket
shooting type.

Set
Shooting Menu 2

100%
1

Bracketing

22

HDR

• A menu of bracketing types will be displayed.

Off
On

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)

ISO-A
200

Off
Off

Multiple Exposure

Off

Keystone Comp.

Off

Anti-Shock r/Silent s
High Res Shot
Off

Live ND Shooting
Set

Back

3

Highlight a bracketing type using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• The camera will display bracketing options for theselected bracketing type.

Bracketing

100%

AE BKT

3f 1.0EVWB BKTA-- G--FL BKT--

ISO BKT--

ART BKT--

Focus BKT
Back

-Set

EN 149

4

Using the FGHI buttons, select [On] or a bracketing program.
• AE BKT
Highlight the number of shots (for example, 2f) andpress the I button to view bracketing amounts. Use theFG buttons to highlight an amount and press Q to
select the highlighted option and return to the previous
display.

Bracketing

100%

AE BKT

Off3f 1.0EV

WB BKT

2f 0.3EV
A-- G--FL BKT

2f 0.7EV--

ISO BKT2f 1.0EV--

ART BKT

3f 0.3EV--

Focus BKT

3f 0.7EV--

3f 1.0EV
Back• WB BKTYou will be prompted to choose a color axis (A–B or
G–M). Use the HI buttons to highlight an axis and theFG buttons to choose the bracketing amount. Press
the Q to return to the previous display when settings
are complete.

4Set
WB BKT

100%

A-B

G-M

3f 4Step

3f 4Step

Menu functions (Shooting menu)

Back• ART BKT
Highlight [On] and press the I button to display a menu
of picture modes and art filters. Use the FG buttons
to highlight the desired filters and press the Q button
to select (selected filters are indicated by check marks).
Press the MENU button to return to the previous
display when settings are complete.
• Focus BKT
Highlight [On] and press the I button to view focus
bracketing settings. Use the FG buttons to highlighta setting and press the I button to display options.
Use the FG buttons to highlight an option and press
the Q button to return to the setting menu. Press the
Q button again to return to the bracketing menu whensettings are complete. The [Focus BKT] menu is also
used for [Focus Stacking] settings (P. 149).

5
6

Set
ART BKT100%

Pop Art 1
Pop Art 2
Soft Focus
Pale&Light Color 1
Pale&Light Color 2Light Tone
Grainy Film 1
Back

H
Focus BKT

100%

Off

Focus Stacking
Set number of shots

8
5

Set focus differential#Charge Time

0sec

Back

Set

With [On] selected, press the Q button to save changes and exit.
Confirm that [On] is selected for [Bracketing] andpress the Q button.
• To save changes without enabling bracketing, press the
MENU button or highlight [Off] and press the Q button.

Shooting Menu 2

100%
1

Bracketing

22

HDR

Off
On

Off
Off

Multiple Exposure

Off

Keystone Comp.

Off

Anti-Shock r/Silent s
High Res Shot
Off

Live ND Shooting
Back

7

150 EN

Take pictures.
• A t icon is displayed when bracketing is active.

Set• Bracketing cannot be combined with HDR, interval-timer photography, keystonecompensation, multiple-exposure photography, High Res Shot, fisheye compensation, or
the live ND filer.
• Bracketing is not available if there is not enough space on the camera’s memory card forthe selected number of frames.
• AE, FL, and focus bracketing are not available in mode B.

%• [BKT] can be assigned to a camera control, which can then be used to enable or disable
bracketing, choose the bracketing type, or adjust bracketing settings. g “Assigning
functions to buttons (Button Function)” (P. 116)4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
EN 151

Taking HDR (High Dynamic Range) images(HDR)

The camera varies exposure over a series of shots, selects from each tone range
with the highest level of detail, and combines them to create a single picture with awide dynamic range. If the photo features a high-contrast subject, details that would
otherwise be lost in shadows or highlights will be preserved.
• This option is available in P, A, S, and M modes.

1
2

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Highlight [HDR] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press I
on the arrow pad.

Shooting Menu 2

100%
1

Bracketing

Off

22

HDR

Off

Multiple Exposure

Off

Keystone Comp.

Off

4

Anti-Shock r/Silent s
High Res Shot
Off

Menu functions (Shooting menu)

Live ND Shooting
Set

Back

3

Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the Q button.

HDR

100%

HDR1

• X Shooting Menu 2 will be displayed.

Takes 4 pictures at onceat different exposures andcomposites automatically intoa high contrast image.
Set

Back

HDR1

HDR2
3f 2.0EV
5f 2.0EV
7f 2.0EV
3f 3.0EV
5f 3.0EV

4

Each time you take a photo, the camera will take a series of shots while varying
exposure and combine them into a single picture. Choose [HDR1] for naturallooking results, [HDR2] for a more painterly effect.
• [K ISO] is fixed at ISO 200.
• Shutter speeds can be as slow as 4 s. Shooting will continue for up to 15 s.
• Picture mode is fixed at [Natural] and color space at [sRGB].
• The combined picture is saved in JPEG format. If [RAW] is selected for image
quality, it will instead be recorded in RAW + JPEG format.
Each time you take a photo, the camera will vary
exposure over a series of shots. The shots are not
combined to create a single picture. The shots canhowever be combined using HDR software on acomputer or other device.

3f 2.0EV
Number ofshots

Exposure
range

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
• The camera will return to the shooting display. An c
icon will be displayed.
• The drive mode will be fixed at T (sequential high).

c icon100%

HDR

S-IS AUTO

ISO
200

T
YF
4K

30p

P

152 EN

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023

5

Take pictures.
• Each time you press the shutter button, the camera will take the selected number ofshots.
• In [HDR1] and [HDR2] modes, the camera will automatically combine the shots into asingle picture.
• Exposure compensation is available in modes P, A, and S.
• In mode M, the camera takes the values selected for aperture and shutter speed as abase for HDR photography.

%• [HDR] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to enable it.
g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)” (P. 116)4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)• Use a tripod or take similar measures to fix the camera in place.
• The image displayed in the monitor or viewfinder during shooting differs from the final
HDR picture.
• Noise may appear in the final picture when a slower shutter speed is selected in [HDR1]
or [HDR2] mode.
• The following cannot be used:flash photography, bracketing, multiple exposure, interval-timer photography, keystonecompensation, the live ND filer, fisheye correction, and High Res Shot.

EN 153

Recording multiple exposures in a single image(Multiple Exposure)Take two shots and combine them into a single picture. Alternatively, you can take ashot and combine it with an existing picture stored on the memory card.
The combined image is recorded at current image quality settings. Only RAW pictures
can be selected for multiple exposures that include an existing image.
If you record a multiple exposure with RAW selected for [KK], you can then selectit for subsequent multiple exposures using [Overlay], allowing you to create multiple
exposures combining three or more photographs.
• This option is available in P, A, S, M, and B modes.

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)

1
2

Select [Multiple Exposure] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press the Q button.
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.

Number of Frames

Off

Auto Gain

Off

Overlay

Off

Back

3

4

Set

Number of
Frames[Off]: Do not create additional multiple exposures.
[2f]: Create a multiple exposure from 2 pictures.

Auto Gain[On]: Halve the brightness of each picture in the multiple exposure.
[Off]: Do not adjust brightness the brightness of the pictures in themultiple exposure.

Overlay[On]: Shoot a multiple exposure that includes an existing RAW image
stored on the memory card.
[Off]: Create a multiple exposure from the next 2 pictures taken.
• [Overlay] is only available when [2f] is selected for [Number ofFrames].

If [On] is selected for [Overlay], you will beprompted to choose a picture for the multiple
exposure.
• Highlight a picture using the arrow pad (FGHI) andpress the Q button.
• Only RAW images can be selected.

Overlay

100%

RAW

RAW

RAW

RAW

RAW

RAW

RAW

Back

Press the Q button in the multiple exposure menu to save the selected
settings.
• The shooting menu will be displayed.

154 EN

Multiple Exposure

100%

Set

5

Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• A a icon will be displayed.
• If [Overlay] is selected, the chosen photograph will bevisible superimposed on the view through the lens.

a icon
100%

ISO-A
200

P

6

1:02:03

1023

Take pictures.
• The first shot (or if [Overlay] is selected, the previously-chosen photograph) will bevisible superimposed on the view through the lens as you compose the next shot.
• The a icon turns green.
• Normally, a multiple exposure will be created after the second shot is taken.
• Pressing the  button allows you to retake the first shot.
• If [On] is selected for [Overlay], you can take additional pictures that will be overlaid
on the previously-chosen photograph.

Press the MENU button or press the q button to end multiple exposure
photography.
• If you end multiple exposure photography by pressing the MENU button, [Off] will beselected for [Number of Frames] in the multiple exposure menu.
• The a icon clears from the display when multiple exposure photography ends.

• The camera will not enter sleep mode during multiple exposure photography.
• Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be used for multiple exposures.
• RAW pictures taken using High Res Shot cannot be used for multiple exposures.
• The RAW pictures listed in the image-selection display when [On] is selected for [Overlay]
are those processed using the settings in effect at the time the photograph was taken.
• Exit multiple exposure mode before adjusting shooting settings. Some settings cannot be
adjusted while multiple exposure mode is in effect.
• Performing any of the following operations after the first shot is taken ends multiple
exposure photography:
turning the camera off, pressing the q or MENU button, choosing a different shooting
mode, or connecting cables of any type. Multiple exposure is also canceled when thebattery is exhausted.
• The image-selection display for [Overlay] shows the JPEG copies of photographs takenwith RAW + JPEG selected for image quality.
• Live composite photography ([LIVE COMP]) is not available in mode B.
• The following are not available in multiple exposure mode:
HDR, bracketing, interval-timer photography, keystone compensation, the live ND filer,
fisheye correction, and High Res Shot.
• Pictures taken with RAW selected for [KK] can also be overlaid during playback.

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)

7

250 F5.6 0.0

EN 155

Keystone correction and perspective control(Keystone Comp.)

Keystone distortion due to the influence of lens focal length and proximity to the subject
can be corrected, or enhanced to exaggerate the effects of perspective. Keystonecompensation can be previewed in the monitor during shooting. The corrected image iscreated from a smaller crop, slightly increasing the effective zoom ratio.
• This option is available in P, A, S, M, and B modes.

4

1
2
3

Select [Keystone Comp.] in X Shooting Menu 2, and press the Q button.
Highlight [On], and press the Q button.
Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• The camera will switch to the keystone compensation
display. A slider and z icon be displayed.

Keystone compensation
100%

Menu functions (Shooting menu)P

4

250 F5.6

Frame the shot and adjust keystone compensation while viewing your subject
in the display.
• Rotate the front dial to make horizontal adjustments and the rear dial to make verticaladjustments.
• Frame the shot and adjust keystone compensation while viewing your subject in thedisplay.
• Use the arrow pad (FGHI) to position the crop. The direction in which the crop
can be moved is shown by an arrow ( ).
• To cancel changes, press and hold the Q button.

5

To adjust aperture, shutter speed, and other shooting settings, press the
INFO button.
• Standard shooting indicators will be displayed.
• A z icon is displayed while keystone compensation is enabled. The icon is displayedin green if adjustments have been made to keystone compensation settings.
• To return to the keystone compensation display shown in Step 4, press the INFO
button repeatedly.

6

Take pictures.

• Pictures may seem “grainy” depending on the amount of compensation performed. The
amount of compensation also determines the amount the picture will be enlarged whencropped and whether the crop can be moved.
• Depending on the amount of compensation, you may be unable to reposition the crop.
• Depending on the amount of compensation performed, the selected AF target may not be
visible in the display. If the AF target is outside the frame, its direction is indicated by a g,h, i, or j icon in the display.

156 EN• Pictures taken with [RAW] for image quality are recorded in RAW + JPEG format.
• The following cannot be used:
live composite photography, burst photography, bracketing, HDR, multiple exposure,the live ND filer, fish-eye correction, the digital teleconverter, movie recording, [C-AF],[C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], and [C-AF+TRb] AF modes, [e-Portrait] and art filter picturemodes, the custom self-timer, and High Res Shot.
• Lens converters may not produced the desired results.
• Be sure to provide [K Image Stabilizer] data for lenses that are not part of the Four
Thirds or Micro Four Thirds family (P. 97).
• Where applicable, keystone compensation will be performed using the focal length
supplied for [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 97) or [Lens Info Settings] (P. 239).

%

Setting anti-shock/silent shooting(Anti-Shock r/Silent s)

By setting anti-shock (P. 80)/silent shooting (P. 81), you can select anti-shock orsilent shooting when using sequential shooting/self-timer (P. 78).

1

Select [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press the Q
button.

2

Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.

Anti-Shock r

Choose the delay between the shutter button being pressed all theway down and the shutter being released in anti-shock mode. Use
this mode to suppress small vibrations caused by the operationof the shutter. Anti-shock mode is available in both sequential
shooting and self-timer modes (P. 78). Select [Off] to disable antishock mode when it is not in use.

Silent s

Choose the delay between the shutter button being pressed all
the way down and the shutter being released in silent mode. Use
this option in settings in which the sound of the shutter would
be unwelcome. Silent mode supports both the self-timer andsequential shooting (P. 78). Select [Off] to disable silent mode
when it is not in use.

Noise Reduction s

Select [Auto] to reduce image “noise” in long exposures duringsilent photography. The sound of the shutter may be audible whennoise reduction is active.

Silent s Mode
Settings

Choose whether to enable [8], [AF Illuminator], or [Flash Mode] insilent mode.
Select [Allow] to use current settings for the selected item, [NotAllow] to ignore current settings and disable the selected item.

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)• [Keystone Comp.] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to
enable keystone compensation. g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)”(P. 116)

EN 157

Setting high resolution shooting(High Res Shot)

By specifying the setting for [High Res Shot] (P. 83), high resolution shooting canbe activated by selecting h from options for sequential shooting/self-timer mode
(P. 78).

1
2

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
158 EN

Select [High Res Shot] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press the Q button.
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.

High Res Shot

Choose how long the camera waits to begin shooting after the
shutter button is pressed all the way down. Use this option toprevent blur caused by the camera moving when the shutter button
is pressed. Select [Off] to disable High Res Shot.

#Charge Time

Choose how the long the camera waits for the flash to charge forHigh Res Shots taken with the flash. You need not specify a value
when using an external flash.

Shooting Method[Tripod]: Take photos with the camera on a tripod or otherwise
secured. RAW pictures are recorded at a size of 80 megapixels(10368×7776).
• The flash sync speed is 1/50 s.
• The maximum value for [K ISO] is 1600.
[Handheld]: Take hand-held shots. The camera takes slightly
longer to record pictures. RAW pictures are recorded at a size of
50 megapixels (8160×6120).
• The flash is disabled.
• The maximum value for [K ISO] is 6400.

• Electronic shutter is used for high resolution shooting.

Slowing the Shutter in Bright Light(Live ND Shooting)

The camera makes a series of exposures and combines to create a single photo thatappears to have been taken at a slow shutter speed.
• This option is available in modes S and M.
• Changing exposure compensation or shutter speed resets the [LV Simulation] display.

1

Highlight [Live ND Shooting] in X Shooting Menu 2
and press the Q button.

Shooting Menu 2

100%
1

Bracketing

Off

22

HDR

Off

Multiple Exposure

Off

Keystone Comp.

Off

Anti-Shock r/Silent s
High Res Shot
Off

Live ND Shooting
Set

Back

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
I button.

1

Bracketing

Off

22

HDR

Off

Multiple Exposure

Off

Keystone Comp.

Off

Anti-Shock r/Silent s
High Res Shot

Off

Live ND ShootingOn

Use FG to select the item and press I.

Live ND Shooting

100%• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.

ND Number

1EV

LV Simulation

Off

Back

4

Off
Set

Back

3

Set

ND Number

Choose an ND filter type; the camera will convert it to an exposure
value and reduce exposure by that amount. Options are available inincrements of 1 EV:[ND2 (1EV)], [ND4 (2EV)], [ND8 (3EV)], [ND16 (4EV)], [ND32 (5EV)]

LV Simulation

Choose whether to preview the effect of the selected filter at thecurrent shutter speed.
[On]: The effects of shutter speed are shown in the display.
[Off]: Use the standard shooting display.

To take pictures using the live ND filter, highlight[On] and press the Q button, or select [Off] toproceed without enabling the live ND filter.
• X Shooting Menu 2 will be displayed.

4

Shooting Menu 2

100%

Menu functions (Shooting menu)

2

Shooting Menu 2

100%
1

Bracketing

Off

22

HDR

Off

Multiple Exposure

Off

Keystone Comp.

Off

Anti-Shock r/Silent s
High Res Shot

Off

Live ND Shooting

On

Back

Off
Set

EN 159

5

Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• If you selected [On] for [Live ND Shooting], live ND filter photography will now start.
Live ND shooting• An icon appears in the display when the live ND filter isenabled.
• To end live ND filter photography, select [Off] in the [LiveS-IS AUTO
ND Shooting] display shown in Step 2.
100%

ND8
LV

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

S

4

6

Adjust shutter speed while previewing the results inthe display.

100%

30 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

ND8
LV

S-IS AUTO

Menu functions (Shooting menu)• Adjust shutter speed using the rear dial.
• The slowest shutter speed available varies with the ND
YF
filter selected.
S[ND2 (1EV)]: 1/30 s
30 F5.6 0.0
1023[ND4 (2EV)]: 1/15 s
Shutter speed[ND8 (3EV)]: 1/8 s[ND16 (4EV)]: 1/4 s[ND32 (5EV)]: 1/2 s• If [On] is selected for [LV Simulation], the effects of changes to shutter speed can bepreviewed in the display.
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

1:02:03

7

Take pictures.
• The camera requires a length of time equivalent to the selected shutter speed to
produce [LV Simulation] results similar to the final image.

• The upper limit for [K ISO] during live ND photography is ISO 800. This also applies
when [AUTO] is selected for [K ISO].
• Enabling the live ND filter sets the drive mode to ♥o.
• The following cannot be used:
HDR, High Res Shot, multiple exposure, keystone compensation, bracketing, intervaltimer photography, K flicker scan, flickerless photography, and fisheye correction.
• Unlike physical ND filters, the live ND filter does not reduce the amount of light reaching
the image sensor, and consequently very bright subjects may be overexposed.

%• [Live ND Shooting] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button
to toggle [Live ND Shooting] [On] or [Off]. g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button
Function)” (P. 116)
• To adjust live ND filter settings, hold the button to which [Live ND Shooting] is assigned
and rotate the front or rear dial.

160 ENUsing the Video Menu
Movie recording functions are set in the Video Menu.

Video Menu

123min1nMode Settings

2

nSpecification Settings
nAF/IS Settings
nButton/Dial/LevernDisplay Settings
On

Movie RnHDMI Output
Back

Optionn Mode Settings

Description

Set

g
—

n ModeChoose a movie record mode.

165

n Flicker Scan

Select [On] to reduce flicker caused by LED lighting.
Rotate the front or rear dial or use FG on the arrow
pad to choose the shutter speed at which flicker
reduction applies.

166

Adjust image quality for movies.

—

nK

Choose the image quality size and bit rate.

167

b ISO-Auto Set[Upper Limit / Default]: Choose the maximum andstandard ISO sensitivity values available to auto ISO
sensitivity control when [AUTO] is selected for [n ISO]in [n Mode] (movie exposure mode) [M].

n Specification
Settings[b ISO-Auto]: [AUTO] is available for [n ISO] when[M] is selected for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode).
Auto ISO sensitivity control settings can be adjusted
using [Upper Limit / Default].

75

n Noise Filter

Select a noise reduction level for recording highsensitivity movies.

—

n WB

Choose a white balance mode for movie recording.

94n All xFine-tune white balance across the board.
[All Set]: Fine-tune white balance for all modes.
[All Reset]: Reset fine-tuning for all modes to default
values.

4
Menu functions (Video menu)

Adjust settings for movie recording.

96nW Keep Warm
Color

Choose [On] to preserve warm colors in movies shot
under incandescent lighting when [AUTO] is selected forwhite balance.

94,
96

n Picture Mode

Choose [On] to enable selection of a picture mode
specifically for use when recording movies.

106

EN 161

Optionn AF/IS Settings

Description
Choose focus and image stabilization settings for use
when recording movies.

—n AF Mode

Choose the AF mode for movie recording.

n C-AF Speed

Choose how quickly the camera responds to changes
to the distance to subject when [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] is
selected for focus mode.

—n C-AF Sensitivity

Choose how rapidly the camera responds to changes
in the distance to the subject while focusing with [C-AF]
or [C-AF+TR] selected for [n AF Mode]. This can help
autofocus track a quickly-moving subject or prevent thecamera refocusing when an object passes between thesubject and the camera.
• Choose from three levels of tracking sensitivity.
• Select +1 for increased sensitivity. Choose this option
for subjects that are moving toward or away fromthe camera or changing speed unpredictably or for
subjects that suddenly enter the frame.
• Select −1 for reduced sensitivity. Choose this option
to prevent the camera refocusing when the subject
is briefly obscured by other objects or to prevent thecamera focusing on the background when you areunable to keep the AF target positioned over a quicklymoving subject.

—n Image Stabilizer

Adjust image stabilization settings for movie recording.

97n IS Level

Choose the amount of image stabilization applied.

464, 91

Menu functions (Video menu)[+1]: Choose for static hand-held shots.
[±0]: Recommended in most situations.
[−1]: Choose for hand-held panning, tilting, or tracking
shots.

162 ENg—DescriptiongChoose the roles played by camera buttons, dials, andlevers in movie mode.

—n Button Function

Choose the roles played by camera buttons in movie
mode.

116

n Dial Function

Choose the roles played by front and rear dials in movie
mode.

168

n Fn Lever
Function

Choose the functions that can be selected using theFn lever in movie mode. The Fn lever switches to thefunction set with [n Dial Function] when set to [mode1].
To choose the function selected using the Fn lever,highlight [mode2], press I, and choose from AF mode,
AF target mode, and AF target selection. This setting
has no effect when [mode3] is selected for [K Fn Lever
Function] (P. 185) or when [Power 1] or [Power 2] isselected for [Fn Lever/Power Lever] (P. 185).

—

Choose the role played by shutter button in movie mode.
When set to [w], pressing the shutter button initiates
autofocus. Still image photography is not available.
When set to [R REC], movie recording can be started
or stopped by pressing the shutter button all the way
down. The R button cannot be used for starting or
stopping movie recording with this setting.

—Choose the zoom speed for power zoom lenses. Thiscan be used for slow zooms on your subject and othereffects. Choose from [Low], [Normal], and [High].

—n Shutter Functionn Elec. Zoom
Speed

4
Menu functions (Video menu)

Optionn Button/Dial/Lever

EN 163

Optionn Display Settingsg—Choose whether live controls (P. 225) and the live
super control panel (P. 88) are displayed in movie
mode. For setting not to display, select the item andpress the Q button to clear the check mark.

—n Info Settings

Choose the information displayed during recording inmovie mode. For setting not to display, select the itemand press the Q button to clear the check mark.

—Time Code Settings

Choose how time codes are recorded in movie mode.
Set [Time Code Mode] to [Drop Frame] to record timecodes corrected for errors with respect to recording time,
and to [Non-DF] (no drop frame) to record uncorrected
time codes.
Set [Count Up] to [Rec Run] to run time codes during
recording only, and to [Free Run] to run time codes evenwhile recording is stopped, including when the camera
is turned off.
In [Starting Time], set a starting time for the time code.
Set [Current Time] to set the time code for the current
frame to 00. To set to 00:00:00:00, select [Reset]. You
can also set time codes using [Manual Input].

—n Control Settings

4
Menu functions (Video menu)
164 EN

Description
Adjust display settings for movie mode.

8 Display Pattern Choose whether the battery level is displayed as apercentage (“%”) or as minutes remaining (“min”) inmovie mode and during movie recording.
a View Assist—

The display can be adjusted for ease of viewing when amovie-only picture mode option ([k Flat] or [l OMLog400]) is selected. Select [On] to adjust the display
hues for ease of viewing.

—

Movie R

Audio will not be recorded in a movie when set to [Off].

169

n HDMI Output

Adjust output settings for movies recorded with thecamera connected with an external device via HDMI.

—

Output Mode

Choose the video output mode. When set to [Monitor
Mode], image and camera information are output. The
camera information is not displayed on the camera
screen.
When set to [Record Mode], only image is output. The
camera information is displayed on the camera screen.

—

REC BitIf set to [On], the REC trigger is sent from the camera to
the connected external device.

—

Time CodeIf set to [On], the time code is sent from the camera to
the connected external device.
• The recording by the external device that uses thetime code as the REC trigger may be stopped in thefollowing cases.
- When recording an ART movie, etc., under heavy
processing load
- When switching the display between the monitor
and viewfinder—Choosing an Exposure Mode(n Mode (Movie Exposure Modes))You can create movies that take advantage of the effects available in P, A, S, and M
modes. This option takes effect when the mode dial is rotated to n.

1
2
3

Select [n Mode Settings] in n Video Menu and press the Q button.
Select [n Mode] (movie exposure modes) and press I.
Use FG to select an option and press the Q button.
Optimal aperture is set automatically according to the brightness of the subject.
Use the front dial or rear dial to adjust exposure compensation.

A

Depiction of background is changed by setting the aperture.
Use the front dial to adjust exposure compensation and rear dial to adjust aperture.

S

Shutter speed affects how the subject appears. Use the front dial to adjust exposurecompensation and rear dial to adjust shutter speed.
Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/24 s and 1/32000 s.

M

Freely adjust both aperture and shutter speed.
Use the front dial to select aperture value and the rear dial to select shutter speed.
• Choose from shutter speeds of 1/24–1/32000 s. Values of ISO 200–6400 are
available using the [n ISO] manual sensitivity control options.
• The display shows the difference between the exposure produced by the selected
aperture and shutter speed and the optimal exposure metered by the camera. The
display will flash if the difference exceeds ±3 EV.
• The option chosen for [n Specification Settings] > [b ISO-Auto Set] (P. 161)
takes effect.

• Blurred frames caused by such factors as the subject moving while the shutter is open
can be reduced by selecting the fastest available shutter speed.
• The low end of the shutter speed changes according to the frame rate of the movie recordmode.
• Excessive camera shake may not be compensated enough.
• When the inside of the camera becomes hot, shooting is automatically stopped to protect
the camera.

4
Menu functions (Video menu)P

EN 165Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting(n Flicker Scan)

Banding may occur in movies filmed under LED lighting. Use [n Flicker Scan] to
optimize shutter speed while viewing banding in the display.
This option is in [n Mode] (movie exposure modes) [S] and [M].
• The range of available shutter speeds is reduced.

4

1
2
3
4
5

Select [S] or [M] for [n Mode] (movie exposure modes; P. 165).
Highlight [n Mode Settings] in the video menu and press the Q button.
Highlight [n Flicker Scan] and press I.
Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the Q button.

Menu functions (Video menu)

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

123min• A P icon is displayed when flicker scan isenabled.
n

250.0

P

P icon6

Choose a shutter speed while viewing the display.

7

Begin filming when settings are complete.

123min• Choose a shutter speed using the front or rear dial or
the FG buttons. If desired, the shutter speed can beselected by keeping FG pressed.
• You can also rotate the front dial to adjust shutter speed
in the exposure increments selected for [EV Step] in
n
128.6
P
G Custom Menu T.
Shutter speed• Continue adjusting shutter speed until banding is nolonger visible in the display.
• Press the INFO button; the display will change and the P icon will no longer
be displayed. You can adjust aperture and exposure compensation. Do so using thefront or rear dial or the arrow pad.
• Press the INFO button repeatedly to return to the flicker scan display.

• Focus peaking, the LV super control panel, and live controls are not available in the flicker
scan display. To view these items, first press the INFO button to exit the flicker scandisplay.

%• [n Flicker Scan] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to
enable flicker scan. g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)” (P. 116)

166 ENFrame Size, Rate, and Compression(nK)

You can set combinations of movie image size and bit rate. The settings can beselected from options of movie record mode (P. 101).

1
2
3

Select [n Specification Settings] in n Video Menu and press the Q button.
Select [nK] and press I.
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.
Sets the image size to [C4K] (Custom only), [4K], [FHD] (Full HD), or[HD].

Bit rate

Sets the bit rate to [A-I] (All-Intra), [SF] (Super Fine), [F] (Fine), or [N](Normal).
• When [4K] or [C4K] is set for the image size, you cannot select the
bit rate.

Frame rate

Sets the frame rate to [60p], [50p], [30p], [25p], or [24p].
• [60p] and [50p] are not available in the following situations.
- When [FHD] (Full HD) is set for the image size and [A-I] (All Intra)
is set for the bit rate.
- When [C4K] or [4K] is set for the image size.
• If the image size is set to [C4K], the frame rate is locked to 24p.
• When shooting movies that will be viewed on a television, choose aframe rate that matches the video standard used in the device, as
otherwise the movie may not play back smoothly. Video standards
vary by country or region: some use NTSC, others PAL.
- When shooting for display on NTSC devices, choose 60p (30p)- When shooting for display on PAL devices, choose 50p (25p)

Slow or Fast
MotionSets slow or fast motion.
Available settings differ depending on the set frame rate.
• Slow and fast motions cannot be used in some image quality modes.

4
Menu functions (Video menu)

Image size

EN 167

Assigning Roles to the Front and Rear Dials(n Dial Function)

Choose the roles played by the front and rear dials in n (movie) mode. You canreverse the roles of the dials or reassign them for ease of use or as required byshooting conditions. If [mode1] is selected for [n Fn Lever Function], the roles playedby the dials will vary with the position of the Fn lever. Different assignments can bemade for each [n Mode] (movie exposure mode).
The roles assigned to the dials using this item take effect in n (movie) mode. In P,
A, S, M, and B (still photography) modes, the dials perform the roles selected in the
G custom menu.
Exposure mode4
Menu functions (Video menu)
168 EN

Function

P

A

S

M

Shutter

Choose the shutter speed.

—

—





FNo.

Adjust aperture.

—



—



F

Adjust exposure compensation.









ISO

Adjust ISO sensitivity.

—

—

—



WB

Adjust white balance.









CWB KelvinChoose a color temperature when CWB(custom) is selected for white balance.









RVOL

Adjust the recording level.









PVOL

Adjust headphone volume.









Off

None.









Role

1

Highlight [n Button/Dial/Lever] in the n video menu and press I on thearrow pad.

2
3Highlight [n Dial Function] using the FG buttons and press the I button.
Highlight the desired mode and press the I button.
• Choose a dial using the HI buttons and use the FG buttons to choose a role.
• Press the INFO button to move between lever positions.
• Press the Q button when settings are complete.

Sound Recording Options(Movie R)

Adjust settings for recording sound during filming. You can also access settings for use
when an external microphone or recorder is connected.

123

Select [Movie R] in n Video Menu and press the Q button.
Select [On] and press I.
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.

R Volume Limiter

Choose the maximum volume at which the camera will record
sound. Use this option to automatically reduce the level of sounds
above a certain volume.

Wind Noise
Reduction

Reduce wind noise during audio recording.

Recording Rate

Choose an audio recording format.
[96kHz/24bit]: High-quality audio.
[48kHz/16bit]: Standard-quality audio.

R Plug-in Power

Adjust settings for use with condenser microphones and otherdevices that draw power from the camera.
[Off]: For devices that do not require power from the camera(general-purpose dynamic microphones).
[On]: For devices that require power from the camera (condenser
microphones).

Headphone Volume

Adjust the volume of audio output to the headphones.

4
Menu functions (Video menu)

Recording Volume

Adjust microphone sensitivity. Choose separate values for thebuilt-in stereo microphone and external microphones.
[Built-In R]: Adjust the sensitivity of the camera’s built-in stereo
microphone.
[MIC R]: Adjust the sensitivity of external microphones connectedto the microphone jack.

• Operation sounds of the lens and camera may be recorded in a movie. To prevent it fromrecording, reduce the operation sounds by setting [n AF Mode] (P. 64) to [S-AF], [MF],or [PreMF], or by minimizing the button operations of the camera.
• Sound is not recorded:with high-speed or slow- or fast-motion movies or when k (diorama) is selected for
picture mode.
• When [Movie R] is set to [Off], O is displayed.
• Audio can only be played on devices that support the option selected for [RecordingRate].

EN 169

Using the Playback Menu
Playback Menu
R (P. 170)
Edit (P. 170)
Print Order (P. 134)
Reset Protect (P. 175)
Reset share Order (P. 175)
Copy All (P. 175)
TWi-Fi Connect (P. 247)

4

Playback Menu

100%
1

R

2

Edit

On

Print Order
Reset Protect
Reset share Order
Copy All
TWi-Fi Connect
Back

Set

Menu functions (Playback menu)

Automatically Rotating Portrait-Orientation Pictures for Playback(R)
If set to [On], images in portrait orientation are automatically rotated to be displayed in
the correct orientation on the playback display.

Retouching Pictures(Edit)Create retouched copies of pictures. In the case of RAW pictures, you can adjust thesettings in effect at the time the picture was taken, such as white balance and picturemode (art filters included). With JPEG pictures, you can make simple edits such as
cropping and resizing.
The images to be edited can be chosen from those on the card currently selected forplayback. g “Setting the card to record to (Card Slot Settings)” (P. 237)

1
2
3

Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.

4

Select [RAW Data Edit] or [JPEG Edit] and press the Q button.

Use FG to select [Sel. Image] and press the Q button.
Use HI to select the image to be edited and press the Q button.
• [RAW Data Edit] is displayed if a RAW image is selected, and [JPEG Edit] if a JPEG
image is selected. For images recorded in RAW+JPEG format, both [RAW Data Edit]and [JPEG Edit] are displayed. Select the desired option from them.

Creates a JPEG copy of a RAW image according to the selected settings.

Current
RAW Data
Edit

Custom1
Custom2
ART BKT

170 EN

Retouch pictures and save the resulting copies in JPEG
format. Adjust the camera settings before choosing thisoption. Some settings such as exposure compensation are
not applied.
Press R and adjust settings while previewing the resultsin the display. The settings are saved as [Custom1] or[Custom2].
The camera creates multiple JPEG copies of each image,
one for each art filter selected. Select one or more filters
and apply them to one or more images.

The [JPEG Edit] menu contains the following options.

JPEG Edit

Shadow Adj.

Brighten back-lit subjects.

Redeye Fix

Reduce “red-eye” in pictures taken with a flash.

P

Crop pictures. Size the crop with the front or rear dialand position it with the arrow pad.

AspectChange the aspect ratio from the standard 4:3 to [3:2],[16:9], [1:1], or [3:4]. After choosing an aspect ratio, use
the arrow pad to position the crop.

Black & WhiteCreate a black-and-white copy of the current picture.

Sepia

Create a sepia copy of the current picture.

Saturation

Adjust the vividness of colors. The results can bepreviewed in the display.

Q

Create a resized copy 1280 × 960, 640 × 480, or 320 ×
240 pixels in size. Pictures with an aspect ratio otherthan the standard 4:3 are resized to dimensions as close
as possible to the selected option.

e-Portrait

Smooth complexions. The desired effect may not be
achieved if no faces are detected.

4

5Press the Q button when settings are complete.

6

Press the Q button again.

• The selected settings will be applied.
100%

RAW Data Edit

• Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the Q
button to save the retouched copy.

Menu functions (Playback menu)• Red-eye reduction may not produce the desired results with some pictures.
• Retouch is not available:with pictures that were taken with another camera or edited on a computer or if thespace available on the memory card is insufficient.

Yes
No
Back

Set

• To create additional copies from the same original RAW image, highlight [Reset] andpress the Q button. To exit without creating more copies, highlight [No] and press the Q
button.
• Selecting [Reset] displays the retouch menu. Repeat the process from Step 4.
• You can also edit selected pictures during playback.
Display a picture you want to retouch
Press the Q button to view
q button
options[RAW Data Edit] or [JPEG Edit]• Red-eye correction may not work depending on the image.
• The image cannot be resized (Q) to the larger size than the original size.
• [P] (trimming) and [Aspect] can only be used to edit images with an aspect ratio of 4:3(standard).
• When [ART] is selected for picture mode, [Color Space] (P. 114) will be locked at [sRGB].

EN 171

Combining Pictures(Image Overlay)

Overlay existing RAW photos and to create a new picture. Up to 3 pictures can be
included in the overlay.
The results can be modified by adjusting brightness (gain) separately for each picture.
• The overlay is saved in the format currently selected for image quality. Overlays createdwith [RAW] selected for image quality are saved in RAW format and in JPEG format using
the image quality option selected for [K2] (P. 194).
• Overlays saved in RAW format can in turn be combined with other RAW images to create
overlays containing 4 or more pictures.

4
Menu functions (Playback menu)
172 EN1
2
3
4

Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.
Use FG to select [Image Overlay] and press the Q button.
Select the number of images to be overlaid and press the Q button.
Use FGHI to select the RAW images to beoverlaid.
• Selected pictures are marked with a v. To deselect,press the Q button again.
• The overlaid image will be displayed if images of thenumber specified in step 3 are selected.

5

Adjust the gain for each image to be overlaid.

6

Press the Q button to display the confirmation
dialog.

Image Overlay

100%

RAW

RAW

RAW

RAW

RAW

RAW

RAW

Set

Back
100%

Image Overlay• Use HI to select an image and FG to adjust gain.
• Gain can be adjusted in the range 0.1 – 2.0. Check theresults in the monitor.

• Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

×0.3
Back

×1.5

×0.5
Set

Creating Movie Stills(In-Movie Image Capture)

Save a still copy of a selected frame.
• This option is available only with [4K] movies recorded with the camera.

1
2
3
4
5
6

Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.
Use FG to select [Sel. Image] and press the Q button.
Use HI to select a movie and press the Q button.
Select [Movie Edit] and press the Q button.
Use FG to select [In-Movie Image Capture] and press the Q button.
Use HI to select a frame to be saved as a still image and press the Q
button.

Menu functions (Playback menu)• The camera will save a still copy of the selected frame.
• Use the F button to go back 2 seconds and the G button to skip ahead 2 seconds.

4

EN 173

Trimming movies(Movie Trimming)

Cut selected footage from movies. Movies can be trimmed repeatedly to create files
containing only footage you want to preserve.
• This option is available only with movies recorded with the camera.

4
Menu functions (Playback menu)
174 EN1
2
3
4
5

Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.

6

Highlight the desired option and press the Q button.

7

Trim the movie.

8Highlight [Yes] and press the Q button.

Use FG to select [Sel. Image] and press the Q button.
Use HI to select a movie and press the Q button.
Select [Movie Edit] and press the Q button.
Use FG to select [Movie Trimming] and press the Q button.
• You will be prompted to choose how you want to save the edited movie.
[New File]: Save the trimmed movie in a new file.
[Overwrite]: Overwrite the existing movie.
[No]: Exit without trimming the movie.
• If the image is protected, you cannot select [Overwrite].
• You will be presented with an edit display.
• Use the F button to skip to the first frame and the G button to skip to the last frame.
• Using the front or rear dial, highlight the first frame of the footage you want to delete
and press the Q button.
• Using the front or rear dial, highlight the last frame of the footage you want to delete
and press the Q button.
• The edited movie will be saved.
• To select different footage, highlight [No] and press the Q button.
• If you selected [Overwrite], you will be prompted to choose whether to trim additional
footage from the movie. To trim additional footage, highlight [Continue] and press the
Q button.

Removing Protection from All Pictures(Reset Protect)Protections of multiple images can be canceled at a time.

1

Select [Reset Protect] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.

2

Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

• When there are cards in both slots 1 and 2, card slot selection appears. Select a card
slot and press the Q button.

Cancelling a share order(Reset share Order)

Cancel share orders that are set on images.

1

Select [Reset share Order] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q
button.

2

Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

Copying All Pictures(Copy All)

All images can be copied between the cards inserted in the camera (card slot 1 and 2).

1
2

Select [Copy All] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.
Select an option and press the Q button.

7

All images are copied from the card in card slot 1 to the card in card slot 2.

8All images are copied from the card in card slot 2 to the card in card slot 1.

3

Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

Menu functions (Playback menu)• When there are cards in both slots 1 and 2, card slot selection appears. Select a card
slot and press the Q button.

4• Copying ends when the destination card is full.

EN 175

Using the setup menu
Adjust basic camera settings. Examples include language
selection and monitor brightness. The setup menu also
contains options used during the initial setup process.

Setup Menu

100%
1

Card Setup

2

X Settings
W

Englishs

j±0 k±0
Off

Rec View
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
Firmware
Back

Option4

g

Description

Menu functions (Setup menu)

Card Setup

Format the card and delete all images.

177

X Settings(Date/time setting)Set the camera clock.

33

W (Changing thedisplay language)

Choose a language for camera menus and guides.

35

You can adjust thes (Monitor
brightness adjustment) brightness and color
temperature of themonitor. Color temperatureadjustment is only
applied to the monitor
display during playback.
Use HI to highlight j(color temperature) or k
(brightness) and FG toadjust the value.

100%

s
j
-2

Vivid
Back

k
+1

NaturalSet—

Press the INFO button to switch the saturation of themonitor between [Natural] and [Vivid] settings.
Rec View

176 EN

Set

Choose whether pictures are automatically displayedin the monitor after they are taken and if so, for how
long. This is useful for a brief check of the picture you
have taken. You can shoot the next shot by pressing the
shutter button halfway even while the captured image isdisplayed on the monitor.
[0.3sec] – [20sec]: Choose how long (in seconds) pictures
are displayed in the monitor after shooting.
[Off]: The captured image is not displayed on the monitor.
[Auto q]: After shooting, the camera displays the latest
picture and then enters playback mode. This is useful forerasing a picture after checking it.

—

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Settings

Adjust settings for connection to Wi-Fi/Bluetooth®compatible smartphones using the camera’s wirelessfunction.

178

FirmwareView the firmware versions of the camera and connected
accessories. Check the versions when you inquire about
the camera or accessories or when you download thesoftware.

—Formatting the card

(Card Setup)

Cards must be formatted with this camera before first use or after being used withother cameras or computers.
All data stored on the card, including protected images, is erased when the card isformatted.
When formatting a used card, confirm there are no images that you still want to keepon the card. g “Usable cards” (P. 284)

1

Select [Card Setup] in the e Setup Menu and press
the Q button.

2

Card Setup

All Erase

4

FormatBack

Set

Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
• Formatting is performed.

Deleting all images(Card Setup)

All images on a card can be deleted at a time. Protected images are not deleted.

1

Select [Card Setup] in the e Setup Menu and press
the Q button.

100%• When there are cards in both slots 1 and 2, card slot
selection appears. Select a card slot and press the Q
button.

2
3

Select [All Erase] and press the Q button.

Card Setup

All Erase
FormatBack

Set

Menu functions (Setup menu)• When there are cards in both slots 1 and 2, card slot
selection appears. Select a card slot and press the Q
button.
• If there is data on the card, menu items appear. Select[Format] and press the Q button.

100%

Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
• All images are deleted.

EN 177

Wireless LAN Options(Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings)

Adjust settings for connection to wireless networks. Take pictures and view picturesusing a computer, or leave the camera off and view pictures on your smartphone whileon the road. For information on establishing a connection and using these features,see “Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi” (P. 245) and “Connecting to Computers
via Wi-Fi” (P. 256).
Availability

4
Menu functions (Setup menu)
178 EN

Disable Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®. Disable Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®,for example in settings in which their use is prohibited, withoutchanging network settings (P. 255).

Connection Password Change the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth® password.
Power-off Standby

Choose whether the camera will connect to smartphones while
off.

RAW+JPEG h

In the case of pictures recorded with [RAW+JPEG] for image
quality, you can choose to share only the JPEG copies, only the
RAW copies, or both the JPEG and RAW copies (P. 133).

Reset Settings

Restore defaults for [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings].

Wi-Fi MAC Address

Display the camera MAC address, which is sometimes needed
when adjusting wireless network settings.

Using “My Menu”
You can use “My Menu” to create a personalized menu tab containing only items you
select. “My Menu” can contain up to 5 pages of 7 items each. You can delete items orchange the page or item order.
At purchase, “My Menu” contains no items.

1
2

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Highlight an item for inclusion in “My Menu”.
• Items that can be added to “My Menu” are indicated bya P icon at the top right corner of the display.

Item can be added to“My Menu”
Shooting Menu 1

100%
11
2

4

Reset / Custom Modes
Picture Mode
KK

YF
4:3

Digital Tele-converter
j/Y

o

Off
Off

Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
Set

Back

3

Press the R (movie) button.

R (movie) button• You will prompted to choose a page. Use FG on thearrow pad to choose the “My Menu” page to which theitem will be added.

Select My Menu to add.

100%
11
2

Menu functions (My menu)

Image Aspect

Reset / Custom Modes
Picture Mode
KK

f1

Image Aspect

f3

4:3

Digital Tele-converter
j/Y

f4

Off

f2

YF

o

f5

Off

Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
CancelSet

EN 179

4

Press the Q button to add the item to the selected
page.

100%
11
2

• The camera will display a message stating that the item
has been added to “My Menu”.

• Items that have been added to “My Menu” are indicatedby a yellow P.
• The next available page will be displayed once theseventh item is added to the current page.
• Items marked with a P can be removed from “MyMenu” by pressing the R button. A confirmation dialog
will be displayed; to proceed, highlight [Yes] and press
the Q button.
• Items saved to “My Menu” are added to the P (“MyMenu”) tab.

4

Reset / Custom Modes
Picture Mode
KK
Added to My Menu.
Image Aspecto

Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse

Off

Shooting Menu 1

100%
11
2

YF
4:3
Off

Digital Tele-converter
j/Y

Reset / Custom Modes
Picture Mode
KK

YF

Image Aspect

4:3

Digital Tele-converter
j/Y

Off
o
Off

Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
Set

Back

Menu functions (My menu)

My Menu 1

100%
1

f1 KK

2

f2

YF

f3
f4
f5

Back

Set

P (“My Menu”) tab

5

To access "My Menu", select the P (“My Menu”) tab.

 Managing “My Menu”
You can reorder items in “My Menu”, move them between pages, or remove them from“My Menu” altogether.

1
2

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Display the “My Menu” page you want to edit andpress the R (movie) button.

R (movie) button• The options below will be displayed.
[Rearrange Order]: Change the order of items or pages.
Use the arrow pad (FGHI) to choose the newlocation.
[Remove this item]: Remove the highlighted item from“My Menu”. Highlight [Yes] and press the Q button.
[Remove this P tab]: Remove from “My Menu” allitems on the current page. Highlight [Yes] and press the
Q button.

180 ENMy Menu 1

100%
1
2

f1 KK

YF

f2 Half Way Rls
Rearrange
On
With IS Order
f3 Frame RateRemove this item
Normalf4
USB Mode Remove this f tab Auto
f5

Color Space

Back

sRGB

Set

Using the custom menus
Camera settings can be customized using the G Custom Menu.

1
2

A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2

KAF Mode

S-AF

KAF+MF

Off

KAEL/AFL

S3/C4/M3/F3

AF Scanner
KC-AF Sensitivity

mode2

±0

KC-AF Center Start
KC-AF Center Priority

Back

Set

MENU

J AF/MF
OptionCustom Menu

100%

G

Description

Jg

K AF Mode

Choose the AF mode for still image shooting.

64, 91

K AF+MF

You can rotate the lens focus ring to adjust focus manually
after focusing with autofocus.

200

K AEL/AFL

Choose how the camera sets focus and exposure when the
shutter button or AEL/AFL button is pressed.

201

AF Scanner

Choose the type of AF scan* performed in autofocus mode
when the camera is unable to focus or the scene lacks
contrast.
* Scans whole range from minimum range to infinity forfocus point when the camera cannot focus on the subject
or the contrast is not clear.
• The selected option takes effect when [C-AF], [C-AF+TR],[C-AFb], or [C-AF+TRb] is chosen for [K AF Mode](P. 64).
• This item is for still photography.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

Custom Menu
J/K/L/I AF/MF (P. 181)
Button/Dial/Lever (P. 185)
J/K
N/O
Release/j/Image Stabilizer (P. 186)
P/Q/R/S Disp/8/PC (P. 187)
T/U/V
Exp/ISO/BULB/p (P. 191)
W
#Custom (P. 193)
X
K/WB/Color (P. 194)
Record/Erase (P. 195)
Y/Z
EVF (P. 196)ab/c
K Utility (P. 198)—

[mode1]: AF Scanner is not activated.
[mode2]: An AF scan is performed only once at the start of
the focus operation.
[mode3]: AF Scanner is activated.
K C-AF
Sensitivity

Choose how rapidly the camera responds to changes inthe distance to the subject while focusing with [C-AF],[C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], or [C-AF+TRb] selected for[K AF Mode]. This can help autofocus track a quicklymoving subject or prevent the camera refocusing when an
object passes between the subject and the camera.

203

EN 181

OptionDescriptiong

K C-AF Center
Start

When used in combination with an AF-target mode otherthan single target, [C-AF], [C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], and[C-AF+TRb] focus on the center of the selected grouponly during the initial scan. During later scans, the camera
will focus using the surrounding targets. Combining thisoption with an AF-target mode that covers a wide area
makes it easier to focus on erratically-moving subjects.

204

When focusing using group- or custom-target AF in [C-AF]
and [C-AFb] modes, the camera always assigns priority
to the center target in the selected group for a repeatedseries of focus operations. Only if the camera is unable tofocus using the center focus target will it focus using thesurrounding targets in the selected focus group. This helps
you track subjects that are moving quickly but relatively
predictably. C-AF center priority is recommended in mostsituations.

205

K C-AF Center
Priority

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

MENU

K AF/MF

GK

Descriptiong

KNModeSettings

Choose the target modes displayed during AF-target mode
selection. Hiding unused modes speeds target-mode
selection. To hide an item, highlight it and press the Q
button to remove the check (v).

69, 71

AF Area Pointer

In autofocus mode, the position of the subject on which thecamera has focused is shown by a green focus target. This
item controls the display of the focus target.

Option[Off]: The focus target is not displayed.
[On1]: The focus target is displayed only briefly after thecamera focuses.
[On2]: After the camera focuses,
the focus target will be displayed
while the shutter button ispressed halfway.
• To enable cluster AF targeting
when q (all targets) is
selected and [S-AF], [S-AFb],[C-AF], or [C-AFb] is chosen for [K AF Mode](P. 64) or [C-AF] is selected for [n AF Mode], select[On2] for [AF Area Pointer]. The camera will display AF
targets for all areas that are in focus.
100%

N Set Home

182 EN

Choose the home position AF mode, AF target selectionmode, and AF target mode. Press the Q button to selectthe desired options in the [N Set Home] display.

—

206

DescriptiongChoose the roles played by the front and rear dials or arrow
pad during AF target selection.

207

N Loop Settings

Choose whether AF-target selection “wraps around” theedges of the display. You can also choose whether you
have the option of selecting q (all targets) before AFtarget selection “wraps around” to the opposite border of thedisplay.
• Wrap is disabled in movie mode and when [FAF] or[FAFb] is selected for [K AF Mode].

208

t Target Mode
Settings

Choose the number of AF targets available and how far the
AF target moves during AF-target selection.

209

K Orientation
Linked N

The camera can be configured to change the AF-target
position and AF-target mode automatically when it detectsthat it has been rotated between landscape (wide) or portrait(tall) orientations.

210

MENU

L AF/MF

G

L

OptionDescriptiong

AF Targeting Pad

If [On] is selected, the AF target can be positioned bytapping the monitor during viewfinder photography. Tap themonitor and slide your finger to position the AF target.
• When set to [On], drag operation can be disabled or
enabled by double-tapping the monitor.
• [AF Targeting Pad] can also be used with zoom frame AF(P. 73).

—

AF Limiter

Limits the AF area when turned [On].

211

AF Illuminator

Select [Off] to disable the AF illuminator. To use the AF
illuminator during silent photography, you will need tochange the option selected for [Silent s Mode Settings](P. 157).

—

I Face Priority

You can select the face priority or eye priority AF mode.

92

AF Focus Adj.

Focal location adjustment for phase-difference AF can befine tuned within a range of ±20 steps.
• Normally there is no need to fine-tune autofocus using thisitem. Fine-tuning focus may prevent the camera focusing
normally.

212

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

OptionN Select Screen
Settings

EN 183

I AF/MF
OptionStarry Sky AF
Setting

MENU

GDescription[Accuracy]: Prioritize focus accuracy over speed. Use a
tripod.

I
g64[Speed]: Prioritize focus speed over accuracy.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)
184 EN

Preset MF
distance

Choose the Preset MF focus position. Numerical value andunit (m, ft) can be set. The distance is approximate and notexact.

—MF Assist

You can automatically switch to zoom or peaking in manual
focus mode by rotating the focus ring.

215

MF Clutch

Disable the manual focus clutch. This can prevent autofocus
being disabled by the clutch engaging accidentally.
[Operative]: The camera responds to the position of the lensfocus ring.
[Inoperative]: The camera focuses according to the option
selected for [AF Mode], regardless of the position of thelens focus ring. Manual focus is not available even when thefocus ring is in the manual focus position.

286

Focus Ring

You can customize how the lens adjusts to the focal point byselecting the rotational direction of the focus ring.

—

Bulb/Time
Focusing

You can change the focus position during exposure by using
manual focus (MF). When set to [Off], rotation of the focus
ring is disabled.

216

Reset Lens

When set to [Off], the focus position of the lens is not reseteven when the power is turned off. When set to [On], thefocus of power zoom lenses is also reset.
• Regardless of the option selected, the focus position
will be reset when the camera is turned off if [PreMF](P. 64) is selected for [AF Mode].

—J Button/Dial/Lever
Option

MENU

G

J
g

Description
Other roles can be assigned to buttons in place of their
existing functions.

116

S Center Button

Choose the operation performed by pressing the multiselector.

217

T Direction Key

Choose the operation performed by tilting the multi selector.

217

K Dial Function

You can change the function of the front dial and rear dial.

218

Dial Direction

Choose the direction in which the dial is rotated to adjust
shutter speed or aperture. Change the program shift
direction in which the dial is rotated.

—

K Fn Lever
Function

Choose the function performed by the Fn lever.

219

Fn Lever/Power
Lever

Use the Fn lever as a power switch.
[Fn]: Follows settings for the Fn lever function.
[Power 1]: The power turns on when the Fn lever is in
position 1, and off when in position 2.

—[Power 2]: The power turns on when the Fn lever is in
position 2, and off when in position 1.
When [Power 1] or [Power 2] is set, the ON/OFF lever(power lever), [K Fn Lever Function] and [n Fn Lever
Function] are disabled.
MENU

K Button/Dial/Lever

GK

Descriptiong

K Elec. Zoom
Speed

Choose the speed at which power zoom lenses zoom in orout when the zoom ring is rotated. Adjust zoom speed if it isso quick that you find it hard to frame your subject. Choose
from [Low], [Normal], and [High].

—qR Function

Choose the role played by the R button during playback.

Option[h]: Create or modify a “share order” by marking pictures
for upload to a smartphone.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

K ButtonFunction—[H]: Select multiple pictures.
9 LockIf [On] is selected, FGHI and Q button operations for
PBH (Power Battery Holder) are disabled.

—v LockSelect [On] to disable the v button.

16

EN 185

N Release/j/Image Stabilizer
S-AF Release
Priority
C-AF Release
Priority
jL Settings

4

jH Settings

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Flicker Reduction

MENU

G

N

Descriptiong

If [On] is selected, the shutter can be released even when
the camera is not in focus. This option can be set separately
for S-AF and C-AF modes (P. 64).
• Regardless of the option selected, [S-AF Release Priority]
is used when [FAF] is selected for AF mode.
• This item is for still photography.

—

Choose frame advance rates and shot limits for [j],[♦j], and [♥j] modes. You can also adjust Pro Capture
settings, including the frame advance rate, number offrames buffered, and the shot limit. Figures for sequential
shooting speed are the approximate maximums.
• This item is for still photography.

220

OptionReduce flicker in photos taken under fluorescent or otherartificial lighting.
• This item is for still photography.
[Anti-Flicker LV]: Reduce flicker during live view undersome kinds of lighting, including fluorescent lamps. If [Auto]does not have the desired effect, select [50 Hz] or [60 Hz]
according to the frequency of the local power supply.

222[Anti-Flicker Shooting]: The camera automatically detects
the flicker frequency and times the shutter releaseaccordingly.
MENU

O Release/j/Image Stabilizer
OptionK Image
Stabilizer
j Image
Stabilizer

G

Description
Adjust image stabilization settings for still photography.

Og97

Choose whether the camera prioritizes frame rate or image
stabilization during burst photography.
• [j Image Stabilizer] is fixed at [Fps Priority] in q (Pro
Capture Low) and p (Pro Capture High) modes.
[Fps Priority]: Shooting speed gets priority over image
stabilization. The sensor will not be reset to the center
during sequential shooting.

—[IS Priority]: Image stabilization gets priority over shooting
speed. The sensor will be reset to the center per frame ofsequential shooting. The shooting speed will drop slightly.

186 EN

Half Way Rls
With IS

When set to [Off], the IS (Image Stabilization) function while
the shutter button is pressed halfway will not be activated.

—

Lens I.S. Priority

Select [On] to give priority to lens on-board image
stabilization when shooting with third-party lenses. [S-IS1]
will be used when [S-IS AUTO] is selected for [K Image
Stabilizer] (P. 97).
• This option has no effect on lenses that are equipped with
an image stabilization switch.

—P Disp/8/PC
OptionK Control
Settings

G/Info Settings

MENU

G

P

Descriptiong

Use this option to hide live controls (P. 225) or the LV
super control panel (P. 90) for each shooting mode sothat they cannot be displayed via the INFO button. To hidean item, highlight it and press the Q button to remove thecheck mark.

224

Choose the information displayed when the INFO button
is pressed.
[q Info]: Choose the information displayed in full frame
playback.

[LV-Info]: Choose the information displayed when thecamera is in shooting mode.

4
226,
228

[LV OFF-Info]: Choose a shooting display.
[G Settings]: Choose the information displayed in index
and calendar playback.
Picture Mode
Settings

Choose the picture modes (P. 106) available for selection.
To hide an item, highlight it and press the Q button toremove the check mark.

—j/Y Settings

Choose the sequential shooting/self-timer modes (P. 78)
available for selection. To hide an item, highlight it and press
the Q button to remove the check mark.

—Choose the multi function options (P. 124) available forselection. To hide an item, highlight it and press the Q
button to remove the check mark.

—Multi Function
Settings

Menu functions (Custom menus)[qa Info]: Choose the information displayed in magnified
playback.

EN 187

Q Disp/8/PC

MENU

OptionDescription

Live View Boost

Adjust brightness for ease of viewing when lighting is poor.
Settings can be adjusted separately for mode M, bulb
photography, live composite photography, and the like.

G

Qg[Off]: Preview exposure in live view. Exposure can bepreviewed before shooting.
• This option does not apply during bulb or time
photography.
[On1]: Exposure preview disabled; brightness is adjusted forease of viewing. The brightness of the preview differs fromthe final photograph.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)[On2]: As for [On1] but brighter. Choose when framing shotsof the night sky or the like.
• The brightness of the preview differs from the final
photograph. Subject motion may also appear slightly jerky.
• Press I on the arrow pad and choose from the following:- [Quality Priority]: Prioritize display quality.
- [Frame Rate Priority]: Prioritize display speed.
Art LV Mode

[mode1]: The filter effect is always displayed.
[mode2]: Priority is given to smooth display while the shutter
button is pressed halfway. The quality of art filter effectpreviews may be affected.

Frame Rate—

[LV Close Up Mode]: When set to [mode1], pressing the
button halfway in the magnified live view returns to themagnified frame display. When set to [mode2], pressing the
button halfway in the magnified live view switches to theZoom AF display.
[Live View Boost]: If [On] is selected, the camera will adjust
display brightness for ease of viewing during focus zoom.
When set to [Off], the magnified area is displayed with thebrightness of live view before magnification. This is useful tocheck the focus when shooting in backlit locations.
• This item is available when [Off] is selected for [Live View
Boost] in G Custom Menu Q.

qa Default
Setting—[Normal]: The normal display rate. Select this option in mostcircumstances.
[High]: Smooths motion even when the subject is moving
quickly. Fast-moving subjects are easier to track. [Normal]
will be selected automatically if the camera’s internal
temperature rises during shooting.

LV Close Up
Settings

188 EN—

Choose the starting zoom ratio for playback zoom (close-up
playback).

—

229

Optionz Settingsg

Description[z Lock]: Select [On] to maintain the aperture at the
selected value even when releasing the button.
[Live View Boost]: If [On] is selected, the camera will adjust
display brightness for ease of viewing during depth-of-field
preview (P. 117).
• This item is available when [Off] is selected for [Live View
Boost] in G Custom Menu Q.
MENU

R Disp/8/PC
OptionDescription

Grid Settings

Adjust settings for the framing grid.

—

G

R
g

[Displayed Grid]: Select the type of guides displayed.
Choose from:[w], [x], [1], [y], [X], and [x]• When [x] is selected, the guides are adjusted for a 16:9
movie frame when movies are shot in still photography
mode. Depending on the option selected for [nK], theguides may be displayed with an aspect ratio of 17:9.

—[Apply Settings to EVF]: Choose whether the option
selected for [Displayed Grid] is reflected in the viewfinder
display. The option selected for [EVF Grid Settings] in
G Custom Menu a (P. 197) has no effect.
Peaking Settings

Highlight objects using color outlines. This makes objects
that are in focus easier to see during manual focus and thelike.

Menu functions (Custom menus)[Display Color]: Adjust guide color and transparency. The
camera can store up to two combinations of settings.

4[Peaking Color]: Choose the focus peaking color.
[Highlight Intensity]: Choose the focus peaking level.

—[Image Brightness Adj.]: Adjust background brightness tomake focus peaking easier to see.
• When [On] is selected for [Image Brightness Adj.], thelive view display may be brighter or darker than the final
photograph.
Histogram
Settings[Highlight]: Choose the lower bound for the highlight display.

Mode Guide

Select [On] to display a help for the selected mode whenthe mode dial is rotated to a new setting.

41

Selfie Assist

If [On] is selected, the camera will display a mirror image ofthe view through the lens when the monitor is in the selfie
position.

229[Shadow]: Choose the upper bound for the shadow display.

226

EN 189

S Disp/8/PC

MENU

G

S

OptionDescriptiong

8 (Beep sound)[On]: A beep sounds after successful autofocus operations.
The beep sounds only when the camera first focuses using[C-AF].

—[Off]: A beep does not sound after successful autofocus
operations.
HDMI[HDMI Control]: Select [On] to allow the camera to be
operated using remotes for TVs that support HDMI control.
This option takes effect when pictures are displayed ona TV. When [On] is selected, the camera can be used forplayback only.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)
190 EN[Output Size]: Selecting the digital video signal format forconnecting to a TV via an HDMI cable.

230[Output Frame Rate]: Select the output frame rate from [50pPriority] or [60p Priority] for using the camera connected toa TV with an HDMI cable.
USB Mode

Choose how the camera functions when connected toexternal devices via USB.

231,
275,
277,
278

T Exp/ISO/BULB/p

MENU

G

T

DescriptiongChoose the size of the increments used when adjusting
shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, and otherexposure-related settings.

—

ISO Step

Choose the size of the increments used when adjusting ISO
sensitivity.

—

K ISO-Auto Set

Adjust [AUTO] ISO sensitivity settings for still photography.

OptionEV Step

4—[Lowest S/S Setting]: Choose the shutter speed at which thecamera starts raising ISO sensitivity automatically in modes
P and A. Choose [Auto] to let the camera choose a shutter
speed automatically.
K ISO-AutoChoose the shooting modes in which [AUTO] ISO sensitivity
takes effect.
[P/A/S]: [K ISO] > [AUTO] takes effect only in modes
P, A, and S. If [AUTO] is in effect when mode M or B isselected, [K ISO] will be set to ISO 200.

—

[All]: [K ISO] > [AUTO] takes effect only in modes P, A,
S, and M. If you select mode B after choosing [AUTO],[K ISO] will be set to ISO 200.
K Noise Filter

Choose the amount of noise reduction performed at highISO sensitivities.

K Low ISO
Processing

Choose the type of processing applied to photographs
taken at low ISO sensitivities.
[Drive Priority]: Image processing is adapted so as not tocurtail the number of pictures that can be taken in a single
burst.

Menu functions (Custom menus)[Upper Limit/Default]: Choose the maximum and default ISO
sensitivity used when [AUTO] is selected for ISO. Select[Upper Limit] to choose the maximum sensitivity, [Default] tochoose the default sensitivity. The maximum is 6400.
The maximum ISO sensitivity automatically changes:• to ISO 800 when the live ND filter is enabled,• to ISO 1600 when [Shooting Method] > [Tripod] isselected for High Res Shot, and• to ISO 1600 when [Dramatic Tone] or [Watercolor] isselected for picture mode.

——[Detail Priority]: Image processing prioritizes image quality.

EN 191

OptionNoise Reduct.

g

Description
This function reduces the noise that is generated during
long exposures.
• The time required for noise reduction is shown in thedisplay.
• [Off] is selected automatically during sequential shooting.
• This function may not work effectively with some shooting
conditions or subjects.

—[Auto]: Noise reduction is performed at slow shutter speeds,
or when the internal temperature of the camera has risen.
[On]: Noise reduction is performed with every shot.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)
192 EN[Off]: Noise reduction off.
MENU

U Exp/ISO/BULB/p
OptionG

Description

Ug

Bulb/Time Timer

Choose the maximum exposure for bulb and time
photography.

52

Live Composite
Timer

Choose the maximum exposure time for composite
photography.

54

Bulb/Time Monitor Choose the brightness of the monitor when shooting in B
(bulb) mode.

—

Live Bulb

232

Live Time

Choose the display interval during shooting. The number of
update times is limited. Choose [Off] to disable the display.

Composite
Settings

Set an exposure time to be the reference in composite
photography.

233

K Flicker Scan

Reduce flicker under LED lighting.

234

232

V Exp/ISO/BULB/p
Option

MENU

G

V
g

Description

Metering

Choose a metering mode according to the scene.

AEL Metering

Choose the metering method used to meter exposure when
exposure is locked using the AEL/AFL button. This allows
you to use one metering method when exposure is lockedby pressing the shutter button halfway and another when
exposure is locked by pressing the AEL/AFL button.
• This item is for still photography.

77—[Auto]: Exposure is metered using the method selected for[Metering] (P. 77).
N Spot Metering—

Adjust correct exposure separately for each metering mode.

235

MENU

W #Custom

G

W

Descriptiong#X-Sync.

Choose the fastest shutter speed available when a flash is
used.

236

#Slow Limit

Choose the slowest shutter speed available when a flash
is used.

236

x+F

When set to [On], the exposure compensation value isadded to the flash compensation value.

68, 105#+WB

Adjust white balance for use with a flash.

Option[Off]: The camera uses the value currently selected for whitebalance.

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Exposure Shift4

Choose whether the [Spot], [Spot Hilight], and [SpotShadow] spot metering options meter the selected AF
target.
• [I Face Priority] is automatically set to [Face Priority Off].
• The selected option takes effect when M (single target)or o (small target) is selected as the AF-target mode
(P. 69).
• The camera zooms in on the selected AF target during
focus zoom (P. 73).
• This item is for still photography.

—[W]: The camera uses auto white balance ([Auto]).
[n]: The camera uses flash white balance ([n]).
#RC Mode

Wireless remote-control flash units can be used with the
flash unit for wireless remote-control flash photography.

288

EN 193

X K/WB/Color
Option
K Set

MENU

K Set

100%

1

Y SF

2) Press the Q button.

Y

2

3

4

F

Y N

X N

Pixel Count

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Image size

Set

Compression
rate

Choose the pixel count for [X]- and [W]-size images.
1) Select [Xiddle] or [Wmall]and press I.

Pixel Count

100%

Xiddle3200×2400

Wmall

1280×960

2) Choose a pixel count andpress the Q button.
Back

Shading Comp.

100,
142,
236

Yarge

Back

Pixel CountXg

You can select the JPEG image quality mode fromcombinations of three image sizes and three compression
rates.
1) Use HI to select a
combination ([K1] –[K4]) and use FG tochange.

4

G

Description

100,
142,
236,
316

Set

Choose [On] to correct peripheral illumination according to
the type of lens.
• Compensation is not available for teleconverters or
extension tubes.
• Noise may be visible at the edges of photographs taken athigh ISO sensitivities.

—

K WB

Choose a white balance mode for still photography. You canalso fine-tune the white balance for each mode.

94

K All xFine-tune white balance across the board.
• This item is for still photography.
[All Set]: Fine-tune white balance for all modes.

96[All Reset]: Reset fine-tuning for all modes to default values.
KW Keep Warm Select [On] to preserve “warm” colors in pictures taken with
[AUTO] white balance under incandescent lighting.
Color• This item is for still photography.
Color Space

194 ENYou can select a format to ensure that colors are correctly
reproduced when shot images are regenerated on a monitor
or using a printer.

94, 96114

Y Record/Erase
OptionMENU

G

Card Slot Settings

Choose the card used to record photographs or movies.

File Name[Auto]: Even when a new card is inserted, the file numbers
are retained from the previous card. File numberingcontinues from the last number used or from the highest
number available on the card.
[Reset]: When you insert a new card, the folder numbers
starts at 100 and the file name starts at 0001. If a card
containing images is inserted, the file numbers start at the
number following the highest file number on the card.

Edit FilenameYgDescription

237

—

4

sRGB: Pmdd0000.jpg
AdobeRGB: _mdd0000.jpg

Pmdd
mdd

—

• Select [Off] to use the default prefixes.
dpi Settings

Choose the print resolution.

Copyright
Settings*

Add the names of the photographer and copyright holder to
new photographs. Names can be up to 63 characters long.

—[Copyright Info.]: Select [On] to include the names of thephotographer and copyright holder in the Exif data for new
photographs.
[Artist Name]: Enter the name of the photographer.
[Copyright Name]: Enter the name of the copyright holder.
1) Select characters from 1 and press the Q button.
The selected characters appear in 2.
2) Repeat Step 1 to complete the name, then highlight[END] and press the Q button.
• To delete a character, press the INFO button toplace the cursor in the name area 2, highlightthe character, and press .
Copyright Name

100%

2
1

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Choose how image files are named by editing the portion of
the filename highlighted below in gray.

—

05/63

ABCDE
! ” # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . /0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
I J K L M N O
P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ END@ A B C D E F G HCancelDelete Set* OLYMPUS does not accept liability for damages arisingfrom disputes involving the use of [Copyright Settings].
Use at your own risk.
Lens Info Settings

Save lens info for up to 10 lenses that do not automaticallysupply info to the camera.

239

EN 195

Z Record/Erase
OptionMENU

G

Quick Erase

If [On] is selected, pressing the  button in the playback
display will immediately delete the current image.

RAW+JPEG Erase

Choose the operation performed when pictures recorded atsettings of RAW+JPEG are deleted using [Erase].
• Both the RAW and JPEG copies are deleted whenselected images are deleted or when [All Erase] (P. 177)
is selected.

—[JPEG]: Only the JPEG copy is erased.

4

Zg

Description

100,
132,
142

[RAW]: Only the RAW copy is erased.
[RAW+JPEG]: Both copies are erased.

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Priority Set

MENU

a EVF
OptionEVF Auto Switch

Description

G

—
a
g

[Off]: The viewfinder display does not light automaticallywhen you put your eye to the viewfinder. Press the u
button to switch between the viewfinder and monitor
displays.
[On1]: The viewfinder display lights automatically when
you put your eye to the viewfinder. Pressing the u button
displays [EVF Auto Switch] options.

38[On2]: Putting your eye to the viewfinder turns the
viewfinder display on only if the monitor is closed. Pressing
the u button displays [EVF Auto Switch] options.
EVF Adjust

196 EN

Choose the default selection ([Yes] or [No]) for confirmation
dialogs.

Adjust viewfinder brightness and hue.
Brightness is automatically adjusted when [EVF Auto
Luminance] is set to [On]. The contrast of the information
display is also adjusted automatically.

—

EVF Style

Choose the viewfinder display style.

240

V Info Settings

Choose the information that can be viewed by pressing the
INFO button in the viewfinder display. It takes effect when
[Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for [EVF Style].

241

OptionDescriptiong

EVF Grid Settings

Choose the type and color of framing grid displayed in the
viewfinder when [Off] is selected for [Grid Settings] > [Apply
Settings to EVF] in G Custom Menu R and [Style 1] or[Style 2] is selected for [EVF Style]. Choose the framing gridfrom [w], [x], [1], [y], [X] or [x].
• When [x] is selected, the guides are adjusted for a 16:9
movie frame when movies are shot in still photography
mode. Depending on the option selected for [nK], theguides may be displayed with an aspect ratio of 17:9.

—

V Half Way Level

Choose whether the level gauge can be displayed in the
viewfinder by pressing the shutter button halfway when
[Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for [EVF Style].

4—[Off]: The level gauge is not displayed.
S-OVF

Select [On] to increase the dynamic range of the viewfinder
display, increasing the amount of detail visible in highlights
and shadows in a manner similar to optical viewfinders.
Backlit subjects and the like are easier to see.
is displayed in the viewfinder when [S-OVF] starts.
•• The display is not adjusted for settings such as whitebalance, exposure compensation, and picture mode.

—

Menu functions (Custom menus)[On]: The level gauge is displayed in the viewfinder while
the shutter button is pressed halfway. The level gauge
appears in place of the exposure bar.

EN 197

b K Utility

MENU

G

g

The pixel mapping feature allows the camera to checkand adjust the image pickup device and image processing
functions.

295

Press-and-holdTime

Choose the length of time buttons must pressed to activate
the “button hold” option.

241

Level Adjust

You can calibrate the angle of the level gauge.

Pixel Mapping[Reset]: Reset the gauge to factory default settings.

4—[Adjust]: Choose the current camera angle as the 0 position.

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Touchscreen
Settings

Activate the touch screen. Choose [Off] to disable the touch
screen.

—Menu Recall

Set [Recall] to display the cursor at the last position ofoperation when you display a menu. The cursor position will
be retained even when you turn off the camera.

—

Correct fisheye distortion when shooting with fisheye
lenses.

242

Fisheye
CompensationMENU

c K Utility

Gc

OptionDescriptiongBattery Settings[Battery Priority]: Choose which battery is used first. When
[Body Battery] is selected, the battery in the body takes
priority. When [PBH Battery] is selected, the battery in the
PBH (Power Battery Holder) takes priority.

—[Battery Status]: View the status of the batteries inserted in
the camera.
Backlit LCD

198 ENb

Description

OptionChoose the length of time before the monitor backlight dims
when no operations are performed. Dimming the backlight
reduces the drain on the battery.
• Choose from [Hold], [8sec], [30sec], and [1min]. The
backlight will not dim if [Hold] is selected.

—

OptionSleep

Auto Power Off

Certificationg

32

The camera will turn off automatically if no operations are
performed for a set time after it has entered sleep mode.
This option is used to choose the delay before the camera
turns off automatically.
• Choose from [Off], [5min], [30min], [1h], and [4h].
• The camera will not turn off automatically if [Off] isselected.
• To reactivate the camera after it has turned off
automatically, turn the camera on using the ON/OFF
lever.

32

If [On] is selected, the camera will enter power-saving mode
more quickly when the live view display in the monitor isoff. [Backlit LCD] and [Sleep] can be set to shorter intervals
than normal. q is displayed in the monitor while powersaving is in effect.
• Power saving is not available:
during live view photography, while the viewfinder is on,while multiple exposure or interval timer photography
is in progress, or while connected to an HDMI device,
smartphone, or via Wi-Fi or USB to a computer—

Display certification icons.

—

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

Quick Sleep Mode

Description
Choose the delay before the camera enters sleep mode
when no operations are performed. In sleep mode, camera
operations are suspended and the monitor turns off.
• Choose from [Off], [1min], [3min], and [5min].
• The camera will not enter sleep mode if [Off] is selected.
• Normal operation can be restored by pressing the shutter
button halfway or by using the buttons or multi selector.
• The camera will not enter sleep mode:
while a multiple exposure is in progress or whileconnected to an HDMI device, smartphone, or via Wi-Fi
or USB to a computer

EN 199Combined Auto and Manual Focus
MENU

G

J

(K AF+MF)[K AF+MF]

After focusing using autofocus, you can adjust focus manually by keeping the shutter
button pressed halfway and rotating the focus ring. Switch from auto to manual focus atwill or fine-tune focus manually after focusing with autofocus.
• The procedure varies with the AF mode selected.
• [Off] is selected by default.

On

Enable manual focus adjustment in autofocus mode. b is displayed next to[S-AF], [C-AF], [C-AF+TR], or [FAF].
• When [S-AFb] is selected, you can keep the shutter button pressed halfway
after focusing using single AF and adjust focus manually. Alternatively, you canswitch to manual focus by rotating the focus ring while the camera is focusing.
Focus can also be adjusted manually while the shutter is open and during burst
photography in [Sequential Low] mode.
• When [C-AFb] or [C-AF+TRb] is selected, you can switch to manual focus
by rotating the focus ring while the camera is focusing in continuous AF andcontinuous tracking AF modes. Press the shutter button halfway a second time torefocus using autofocus. Focus can also be adjusted manually while the shutter isopen and during burst photography in [Sequential Low] mode.
• When [FAFb] is selected, you can focus manually after focusing or before
initiating focus using autofocus.

Off

Manual focus adjustment disabled during autofocus.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)
200 EN• Autofocus with manual focus is also available when autofocus is assigned to other camera
controls. g G Custom Menu J > [K AEL/AFL] (P. 201)
• The lens focus ring can be used to interrupt autofocus only when M.ZUIKO PRO (Micro
Four Thirds PRO) lenses are used. For information on other lenses, visit the OLYMPUS
website.
• In B (bulb) mode, manual focus is controlled by the option selected for [Bulb/Time
Focusing].

Setting Focus and Exposure with the AEL/AFL Button(K AEL/AFL)
MENU

G

J

[K AEL/AFL]

Choose how the camera sets focus and exposure when the shutter button or AEL/
AFL button is pressed. The camera normally focuses and locks exposure when the
shutter button is pressed halfway, but this can be changed according to the subject orshooting conditions.
S-AF
C-AF
MF

Choose the focus or metering operation performed using the shutter or
AEL/AFL button (P. 202).
Choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter is pressed halfway.

Half Way AF[Operative]: Pressing the shutter button halfway initiates autofocus
regardless of whether autofocus is currently assigned to the AEL/AFL
button. In [C-AF] mode, the last button pressed is used to maintain focus.
This option has no effect in [MF] or [FAF] mode.
[Inoperative]: Pressing the shutter button halfway will not initiate autofocus if
autofocus is currently assigned to the AEL/AFL button.

Choose whether the AEL/AFL and shutter buttons perform the same ordifferent functions when faces are detected.
Face Priority
If [On] is selected, the camera will focus on faces or eyes when the AEL/AF
AFL button is pressed.
If [Off] is selected, the camera will instead focus on the current AF target.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

FAF

EN 201

The table below shows how this setting interacts with [Half Way AF].
• “1” indicates the operation performed when [Half Way AF] is enabled, “2” the operation
performed when it is disabled.
AEL/AFL button

Shutter button pressed
AEL/AFL mode4
Menu functions (Custom menus)
202 EN

C-AF

MF

FAF *

All the way down

Kept pressed

AF

AE

AF

AE

AF

AE

S-AF

Locks

—

—

—

Locks

mode2

S-AF

—

—

Locks

—

Locks

mode3

1: S-AF
2: —

Locks

—

—

S-AF

—

mode1

C-AF

Locks

Ends

—

—

Locks

mode2

C-AF

—

Ends

Locks

—

Locks

mode3

1: C-AF
2: —

Locks

Ends

—

C-AF

—

mode4

1: C-AF
2: —

—

Ends

Locks

C-AF

—

mode1

—

Locks

—

—

—

Locks

mode2

—

—

—

Locks

—

Locks

mode3

—

Locks

—

—

S-AF

—

mode1

FAF

Locks

—

—

—

Locks

mode2

—

Locks

—

—

FAF

—

—

FAF start/
end

—

mode1
S-AF

Halfway

mode3

—

Locks

—

* The behavior of [FAF] is affected by the option selected for [Starry Sky AF Setting](P. 184).

C-AF Tracking Sensitivity
MENU

G

J

(K C-AF Sensitivity)[K C-AF Sensitivity]

Choose how rapidly the camera responds to changes in the distance to the subject
while focusing with [C-AF], [C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], or [C-AF+TRb] selected for[K AF Mode]. This can help autofocus track a quickly-moving subject or prevent thecamera refocusing when an object passes between the subject and the camera.

1

Highlight [K C-AF Sensitivity] in G Custom Menu
J and press the Q button.

A1. AF/MF

100%
1
2

A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2

KAF Mode
KAEL/AFL

Highlight a setting using the FG buttons andpress the Q button.

2• G Custom Menu J will be displayed.

A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2

Back

3

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

mode2

±0

KC-AF Center Start
KC-AF Center Priority
Set
A1. AF/MF

100%
1

Off
S3/C4/M3/F3

AF Scanner
KC-AF Sensitivity

Back

2

S-AF

KAF+MF

KAF Mode

S-AF

High
Off
+2
S3/C4/M3/F3
+1
0
mode2
AF Scanner±0-1±0KC-AF Sensitivity-2
KC-AF Center Start
Low
KC-AF Center Priority
KAF+MF

KAEL/AFL

Set

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)• Choose from five levels of tracking sensitivity.
• The higher the value, the higher the sensitivity. Choose positive values for subjects thatsuddenly enter the frame, that are moving rapidly away from the camera, or that change
speed or stop suddenly while moving toward or away from the camera.
• The lower the value, the lower the sensitivity. Choose negative values to prevent thecamera refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by other objects or to prevent thecamera focusing on the background when you are unable to keep the subject in the AF
target.

EN 203

C-AF Starting Focus Target
MENU

G

J

(K C-AF Center Start)[K C-AF Center Start]

When used in combination with an AF-target mode other than single target, [C-AF],[C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], and [C-AF+TRb] focus on the center of the selectedgroup only during the initial scan. During later scans, the camera will focus using thesurrounding targets. Combining this option with an AF-target mode that covers a wide
area makes it easier to focus on erratically-moving subjects.

1

Highlight [K C-AF Center Start] in G Custom
Menu J and press the Q button.

1
2

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)
204 EN

A1. AF/MF

100%

A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2

KAF Mode

S-AF

KAF+MF
KAEL/AFLOff
S3/C4/M3/F3

AF Scanner
KC-AF Sensitivity

Using the FG buttons, highlight the AF target
modes to which [K C-AF Center Start] will apply
and then press the Q button.

KC-AF Center Priority
Set
KC-AF Center Start

100%

q
N
r
s

• Selected modes are marked with a check (v). To
deselect, press the Q button again.

u
v
w
Back

3

±0

KC-AF Center Start

Back

2

mode2

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

• This option is not available when [K C-AF Center Priority] (P. 205) is enabled.

H

C-AF Center Target Priority
MENU

G

J

(K C-AF Center Priority)[K C-AF Center Priority]

When focusing using group-target AF in [C-AF] and [C-AFb] modes, the camera
always assigns priority to the center target in the selected group for a repeated seriesof focus operations. Only if the camera is unable to focus using the center focus target
will it focus using the surrounding targets in the selected focus group. This helps
you track subjects that are moving quickly but relatively predictably. Center priority is
recommended in most situations.

1

Highlight [K C-AF Center Priority] in G Custom
Menu J and press the Q button.

A1. AF/MF

100%
1
2

KAF Mode

S-AF

KAF+MF
KAEL/AFLOff
S3/C4/M3/F3

AF Scanner
KC-AF Sensitivity

2

Using the FG buttons, highlight the AF target
modes to which [K C-AF Center Priority] will apply
and then press the Q button.

KC-AF Center Priority

r
s
u
v
w
x
Back

3

Set
KC-AF Center Priority
N• Selected modes are marked with a check (v). To
deselect, press the Q button again.

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

4±0

KC-AF Center Start

Back

100%

mode2

H

Menu functions (Custom menus)

A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2

EN 205

Choosing the AF Home Position
MENU

G

K

(N Set Home)[N Set Home]

Choose the home position for the [N Home] feature. The [N Home] feature lets
you recall a previously-saved “home position” for autofocus at the touch of a button.
This item is used to choose the home position. To access [N Home], assign it to acontrol using [K Button Function] (P. 116). You also have the option of assigning itto the multi selector using [S Center Button] (P. 217). If [K Orientation Linked N](P. 210) is active, the camera will store separate home positions for landscape (wide)and portrait (tall) orientations. p appears in the AF-target selection display when thecurrent home position is selected.

4• This item is for still photography.

Menu functions (Custom menus)

AF ModeChoose the home position autofocus mode. [FAF] and [FAFb]
cannot be assigned home positions.

AF Target Mode

Choose the home position AF target mode. Only options selected for[KNMode Settings] (P. 182) are available.

AF Target Point

Choose the home position focus target.

1

Highlight [N Set Home] in G Custom Menu K
and press the Q button.

A2. AF/MF

100%
1
2

A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2

KNMode Settings
On1

AF Area PointerNSet Home
NSelect Screen Settings
NLoop Settings
tTarget Mode Settings
KOrientation Linked N

Back

2

Highlight a setting you wish to store with the home
position and press the Q button.

100%

Set
NSet HomeAF ModeS-AF

AF Target ModeN

AF Target Point• Selected items are marked with a check (v). Items
marked with a v are included in the home position.
Back

3

Press I on the arrow pad to display options for thehighlighted setting.
• Choose settings for the home position.
• When [K Orientation Linked N] is active, you will
be prompted to select landscape or portrait (camera
rotated left/camera rotated right) orientation before
pressing the I button to display options.

206 EN100%

H
NSet HomeAF ModeS-AF S-AF

AF Target Mode

C-AF

AF Target PointN

MF
C-AF+TR
Preset MF

Back

4

Press the Q button to save changes when settings are complete.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit when settings are complete.

• The camera will return to the “N Set Home” display.

SetAF-Target Selection
MENU

G

K

(N Select Screen Settings)[N Select Screen Settings]

Choose the roles played by the front and rear dials or arrow pad during AF target
selection. The controls used can be selected according to how the camera is used or
personal taste. You can choose up to two combinations.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
• If you select [Set 2], the options in the [N Select Screen Settings] menu will be checked(v). [Set 2] can be recalled by pressing the INFO button in the AF-target selection
display.
Available Controls

Front dial, rear dial, FG on the arrow pad, the HI buttons.
[6Pos]: Position the AF target (P. 72).
[NMode]: Choose the AF target mode (e.g., all, small, or group) (P. 69).
[I]: Adjust settings for face/eye detection AF (P. 92).

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

Available Roles

EN 207

Enabling AF-Target Selection Wrap
MENU

G

K

(N Loop Settings)[N Loop Settings]

You can choose whether AF-target selection “wraps around” the edges of the display.
You can also choose whether you have the option of selecting q (all targets) before
AF-target selection “wraps around” to the opposite border of the display.
[Off]: Wrap disabled. Target selection stays within the borders of thedisplay.
[Loop 1]: If you continue to press themulti selector in the same direction after
reaching the border of the display, thetarget in the same row or column on the
opposite border will be selected.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

N LoopSelection“Loop 1”[Loop 2]: If you continue to press themulti selector in the same direction after
reaching the border of the display, thetarget in the next row or column on the
opposite border will be selected.

“Loop 2”

Via q[No]: Target selection does not pass through q (all targets) before
wrapping around.
[Yes]: If [Loop 1] or [Loop 2] is chosen for [N Loop Selection], target
selection will pass through q (all targets) before wrapping around tothe opposite border.
• Hiding q (all targets) in [KNMode Settings] fixes [Via q] at[No].

• [N Loop Settings] is fixed at [Off] during movie recording and when [FAF] is selected
for focus mode.

208 ENAF Target Size and Positioning
MENU

G

K

(t Target Mode Settings)[t Target Mode Settings]

Choose the number of AF targets available and how far the AF target moves during AFtarget selection. Targets can be larger than group targets or sized for subjects whose
motion can be predicted. You can also increase the distance between available targets
for faster target selection. The camera can store up to four different combinations ofsettings.
• If the AF-target or step size is altered from the default value, checks (v) will appear next
to the custom target options in [KNMode Settings] (P. 182).
• This item is for still photography.
Choose the target size. Target width and height can be set separately. Choose
from options of 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11.

Step

Choose the number of steps the target moves during target selection. The
horizontal and vertical step sizes can be set separately; choose from steps of 1,
2, and 3.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

Size

EN 209

Matching AF-Target Selection to Camera Orientation(K Orientation Linked N)
MENU

4

G

K

[K Orientation Linked N]

The camera can be configured to change the AF-target position and AF-target mode
automatically when it detects that it has been rotated between landscape (wide)or portrait (tall) orientations. Rotating the camera changes the composition andconsequently also the position of the subject in the frame. The camera can store the
AF target mode and AF target position separately according to camera orientation.
When this option is active, [N Set Home] (P. 206) can be used to store separate
home positions for landscape and portrait orientations.

Menu functions (Custom menus)

AF Target Mode

Choose separate AF target modes (e.g., all, small, or group) forlandscape and portrait orientations.

AF Target Point

Choose separate AF targets for landscape and portrait orientations.

1

Highlight [K Orientation Linked N] in G Custom
Menu K and press I on the arrow pad.

A2. AF/MF

100%
1
2

A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2

KNMode Settings
AF Area PointerNSelect Screen Settings
NLoop Settings
tTarget Mode Settings
KOrientation Linked N

Back

2

Highlight a setting you wish saved separately andpress the Q button.

100%

On1

NSet Home

Set
KOrientation Linked N
AF Target Mode
AF Target Point• Selected items are marked with a check (v).

Back

3

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit when settings are complete.

4Choose the AF target mode or target position with the camera first in one
orientation and then the other.

H• Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

• Separate settings are stored for landscape orientation, portrait orientation with thecamera rotated to the right, and portrait orientation with the camera rotated to the left.

210 ENLens Focus Range
MENU

G

L

(AF Limiter)[AF Limiter]

Choose the range in which the camera will focus using autofocus. This is effective insituations in which an obstacle presents itself between the subject and the camera
during the focus operation, causing drastic changes in focus. You can also use it toprevent the camera focusing on foreground objects when shooting through a fence,
window, or the like.
Choose the range of focus distances available. The camera can store
up to three settings for different situations. Distances are approximate
and intended as guides only.

Release Priority

The shutter can still be released if the camera is unable to focus when[On] is selected for [AF Limiter].

%• [AF Limiter] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to limit
focus range. Hold the button and rotate a dial to choose from the three stored settings.
g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)” (P. 116)
• AF Limiter is not available in the following cases.
- When the focus limiter is enabled on the lens- When using focus bracketing- While in the movie mode or recording a movie- When [FAF] or [FAFb] is selected for focus mode4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

Distance settings

EN 211Fine-Tuning Autofocus
MENU

G

L

(AF Focus Adj.)[AF Focus Adj.]

Fine-tune phase-detection autofocus. Focus can be fine-tuned by up to ±20 steps.
• Normally there is no need to fine-tune autofocus using this item. Fine-tuning focus may
prevent the camera focusing normally.
• Focus fine-tuning has no effect in [S-AF] and [S-AFb] modes.
• This item is for still photography.
Off

Fine-tuning disabled.

Default Data

Fine-tune focus for all lenses.

Lens Data

Save fine-tuning values on a lens-by-lens basis. The camera can store
fine-tuning values for up to 20 lenses. Focus for individual lenses canbe fine-tuned in specific areas of the frame. In the case of zoom lenses,
separate values can be stored for long and short focal lengths.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

1

Highlight [AF Focus Adj.] in G Custom Menu L
and press I on the arrow pad.

A3. AF/MF

100%
1
2

A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2

Off

AF Targeting Pad

Off

AF Limiter
AF Illuminator

On

Face Priority

Off

AF Focus Adj.

Off

Back

2

Highlight [Default Data] or [Lens Data] and pressthe I button.

Set
A3. AF/MF

100%
1
2

• If you selected [Default Data], proceed to Step 5.
• To disable fine-tuning, highlight [Off] and press the Q
button.

A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2

AF Targeting Pad

Off

AF Limiter

OffOn

AF Illuminator

Off

Face Priority

Default Data
Lens Data

Back

3

Highlight [Create Lens Data Set] and press the Q
button.

OffOff

AF Focus Adj.

Set
Data List

100%

Create Lens Data Set• You will be prompted to choose the area of the frame forwhich focus will be fine-tuned.
Back

4

Use the FGHI buttons to choose an area of theframe and then press the Q button.

100%

±00
±00
±0
±0

• With zoom lenses, you can press the INFO button tochoose between long (telephoto) and short (wide) focal
lengths.
Back

212 ENSet
50-200 F2.8-3.5
±0
±0
±00
±00

±00
±00
±0
±0

±0
±0
±00
±00

±00
±00
±0
±0

±00
±00

±0
±0

±0
±0
±00
±00

±00
±00
±0
±0

±00
±00

±0
±0

±00
±00

±0
±0
±00
±00

±00
±00
±0
±0

±0
±0
±00
±00

Tele
Wide

Set

5

Choose a fine-tuning value using the FG buttons and press the Q button.

6

To fine-tune focus for the same lens but in adifferent area of the frame, highlight the lens nameusing the FG buttons and press the I button.

• The selected value will be saved. If you chose [Default Data], the options shown in
Step 2 will be displayed.
• If you chose [Lens Data], the dialog shown in Step 3 will be displayed. The display
will show the name of the lens for which the fine-tuning value was saved.
• Rotate the front dial to zoom in and check focus.
• Before pressing the Q button, press the shutter button to take a test shot and checkfocus.
• To save another fine-tuning value for the current lens, press the I button and repeat
the process from Step 4.
Data List

100%

4

Create Lens Data Set
1 50-200 F2.8-3.5

Back

7

Set

When the process is complete, press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

 Deleting Saved Values

1Highlight [AF Focus Adj.] in G Custom Menu L
and press I on the arrow pad.

A3. AF/MF

100%
1
2

A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2

Off

AF Targeting Pad

Off

AF Limiter
AF Illuminator

On

Face Priority

Off

AF Focus Adj.

Off

Back

2

Highlight [Lens Data] using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

A3. AF/MF

100%
1
2

Set

A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2

AF Targeting Pad

Off

AF Limiter

OffAF Illuminator

On

Face Priority

Off

AF Focus Adj.

Use the FG buttons to highlight the name of thelens you wish to delete from the fine-tuning list andthen press the I button.

Off

Off

Default Data
Lens Data

Back

3

Menu functions (Custom menus)• Repeat the process from Step 4.

Set
Data List

100%

Create Lens Data Set
1 50-200 F2.8-3.5

Back

Set

EN 213

4Highlight [Delete] using the FG buttons and pressthe I button.

Data List

100%

Create Lens Data Set
1 50-200 F2.8-3.5

Check
Delete• A confirmation dialog will be displayed.

Back

5

• The dialog shown in Step 3 will be displayed. Confirm
that the lens name has been deleted.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)
214 EN

Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.

100%

Set
Delete Lens Data Set

Yes
No

Back

Set

• To disable AF fine-tuning without deleting the entries for the current lens, select [Off] for[AF Focus Adj.].

$• The camera can store multiple values for each lens.

 Enabling Fine-Tuning
Display the lens data list and place checks (v) next to the items you wish to use.

Manual Focus Assist
MENU

G

I

(MF Assist)[MF Assist]

This is a focus assist function for MF. When the focus ring is rotated, the edge of thesubject is enhanced or a portion of the screen display is magnified. When you stop
operating the focus ring, the screen returns to the original display.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Magnifies a portion of the screen. The portion to be magnified can be
set in advance using AF target. g “Choosing a Focus Target (AFTarget Point)” (P. 72)

Peaking

Displays clearly defined outlines with edge enhancement. You canselect the enhancement color and intensity. g G Custom Menu R >[Peaking Settings] (P. 189)

• Rotate the front or rear dial to zoom in or out during focus zoom.
• [Peaking] can be displayed using button operations. The display is switched every time
the button is pressed. Focus peaking must first be assigned to a button using [Button
Function] (P. 116).
• Press the INFO button to change the color and intensity when Peaking is displayed.
• When Peaking is in use, the edges of small subjects tend to be enhanced more strongly.
This is no guarantee of accurate focusing.
• Focus zoom is not available during movie recording or when [C-AFb] or [C-AF+TRb]
is selected for focus mode.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

Magnify

EN 215

Adjusting Focus During Exposures
MENU

G

I

(Bulb/Time Focusing)[Bulb/Time Focusing]

You can adjust focus manually while shooting in B (bulb) mode. This allows you todefocus during the exposure or focus at the end of the exposure.

1

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)
216 EN

Highlight [Bulb/Time Focusing] in G Custom Menu
I and press the Q button.

A4. AF/MF

100%
1
2

A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2

Starry Sky AF Setting
MF Assist
MF Clutch

Highlight an option using the FG buttons.

3

Press the Q button to select the highlighted option.

4

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

On

Bulb/Time Focusing

On

Reset Lens

[Off]: The focus position cannot be adjusted manually during an exposure.
[On]: The focus position can be adjusted manually during an exposure.
• G Custom Menu I will be displayed.

Operative

Focus Ring

Back

2

Speed

Preset MF distanceSetMulti Selector Press
MENU

G

J

(S Center Button)[S Center Button]

Choose the operation performed by pressing the multi selector. The multi selector canthen function as a button.
Off

No role assigned. Pressing the multi selector has no effect.

Press the multi selector to adjust settings for AF target selection,
AF target mode, or face priority AF. The arrow pad or front andrear dials can be used according to the setting selected for
N (AF target selection)[N Select Screen Settings] (P. 207) in G Custom Menu K.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie
recording.
The multi selector performs the function selected for [K Button
Function] > [N Home] (P. 118).
• This option applies in still photography modes only.

Multi Selector Tilt
MENU

G

J

(T Direction Key)[T Direction Key]

Choose the operation performed by tilting the multi selector. The multi selector is
normally used to position the AF target, but this function can be disabled to prevent
unintended operation.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Off

Pressing the multi selector up, down, left, or right has no effect.

N (AF-target position)

The multi selector can be used to position the AF-target(P. 72).

Menu functions (Custom menus)

N Home (AF area
HOME)

4

EN 217

Assigning Roles to the Front and Rear Dials
MENU

G

J

(K Dial Function)[K Dial Function]

Choose the roles performed by the front and rear dials. You can also choose thefunction selected using the Fn lever (P. 219). You can also choose the operations
performed during playback or when menus are displayed.
• This item is for still photography. The functions assigned using [n Button/Dial/Lever] >[n Dial Function] (P. 163) in the n video menu take effect in n (movie) mode.

The roles that can be performed by the dials in photo shooting and q playback
modes are listed below.

4

Role

Function

Menu functions (Custom menus)

A

S

M

B

Ps

Program shift (P. 45).



—

—

—

—

Shutter

Choose the shutter speed.

—

—





*

FNo.

Adjust aperture.

—



—





F

Adjust exposure compensation.











x

Adjust flash compensation.











ISO

Adjust ISO sensitivity.











WB

Adjust white balance.











CWB KelvinChoose a color temperature when
CWB (custom) is selected for whitebalance.











Off

None.











A/Value

Move the cursor up or down orhighlight values or options while menus
are displayed.

B

Move the cursor left or right whilemenus are displayed.

Ga (index/playback
zoom)

Zoom in or out or switch to the index
display during playback.

Prev/Next

View the next or previous image during
playback.

* Switch between bulb, time, and live composite.

218 EN

Shooting modeP——

Customizing the Fn Lever
MENU

G

J

(K Fn Lever Function)[K Fn Lever Function]

Choose the role played by the Fn lever.
• This item is for still photography. The functions assigned to controls using this item areavailable only in modes P, A, S, M, and B (still photography modes). The functions
assigned using [n Button/Dial/Lever] > [n Fn Lever Function] (P. 163) in the n video
menu take effect in n (movie) mode.
Switch the functions of the front and rear dials. The functions for Positions 1
and 2 conform to the setting selected for [K Dial Function] (P. 218).

mode2

Switch between two groups of settings previously selected for [AF Mode],[AF Target Mode], and [AF Target Point].
• You can choose the options selected by pressing I on the arrow pad.

mode3

Toggle the shooting mode. You can switch to n (movie) mode without
rotating the mode dial.
• The Fn lever cannot be used to perform the function assigned using[n Fn Lever Function].

Off

The Fn lever function is turned off.

• The Fn lever cannot be used to perform the selected function when [Power 1] or[Power 2] is selected for [Fn Lever/Power Lever] (P. 185) in G Custom Menu J.

4Menu functions (Custom menus)

mode1

EN 219

Burst Shooting Options
MENU

G

N

(jL Settings/jH Settings)[jL Settings]/[jH Settings]

Adjust settings for sequential shooting modes, including the maximum frame advance
rate and number of shots per burst. Shooting ends if the maximum number of shots isreached while the shutter button is pressed all the way down.
Choose the advance rate and number of shots per burst for S (sequential low) and T(sequential high) modes.

jL Settings(sequential low
options)

Choose the frame rate and maximum number of shots per burst for
S (sequential low), ♦S (anti-shock sequential low), and ♥S (silent
sequential low) modes. You can also adjust settings for q (Pro CaptureLow) mode (P. 81).
• S and ♦S modes:[Max fps]: 1–10 fps[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)• ♥S mode:[Max fps]: 1–10, 15, or 18 fps[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)• q mode:[Max fps]: 10, 15, or 18 fps[Pre-shutter Frames]: 0–35
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
Includes shots captured before recording begins.

jH Settings(sequential highoptions)

Choose the frame rate and maximum number of shots per burst for T(sequential high) and ♥T (silent sequential high) modes. You can also
adjust settings for p (Pro Capture High) mode (P. 82).
• T mode:[Max fps]: 10–15 fps[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)• ♥T mode:[Max fps]: 15, 20, 30, or 60 fps[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)• p mode:[Max fps]: 15, 20, 30, or 60 fps[Pre-shutter Frames]: 0–35
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
Includes shots captured before recording begins.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)
220 EN1

Highlight [jL Settings] or [jH Settings] in
G Custom Menu N and press the Q button.

C1. Release/j/Image Stabilizer

100%
1
2

A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2

S-AF Release Priority

Off

C-AF Release Priority
jL SettingsOn

jH Settings
Flicker Reduction

Back

2

Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

1
2• The camera will display options for the selected item.

Set
C1. Release/j/Image Stabilizer

100%

A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2

On
C-AF Release Priorityj/jjL Settings
jH Settings

Ɔj

Flicker Reduction

J

Back

Choose a setting for [Max fps].

Set
Ɔj

100%

Max fps• Highlight [Max fps] using the FG buttons and pressthe I button.
• Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.

10fps

Frame Count Limiter

Back

4

5

Choose a setting for [Pre-shutter Frames].
• This option will only be available if you selected [J] in
Step 2.
• Highlight [Pre-shutter Frames] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.

Choose the maximum number of shots per burst([Frame Count Limiter]).

Off

Set
J

100%

Max fps

18fps

Pre-shutter Frames

15

Frame Count Limiter

Off

15

Back

Set

Pro Capture options
Ɔj

100%

Max fpsFrame Count Limiter

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

3

Off

S-AF Release Priority

10fps
Off

• Highlight [Frame Count Limiter] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• To keep shooting as long as the shutter release button
is pressed all the way down, select [Off].
Back
Set• To choose a maximum number of shots, highlightthe current setting and press the I button to display
options. Highlight digits using the HI buttons and use
the FG buttons to change.
• The maximum number of shots per burst includes shots captured while the shutter
button is pressed halfway. g “Shooting without a release time lag (Pro Capture
shooting)” (P. 81)• Press the Q button to save changes to settings.

6

Press the Q button.

7

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

• G Custom Menu N will be displayed.

EN 221

Reducing Flicker
MENU

G

N

(Flicker Reduction)[Flicker Reduction]

When shooting under fluorescent or other artificial workplace or outdoor lighting, you
may notice flicker in the live view display or uneven exposure in photos taken at fast
shutter speeds. This item reduces these effects.
 Reducing Flicker in Live View (Anti-Flicker LV)
Reduce flicker under fluorescent lighting and the like. Choose this option if flicker
makes the display difficult to view.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

Auto

The camera detects and reduces flicker.

50Hz

Reduce flicker under workplace or outdoor lighting powered by alternating
current with a frequency of 50 Hz.

60Hz

Reduce flicker under workplace or outdoor lighting powered by alternating
current with a frequency of 60 Hz.

Off

Flicker reduction off.
• This option is not available when [On] is selected for [Anti-Flicker Shooting](P. 223).

1

Highlight [Flicker Reduction] in G Custom Menu N
and press the Q button.

C1. Release/j/Image Stabilizer

100%
1
2

A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2

S-AF Release Priority

Off

C-AF Release Priority
jL SettingsOn

jH Settings
Flicker Reduction

Back

2

Highlight [Anti-Flicker LV] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.

Set
Flicker Reduction

100%

Anti-Flicker LV

AutoAnti-Flicker ShootingOff• [Anti-Flicker LV] options will be displayed.

Back

3

Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the Q button.

100%

Auto

• [Flicker Reduction] options will be displayed.

Automatically reduces flicker.

Back

4

222 EN

Set
Anti-Flicker LV

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

Set Reducing Flicker in Photographs (Anti-Flicker Shooting)
You may notice uneven exposure in photos taken under flickering light. When thisoption is enabled, the camera will detect the flicker frequency and adjust the timingof the shutter release accordingly. This feature applies to photos taken with themechanical shutter.

1

Highlight [Flicker Reduction] in G Custom Menu N
and press the Q button.

C1. Release/j/Image Stabilizer

100%
1
2

A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2

S-AF Release Priority

Off

C-AF Release Priority
jL SettingsOn

jH Settings
Flicker Reduction

Back

2

4

Flicker Reduction

100%

Anti-Flicker LV

AutoAnti-Flicker ShootingOff• [Anti-Flicker Shooting] options will be displayed.

Back

3

Highlight [On] or [Off] using the FG buttons andpress the Q button.

Set
Anti-Flicker Shooting

100%

On

• [Flicker Reduction] options will be displayed.

Effects of flicker such as uneven
exposures and colors will be
reduced.The shutter release time
lag may become longer.
Valid when using mechanical shutter.
Set

Back

4

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
• A u icon appears in the display when [On] is selected.

u iconMenu functions (Custom menus)

Highlight [Anti-Flicker Shooting] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.

Set

FLK

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023• This option does not take effect in modes that use the electronic shutter, including silent
modes, High Res Shot, and Pro Capture modes.
• The camera may be unable to detect flicker at some settings. Normal release timing will
be used if flicker is not detected.
• Normal release timing is used at slow shutter speeds.
• Enabling flicker reduction may cause release lag, slowing the frame advance rate during
burst photography.

EN 223

(K Control Settings)

Choosing the control panel displays
MENU

G

P

[K Control Settings]

Choose the control panel displays available in each shooting mode. Use this option
to hide on-screen controls (live controls and the LV super control panel) so that theycannot be displayed via the INFO button.

1

Highlight [K Control Settings] in G Custom Menu
P and press the Q button.

4

1
2

D1
D2
D3
D4
E1
E2
E3
F

KControl Settings
G/Info Settings
Picture Mode Settings
j/Y Settings
Multi Function Settings

Back

Menu functions (Custom menus)

2

Highlight items using the FG buttons and press the
Q button.

Set
KControl Settings

100%

Live Control
Live SCP• Selected items are marked with a check (v). Selected
items will be displayed.
Back

3

H

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

• For movie mode, set with [n Control Settings] of [n Display Settings] (P. 164).

 Displaying On-Screen Controls• At default settings, live controls are hidden during still photography. To toggle between live
controls and the LV super control panel, you must first place a check (v) next to both
[Live Control] and [Live SCP] in the [K Control Settings] display.

1

Press the Q button during live view in P, A, S, M, or B mode.
• The LV super control panel will be displayed.
100%

100%

KRecommended ISO

S-IS AUTO

Q

ISO
Auto
# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

YF
4K

30p

P

WB
Auto

#

ISO-A
200

224 EN

D1. Disp/8/PC

100%

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

o
YF
YF

P

250 F5.6

A±0
G±0
S-AF
Off

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

p

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p
1:02:031023

2

Press the INFO button to display live controls.

• The on-screen controls displayed change each time the INFO is pressed.
100%

100%

KRecommended ISO
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
#
S-AF
# ± 0.0Offop
S-IS Auto
YF
M-IS
YF

P

3

250 F5.6#

Natural
S ±0±0Normal
±0

INFO

#+ -

p
ISO-A
200

S-AF
ISO
AUTO

sRGB

Recommend

4K

30p

250
1:02:03

P

1023

F5.6

OFF

0.0

AUTO L64 L100 200 250 320 400

After adjusting settings, press the Q button to exit the on-screen controls.
• Pressing the Q button will in future display the last on-screen controls used.

 Live control
100%

S-IS AUTO

WB
AUTO

o

P

WKeep Warm Color o

4:3

OFF

YF

WB Auto

4K

Settings

30p

AUTO 5 N O 1 > U

Functions

Available settings
Image stabilizer* ...................................P. 97
Picture mode* .............................P. 106, 142
White balance* .....................................P. 94
Sequential shooting/Self-timer........P. 78, 98
Aspect ratio...........................................P. 98
KK (image quality)*
Still image .....................................P. 100
Movie ............................................P. 101

n mode (movie exposure mode)* .....P. 165
Flash mode ...........................................P. 86
Flash intensity control .........................P. 105
Metering mode......................................P. 77
AF mode*..............................................P. 64
ISO sensitivity* ...............................P. 75, 91
Face priority* ........................................P. 92
Movie sound record*...........................P. 169

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)• The INFO button cannot be used to toggle on-screen controls if it can be used to display
options for the item currently selected in the live control display. Select a different item
before using the INFO button to toggle the display.

* Available in movie mode
• Some functions cannot be used depending on the shooting mode.
• When the controls in [KControl Settings] is set to [Live Control], you can use live control
even in P, A, S, M, B modes (P. 224).

1

Press the Q button to display the live control.

2

Use FG to move the cursor to the desired function, then use HI to selectit and press the Q button.

• Press the Q button again to hide live control.

• The setting is confirmed if you leave the camera as-is for 8 seconds.

EN 225

Adding information displays
MENU

G

P

(G/Info Settings)[G/Info Settings]

 q Info (Playback information displays)
Use [q Info] to add the following playback information displays. The added displays
are displayed by repeatedly pressing the INFO button during playback. You can alsochoose to not show displays that appear at the default setting.
100%

4

100%

100%

Shadow Highlight

15

Histogram display

1x

15

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Highlight & Shadow
display

15

15

Light box display

Highlight & Shadow display
Areas above the upper limit of brightness for the image are shown in red, those below thelower limit in blue. g G Custom Menu R > [Histogram Settings] (P. 189)
Light box display
Compare two images side-by-side. Press the Q button to select the base image.
• The base image is displayed on the right. Use the front dial to select an image and press
the Q to move the image to the left. The image to be compared to the image on the left
can be selected on the right. To choose a different base image, highlight the right frameand press the Q.
• To change the zoom ratio, turn the rear dial. Press the ISO button and then FGHI toscroll the zoomed-in area, and rotate the front dial to select between images.
ISO

100%

2x

53

100%

2x

ISO

100%

2x

53

54

ISO

226 EN qa Info (Magnified playback information display)
The magnified playback information displays can be set with [qa Info]. If [a](Magnify) is assigned to a button with Button Function (P. 116) in advance, the set
displays can be switched by repeatedly pressing the a button during playback. You
can also choose to not show displays that appear at the default setting.
100%

a

4:3

2020.02.15 12:30:00

YF 100-0015

15

100%

2x

a

15

100%

2x

a

100%

2x

15

a

To add highlights and shadows to the [LV-Info] display, press I on the arrow pad toplace a check next to [Custom1] or [Custom2]. The added displays are displayed byrepeatedly pressing the INFO button during shooting. You can also choose to notshow displays that appear at the default setting.
To choose the information displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway, select[LV-Info], highlight [Image Only] and press the I button.
On

Shooting info is displayed while the shutter button is pressed halfway.

Off

Shooting info is not displayed while the shutter button is pressed halfway.

 LV OFF-Info (Shooting information displays)
Choose a shooting display (P. 40).

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

 LV-Info (Shooting information displays)
Choose the info shown in the live view shooting display. g “Switching the information
display” (P. 39)

EN 227

 G Settings (Index/calendar display)
You can change the number of frames to be displayed on the index display and set
to not display the screens that are set to be displayed by default with [G Settings].
Screens with a check can be selected on the playback screen using the rear dial.

q

100%

q

100%

100%

100%

2020.02.15 12:30:00
4:3

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)
228 EN20

YF 100-0015

2020.02.15 12:30:00

15

Single-frame
playbackp

2020.02.15 12:30:00

20

4 framesp

2020.02.15 12:30:00

Index display

Sun

Q

q

2020.2

100%

Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

26

27

28

29

30

31

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

1

2

3

4

5

Calendar displayp20

9, 25, or 100 frames

Choosing the Playback Zoom Ratio
MENU

G

Q

(qa Default Setting)[qa Default Setting]Choose the starting zoom ratio for playback zoom (close-up playback).
Recently

Zoom in to the most recently selected zoom ratio.

Equally Value

Images are displayed at a zoom ratio of 1:1. A
monitor.

×2, ×3, ×5, ×7,
×10, ×14

Choose the starting zoom ratio.

icon appears in the

Selfie Assist
G

R[Selfie Assist]

Choose the display used when the monitor is reversed for self-portraits.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
On

When reversed for self-portraits, the monitor shows a mirror image of the view
through the lens.

Off

The display does not change when the monitor is reversed.

1
2

Select [On] for [Selfie Assist] in G Custom Menu R.
Turn the monitor towards you.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

MENU(Selfie Assist)EN 229Viewing camera images on TV
MENU

G

S

(HDMI)[HDMI]

Use the separately sold cable with the camera to playback recorded images on yourTV. This function is available during shooting. Connect the camera to an HD TV using
an HDMI cable to view high-quality images on a TV screen.
HDMI cable(Connect to the HDMI connector on
the TV.)

HDMI connector
Type D

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

Type A

Connect the TV and camera and switch the input source of the TV.
• If [On] is selected for [HDMI Control] (P. 282), the camera monitor will turn off when an
HDMI cable is connected.
• For details on changing the input source of the TV, refer to the TV’s instruction manual.
• Depending on the TV’s settings, the displayed images and information may become
cropped.
• If the camera is connected via an HDMI cable, you will be able to choose the digital video
signal type. Choose a format that matches the input format selected with the TV.
C4K

The signal is output in 4K digital cinema (4096 × 2160) format.

4K

If possible, the signal is output in 4K (3840 × 2160).

1080p

If possible, the signal is output in Full HD (1080p).

720p

If possible, the signal is output in HD (720p).

480p/576p

The signal is output in 480p/576p format.

• Do not connect the camera to other HDMI output devices. Doing so may damage thecamera.
• HDMI output is disabled while the camera is connected to a computer via USB.
• When [Record Mode] is selected for [Output Mode] (P. 164), movies will be output at theresolution selected during recording. The images cannot be displayed on the connected
TV if the TV does not support the record mode.
• 1080p output will be used in place of [4K] or [C4K] while the camera is being used to takephotographs.

Using the TV remote control
The camera can be operated by a TV remote control when connected to a TV that
supports HDMI control. g “Using a TV Remote (HDMI Control)” (P. 282)
The camera monitor turns off.
• You can operate the camera by following the operation guide displayed on the TV.
• During single-frame playback, you can display or hide the information display bypressing the “Red” button, and display or hide the index display by pressing the“Green” button.
• Some televisions may not support all features.

230 EN

Choosing a USB Connection Mode
MENU

G

S

(USB Mode)[USB Mode]

Choose how the camera functions when connected to external devices via USB.
You will be prompted to choose a connection mode each time a USB
cable is connected.

Storage

The camera functions as an external storage device. The data on thecamera memory card can be copied to the computer.

MTP

The pictures on the memory card can be viewed or copied to thecomputer using standard software supplied with Windows.

M PC RAW

Employing computer controls available via Olympus Workspace, process
pictures using the camera’s high-speed image processing engine. You
can also edit RAW pictures stored on memory cards inserted in thecamera. Be sure to install and launch the latest version of Olympus
Workspace on your computer (P. 274).
• RAW processing is not available with pictures taken with other cameras
or when the camera battery is low.

0

The camera can be controlled from the computer, while pictures shotusing OLYMPUS Capture can be downloaded as they are taken. For
more information, see “Connecting to Computers via USB” (P. 274).

USB PDThe camera can be powered by external devices connected via USB.
For more information, see “Powering the Camera via USB (USB Power
Delivery)” (P. 278).

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

Auto

EN 231

Live Bulb Update Frequency
MENU

G

U

(Live Bulb)[Live Bulb]

Choose the frequency with which the display is updated during live bulb photography
in mode B (bulb). The display will be refreshed at the selected interval while live bulb
photography is in progress, allowing you to view the results in the display.

• [Live Bulb] options can also be displayed by pressing the MENU button during [BULB] or[LIVE BULB] photography.

Live Time Update Frequency

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)
232 ENMENU

GU(Live Time)[Live Time]

Choose the frequency with which the display is updated during live time photography
in mode B (bulb). The display will be refreshed at the selected interval while live time
photography is in progress, allowing you to view the results in the display.

• [Live Time] options can also be displayed by pressing the MENU button during [TIME] or[LIVE TIME] photography.

Choosing the Shutter Speed
MENU

G

U

(Composite Settings)[Composite Settings]

The exposure time for each exposure made during live composite photography can bechosen in advance using the menus.

1

Highlight [Composite Settings] in G Custom Menu
U and press the Q button.

E2. Exp/ISO/BULB/p

100%
1
2

D1
D2
D3
D4
E1
E2
E3
F

Bulb/Time Timer
Live Composite Timer
Bulb/Time Monitor
Live Bulb
Live Time

Highlight an option using the FG buttons.

3h
–7
Off
0.5secComposite Settings
KFlicker Scan

Back

2

8min

Off
Set

Composite Settings

100%

1sec
Exposure time per image.
Exposure time and aperture
will determine your base exposure.

Back

3

Press the Q button to select the highlighted option.

4

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

Set• G Custom Menu U will be displayed.

• The maximum exposure time can be selected using [Live Composite Timer] in G Custom
Menu U (P. 192). The default setting is [3h].
• This item applies during still photography in B (bulb) mode. See page 54 for more
information on composite photography.
• [Composite Settings] options can also be displayed by pressing the MENU button in[LIVE COMP] mode.

Menu functions (Custom menus)• Choose an exposure time of from 1/2 to 60 s.

4

EN 233

Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting
MENU

G

U

(K Flicker Scan)[K Flicker Scan]

Banding may occur in photographs taken under LED lighting. Use [K Flicker Scan] to
optimize shutter speed while viewing banding in the display.
• This item is for still photography.
• This item can be used in S, M, and silent mode and with High Res Shot and Pro Capture
shooting.
• The range of available shutter speeds is reduced.

1

Choose shooting and drive modes.

2

Highlight [K Flicker Scan] in G Custom Menu U
and press the Q button.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)• Choose shooting mode S or M.
• Choose one of the following drive modes:- Silent mode (♥o, ♥S, ♥T, ♥X, ♥Z, or ♥c)- High Res Shot (h)- Pro Capture (q or p)
E2. Exp/ISO/BULB/p

100%
1
2

D1
D2
D3
D4
E1
E2
E3
F

8min

Bulb/Time Timer

3h
–7
Off
0.5secLive Composite Timer
Bulb/Time Monitor
Live Bulb
Live Time
Composite Settings
KFlicker Scan

Off
Set

Back

3

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
Q button.

E2. Exp/ISO/BULB/p

100%
1
2

• The camera will return to the previous menu.

D1
D2
D3
D4
E1
E2
E3
F

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

3h–7
Off
0.5secBulb/Time Monitor
Live Bulb
Live Time
Composite Settings
KFlicker Scan

Off
On

Off
Set

Back

4

8min

Bulb/Time Timer
Live Composite Timer

100%• The camera will exit to the shooting display. A P
icon will be displayed.
S

128.6

P

P icon234 EN

5

Choose a shutter speed while viewing the display.

6

Take pictures once settings have been adjusted to your satisfaction.

• Choose a shutter speed using the front or rear dial or the FG buttons. If desired,
the shutter speed can be selected by keeping FG pressed.
• You can also rotate the front dial to adjust shutter speed in the exposure increments
selected for [EV Step] in G Custom Menu T.
• Continue adjusting shutter speed until banding is no longer visible in the display.
• Press the INFO button; the display will change and the P icon will no longer
be displayed. You can adjust aperture and exposure compensation. Do so using thefront or rear dial or the arrow pad.
• Press the INFO button repeatedly to return to the flicker scan display.

%• [K Flicker Scan] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to
enable flicker scan. g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)” (P. 116)

Fine-Tuning Exposure
MENU

G

V

(Exposure Shift)[Exposure Shift]Fine-tune exposure. Use this option if you want the results of auto exposure to beconsistently brighter or darker.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
• Fine-tuning is not normally required. Use only as necessary. In normal circumstances,
exposure can be adjusted using exposure compensation (P. 68).
• Fine-tuning exposure reduces the amount of exposure compensation available in the
direction (+ or −) exposure was fine-tuned.
• Exposure fine-tuning can be applied to the following metering methods.
Metering

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)• Focus peaking, the LV super control panel, and live controls are not available in the flicker
scan display. To view these items, first press the INFO button to exit the flicker scandisplay.

Fine-tuning amountp (digital ESP)
B (center-weighted averaging)−1 to +1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV

C (spot)

EN 235

Shutter speeds when the flash fires
MENU

G

W

(#X-Sync./#Slow Limit)[#X-Sync.]/[#Slow Limit]

You can set shutter speed conditions for when the flash fires.
• This item is for still photography.
Shooting
mode

Flash firing shutter speedP

The camera automatically sets the
shutter speed.

A

4

S

[#X-Sync.]
setting

The set shutter speed

M

Lower limit[#Slow Limit]
setting
No lower limit

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Combinations of JPEG image sizes and compression rates(K Set)MENUGX[K Set]You can set the JPEG image quality by combining image size and compression rate.
• This item is for still photography.
Image sizeName
Y (Large)
X (Middle)
W (Small)* Default

236 EN

Upper limit

Compression rate

Pixel CountSF(Super Fine)

F(Fine)N(Normal)5184×3888*

YSF*

YF*

YN*

XSF

XF

XN*

WSF

WF

WN

3200×2400*
1920×1440
1280×960
1024×768

Application

Select for the printsize
For small prints anduse on a website

Setting the card to record to
MENU

G

Y

(Card Slot Settings)[Card Slot Settings]

When there are cards in both slots 1 and 2, you can select which card to record still
images and movies to.

1
2

Highlight [Card Slot Settings] in G Custom Menu Y and press the Q button.
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.
Choose the recording method for still images. g “Setting thesaving method for shooting data (K Save Settings)” (P. 99)

K Save Slot

Choose the card used to record photographs. This option takes
effect when [Standard] or [Auto Switch] is selected for [K Save
Settings].

n Save Slot

Choose the card used to record movies.

q SlotChoose the card used for still image playback when [K Save
Settings] is set to [Dual Independent 1], [Dual Independent 3],[Dual Same 1], or [Dual Same 3].

Assign Save Folder

Choose the destination folder.
• This option is also available when only one card is inserted.

• Settings other than [n Save Slot] and [Assign Save Folder] can only be accessed in still
photography modes.

%• You can also choose a card for playback using the q button. Hold the q button androtate the front or rear dial to switch cards while playback is in progress. This does notchange the option selected for [q Slot].
• When [z] (Auto Switch) is selected for [K Save Settings], the camera will automaticallyswitch between the last picture on the first card and the first picture on the second card.
• In n (movie) mode, the slot selected for [n Save Slot] also serves as the [q Slot].

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

K Save Settings

EN 237

Assign Save Folder

12
3

Select [Assign Save Folder] and press I.
Select [Assign] and press I.
Select a folder and press the Q button.
• If you select [New Folder], specify the 3-digit folder number and press the Q button.
Existing Folder• If you select [Existing Folder], use FG to select the
100OLYMP
5671
existing folder and press the Q button.
101OLYMP30
The first 2 frames and the last frame in the selected
200OLYMP
49
202OLYMP
125
folder are displayed.
100%

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)
238 EN305OLYMP

3250

420OLYMP

108

500OLYMP

427

Back

Set

Saving lens info
MENU

G

Y

(Lens Info Settings)[Lens Info Settings]

The camera can store information for up to 10 lenses that do not conform to the Micro
Four Thirds or Four Thirds system standards. These data also supply the focal length
used for the image stabilization and keystone compensation features.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.

Select [Create Lens Information] for [Lens Info Settings] in G Custom Menu
Y.

2

Select [Lens Name] and enter a lens name. After entering a name, highlight[END] and press the Q button.

3
4
5

Use FGHI to choose the [Focal Length].
Use FGHI to choose the [Aperture Value].
Select [Set] and press the Q button.

• The lens will be added to the lens info menu.
• When a lens that does not supply info automatically is attached, the info used is indicatedby checks (v). Highlight lenses to which you want to add checks (v) and press the Q
button.

%• [Lens Info Settings] can be assigned to a button. The button can then be used to recall
lens info, for example after lenses are exchanged. g “Assigning functions to buttons(Button Function)” (P. 116)4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

1

EN 239Selecting the display style of the viewfinder
MENU

G(EVF Style)[EVF Style]a

Style 1/2: Similar to film camera viewfinder displays.
Style 3: The same as the monitor display.
100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

4

100%

P

250 F5.6 0.0

WB ISO-A
AUTO 200P

1:02:031023

250 F5.6 0.0

Style 1/ Style 2

1:02:031023

Style 3

Menu functions (Custom menus)

 Viewfinder display when shooting using the viewfinder (Style 1/Style 2)
1
100%

2345

6

7

#

G

Sh-3 Mid+2 Hi+60

P C1 AEL

efg h i j

abcd
w1

100%

#

P C1 AEL

G

250 F5.6 +2.0

Sh-3 Mid+2 Hi+6

WB ISO-A
AUTO 200

250 F5.6 +2.0

1:02:03k

8 9
WB ISO-A
AUTO 200

1:02:031023l
WB ISO-A ● REC 00:12
PC
AUTO 200

G

+2.0
o

q

p

1023

1
OVF simulation *1 .....................P. 197
2 Flash ...............................................P. 84(blinks: charging in progress, lights up:
charging completed)
3 AF confirmation mark......................P. 42
4 Custom mode .........................P. 57, 142
5 AE lock....................................P. 77, 201
6 Live view boost .............................P. 188
7 Highlight & shadow control ...........P. 115
8 White balance .................................P. 94
9 ISO sensitivity ...........................P. 75, 91
0 Battery level ....................................P. 32
a Card write indicator ...................P. 21, 27
b Wireless LAN connection
status ....................................P. 245, 256
c Active Bluetooth® connection ......P. 246
d Active connection to computer (Wi-Fi)......................................................P. 256

e Shooting mode......................... P. 41 –60
f Pro Capture active ..........................P. 81
g Preview .........................................P. 117
h Shutter speed ..........................P. 44 – 50
i Aperture value ........................ P. 44 – 50
j Exposure compensation value........P. 68
k Top: Flash intensity control ...........P. 105
Bottom: Exposure compensation ....P. 68
l Card slot settings
Top: n Save slot..........................P. 237
Bottom: K Save settings ..............P. 99
m Available recording time ...............P. 317
n Number of storable still pictures ...P. 316
o Level gauge *2 .................................P. 40
p Active connection to computer (USB) *3......................................................P. 274
q Recording time (displayed during
recording)........................................P. 59*1 Displayed in the viewfinder only. g G Custom Menu a > [S-OVF] (P. 197)
*2 Displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway. g G Custom Menu a >[V Half Way Level] (P. 197)
*3 Displayed only if a computer is currently selected in the [0] menu as the soledestination for new pictures (P. 275).

240 ENmnViewfinder Info Display Options
MENU

G

a

(V Info Settings)[V Info Settings]

Choose the information that can be viewed by pressing the INFO button in the
viewfinder display. Just as you can with the monitor, you can display a histogram orlevel gauge in the viewfinder by pressing the INFO button. This item is used to choose
the types of display available. It takes effect when [Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for[EVF Style].
• This item is for still photography. The option selected for [n Info Settings] takes effect inn mode (P. 164).
Basic Information The camera displays icons and the like showing camera settings.
Custom1/
Custom2• Items marked with checks (v) appear in the viewfinder display.
• To choose the custom displays available in the viewfinder, highlight [Custom1] or[Custom2] and press I on the arrow pad.

Button Hold Options
MENU

G

b

(Press-and-hold Time)[Press-and-hold Time]

Choose how long buttons must be pressed to perform resets and other similarfunctions for various features. For ease of use, button hold times can be set separately
for different features.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Available Features• End LV a
• Reset LV a Frame• End H (movie teleconverter zoom
frame display)• Reset H Frame (movie teleconverterzoom frame position)• Reset F• Reset x (flash compensation)• Reset W (highlight and shadow control)

4Menu functions (Custom menus)

In addition to the base display, you can opt to view or hide:[&]: A histogram superimposed on the display in the viewfinder.
[Highlight&Shadow]: Tints applied to over- and under-exposed areas.
[Level Gauge]: The level gauge.

• Reset c (color creator)• Reset N• Call EVF Auto Switch• End qa
• End D
• Reset D• Switch G Lock (touch controls)• Call BKT Settings• End Flicker Scan

EN 241

Correcting Fisheye Distortion
MENU

G

b

(Fisheye Compensation)[Fisheye Compensation]

Correct distortion caused by fisheye lenses to give photos the appearance of pictures
taken with a wide-angle lens. The amount of correction can be selected from threedifferent levels. You can also opt simultaneously to correct distortion in photos taken
under water.

• This option is available in P, A, S, M, and B modes.
• This option is only available with compatible fisheye lenses.
As of November 2019, it could be used with the M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 8mm f1.8 Fisheye
PRO.

4Menu functions (Custom menus)

Angle

When fisheye correction is performed, the picture is cropped toeliminate blacked-out areas. Choose from three different crops.

j/i Correction

Choose whether to correct distortion in photos taken under water in
addition to the correction performed using [Angle].

1

Highlight [Fisheye Compensation] in G Custom
Menu b and press the Q button.

J1. KUtility

100%
1
2

G
H1
H2
I
J1
J2

Pixel Mapping
Press-and-hold Time
Level AdjustOn

Touchscreen Settings

RecallMenu Recall

Off

Fisheye Compensation
Set

Back

2

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
I button.

J1. KUtility

100%
1
2

• [Angle] and [j/i Correction] will be displayed.

G
H1
H2
I
J1
J2

Pixel Mapping
Press-and-hold Time
Level AdjustOn

Touchscreen Settings

RecallMenu Recall

Off

Fisheye Compensation Off
On
Set

Back

3

Highlight an item using the FG buttons and pressthe I button.
• Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.
• If you are not taking photos under water, choose [Off]for [j/i Correction].
• [Fisheye Compensation] options will be displayed.

242 EN

Fisheye Compensation

100%

Angle
j/i Correction

Back

1
Off

Set

4

Press the Q button repeatedly to exit to the G Custom Menu b.
• After confirming that [On] is selected for [Fisheye Compensation], press the MENU
button to exit the menus.
Fisheye compensation• When fisheye compensation is enabled, a A icon will
be displayed together with the selected crop.
100%

1

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

5

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Take pictures.

%• [Fisheye Compensation] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button
to enable fisheye correction. g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)”(P. 116)

Menu functions (Custom menus)• Pictures taken with [RAW] selected for image quality are recorded in RAW + JPEG format.
Fisheye compensation is not applied to the RAW image.
• Focus peaking is not available in the fisheye compensation display.
• AF-target selection is restricted to single- and small-target modes.
• The following cannot be used:
live composite photography, burst photography, bracketing, HDR, multiple exposure,the live ND filer, keystone compensation, the digital teleconverter, movie recording,[C-AF], [C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], and [C-AF+TRb] AF modes, [e-Portrait] and art filter
picture modes, the custom self-timer, and High Res Shot.

4

EN 243

5Connecting the Camera to External
Devices

A number of tasks can be accomplished by connecting the camera to an external
device such as a computer or smartphone. Choose a connection type and software
according to your goals.

Precautions for Using Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®
Disable wireless LAN and Bluetooth® in countries, regions, or locations in which theiruse is prohibited.

5
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
244 ENThe camera is equipped with wireless LAN and Bluetooth®. Use of these features incountries outside the region of purchase may violate local wireless regulations.
Some countries and regions may prohibit the acquisition of location data without
prior governmental permission. In some Olympus sales areas, the camera may
consequently ship with location data displays disabled.
Each country and region has its own laws and regulations. Check them before travelingand observe them while abroad. Olympus assumes no liability for any failure on thepart of the user to observe local laws and regulations.
Disable Wi-Fi on airplanes and in other locations where their use is prohibited.
g “Disabling Wi-Fi/Bluetooth®” (P. 255, 271)
• Wireless transmissions are vulnerable to interception by third parties. Use wirelessfeatures with this in mind.
• The wireless transceiver is located in the camera grip. Keep it as far away as practicablefrom metal objects.
• When transporting the camera in a bag or other container, be aware that the contentsof the container or the materials of which it is constructed may interfere with wirelesstransmissions, which can prevent the camera connecting to a smartphone.
• Wi-Fi connections increase the drain on the batteries. The connection may be lost during
use if the batteries are low.
• Devices such as microwave ovens and cordless phones that generate radio-frequency
emissions, magnetic fields, or static electricity may slow or otherwise interfere withwireless data transmission.
• Some wireless LAN features are unavailable when the memory card write-protect switch
is in the “LOCK” position.

Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi
Connect the camera and smartphone using a direct Wi-Fi link.

Installing Apps
To connect to the camera from your smartphone via Wi-Fi, use “OLYMPUS Image
Share” (OI.Share).
What You Can Do Using OLYMPUS Image Share• Download pictures from the camera (P. 251)
• Take pictures remotely (P. 253)
• Save camera settings to your smartphone• Update camera firmware
OLYMPUS Image Share is available for download from:http://app.olympus-imaging.com/oishare/• OLYMPUS Image Track (OI.Track)
Use “OLYMPUS Image Track” (OI.Track) to view and manage field sensor logs recordedwith the camera (P. 254).
OLYMPUS Image Track is available for download from:http://app.olympus-imaging.com/oitrack/• OLYMPUS Image Palette (OI.Palette)
Use “OLYMPUS Image Palette” (OI.Palette) to retouch pictures downloaded to thesmartphone. Supported are such features as art filters, the Color Creator, and cropping
pictures.
OLYMPUS Image Palette is available for download from:http://app.olympus-imaging.com/oipalette/

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

In addition to OI.Share, Olympus offers the following apps for viewing sensor logs andretouching pictures:

5

EN 245

Connecting to Smartphones(Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings)

Adjust camera settings for connection to a smartphone. OI.Share (P. 245) is required.
Changes made using OI.Share apply to both Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®. Install the app on
the smartphone before proceeding.
 Readying the Camera (Availability)
Enable Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® on the camera. Note that this is not necessary at default
settings, as Wi-Fi is enabled by default. The camera displays a w icon when Wi-Fi isenabled.

1
2

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

Setup Menu

100%
1

Card Setup

2

X Settings

5

W

Englishs

j±0 k±0
Off

Rec View
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

FirmwareBack

3

Highlight [Availability] using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

Set
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings

100%

Availability

On

Connection Password
Power-off Standby
RAW+JPEG h

Off
JPEG

Reset Settings
Wi-Fi MAC Address
Back

4Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
Q button.

Set
Availability

100%

On

• [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] options will be displayed.

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth is made available
for a connection.

Back

5

Set

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
• A V icon will be displayed.

V icon100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

246 EN

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023

 Pairing the Camera and Smartphone
Follow the steps below when connecting the devices for the first time.
• Adjust pairing settings using OI.Share, not the settings app that is part of the smartphone
operating system.

Launch the copy of the dedicated OI.Share app
previously installed on your smartphone.

2
3

Press the MENU button on the camera to display the camera menus.
Highlight [TWi-Fi Connect] in the q playback
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
• [TWi-Fi Connect] options will be displayed.
• This item is only available when [On] is selected for[Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Availability] in the camera
e setup menu.

4Highlight [Device Connection] using the FG
buttons and press the Q button.

5

Playback Menu

100%
1

R

2

Edit

On

Print Order
Reset Protect
Reset share Order
Copy All
TWi-Fi Connect
Back

Set
TWi-Fi Connect100%• A pairing guide will be displayed in the camera monitor.

Device Connection
Access Point Connection

Set

Back

5

Press the Q button after reading each page of instructions.
• Stop when you reach the following display.
100% w

Bluetooth local nameBluetooth passcode
Wi-Fi SSID
Wi-Fi password

Connection Setup

Scan the QR code, using
the Olympus Image Share
app.

3/3

QR codeConnecting the Camera to External Devices

1

Bluetooth Name
: xxxxxxxxxxx
Bluetooth Passcode : 000000
Wi-Fi SSID
: xxx-x-x-xxxxxxxx
Wi-Fi Password: 00000000

Disconnect• The display lists the Bluetooth local name and passcode, the Wi-Fi SSID andpassword, and a QR code.

EN 247

6

Tap the camera icon at the bottom of the OI.Sharedisplay.
• An [Easy Setup] tab will be displayed.

5
Connecting the Camera to External Devices

7

Following the instructions displayed by OI.Share,scan the QR code to proceed with pairing.
• OI.Share will display a message when settings arecomplete.
• If the smartphone is unable to read the QR code, youwill need to configure the device manually following the
instructions displayed by OI.Share.
- Bluetooth®: In the OI.Share Bluetooth® settings
dialog, select the local name displayed in thecamera monitor and enter the passcode.
- Wi-Fi: Display Wi-Fi settings in the smartphonesettings app and enter the SSID and password
displayed by the camera. For information on thesettings app, see the documentation for yoursmartphone.
• w1 will be displayed when pairing is complete.

8

100% w

Connection Setup

3/3

Scan the QR code, using
the Olympus Image Shareapp.

Bluetooth Name
: xxxxxxxxxxx
Bluetooth Passcode : 000000
Wi-Fi SSID
: xxx-x-x-xxxxxxxx
Wi-Fi Password: 00000000

Disconnect

Once the devices are paired, tap [Import Photos]
in the smartphone OI.Share display to view thepictures on the camera memory card.
• To end the connection, press the camera MENU button
or tap [Disconnect] in the monitor.
• You can also end the connection by turning the camera
off from inside the OI.Share display.

• You can change the connection password generated by the camera (P. 272).

248 EN

Connecting When the Camera Is Off(Power-off Standby)

The camera can be configured not to end the connection to the smartphone whenturned off. The smartphone can then access the camera and automatically download
pictures while the camera is off.
• Before proceeding, confirm that:- [On] is selected for [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Availability] (P. 246),- the camera and smartphone are paired (P. 247), and- a memory card is inserted• The camera performs network-related processing while powering down with [On](enabled) selected for [Power-off Standby]. It may therefore require additional time to
power on immediately after having been turned off.
SelectWhen turning the camera off via the ON/OFF lever, you will be prompted tochoose whether the wireless connection to the smartphone remains active while
the camera is off.

Off

Turning the camera off ends the wireless connection to the smartphone.

On

The wireless connection to the smartphone remains active after the camera isturned off. The smartphone can be used to download pictures from the camera orview the pictures on the camera memory card.

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

Setup Menu

100%
1

Card Setup

2

X Settings
W

Englishs

j±0 k±0
Off

Rec View
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
FirmwareBack

3

Highlight [Power-off Standby] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.

Set
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings

100%

Availability

On

Connection Password
Power-off Standby
RAW+JPEG *1

Off
JPEG

Reset Settings
Wi-Fi MAC Address
Back

4Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the Q button.

Set
Power-off Standby

100%

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

1
2

5

On
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection can beinitiated by a device even whenpower is off.

Back

5

Set

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

EN 249[Select]

If you select [Select] for [Power-off Standby], a confirmation
dialog will be displayed the next time the camera is turned
off. Highlight an option using FG on the arrow pad andpress the Q button.

100%

Power-off Standby
Activate Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Power-off
Standby so images can be imported
while power is off?

Yes
No
Set

5
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
250 ENYes

The camera will turn off, leaving the wireless connection to the smartphone active.

No

The camera will end the connection to the smartphone before turning off.

• If no operations are performed about a minute after the confirmation dialog is displayed,
the camera will end the wireless connection to the smartphone and turn off automatically.
• The connection will end automatically under the conditions listed below. The connection
will be re-enabled when next you turn the camera on.
- 12 hours pass with no data being exchanged with the smartphone.
- The memory card is removed and reinserted.
- The batteries are replaced.

Copying Pictures to Smartphones
Pictures on the camera memory card can be downloaded to a smartphone using eitherof the following methods:• Use the smartphone to select pictures for download.
• Automatically download previously-selected pictures while the camera is off.
g “Selecting Pictures for Sharing (Share Order)” (P. 132)

These methods are described below.
 Downloading Pictures Selected with OI.Share
Use the smartphone to view the pictures on the camera and select pictures fordownload.

Connect to the camera using OI.Share (P. 247).

3

Select pictures and tap the save button.

Tap [Import Photos] in OI.Share.

5• OI.Share will list the images on the camera.
• The memory card can be selected using OI.Share.

2020 / 02 / 15 (3)2020 / 02 / 14 (10)

4K

01:23

01:00

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

1
2

EN 251 Auto Download
Pictures previously marked for sharing on the camera can be downloaded
automatically when the camera is off.

5
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
252 EN

1

Mark pictures for sharing.

2

Choose the operation performed when the camera is off.

3

Turn the camera off.

• Display pictures and mark them for sharing. See “Selecting Pictures for Sharing(Share Order)” (P. 132) for more information.
• Choose an option for [Power-off Standby]. See “Connecting When the Camera Is Off(Power-off Standby)” (P. 249) for more information.
• MENU buttone (setup menu)[Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings][Power-off
Standby]Highlight [On] or [Select] and press the Q button• The selected photos and movies will be uploaded to the smartphone automatically. If
you are using an iOS device, launch OI.Share on the smartphone before turning thecamera off.
• If [Select] is chosen for [Power-off Standby], a confirmation dialog will be displayed(P. 250). Highlight [Yes] and press the Q button.

• Up to 200 pictures on each slot can be marked for sharing at a time.
• iOS devices will not connect to the camera automatically via a router or other wirelessaccess point. Use OI.Share to download pictures.
• Some smartphones may end download on entering sleep mode. Configure thesmartphone to not enter sleep mode.

Remote Photography Using a Smartphone
Use OI.Share to control the camera remotely and take pictures from a smartphone.
• Not all shooting options are available.

1
2

Connect to the camera using OI.Share (P. 247).
Tap [Remote Control] in OI.Share.
• Remote control options will be displayed.

5
Tap the shutter button to take pictures.
• The pictures will be saved to the memory card.

Shutter button

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

3

EN 253

Adding position information to images
You can add GPS tags to images that were taken while the GPS log was saving bytransferring the GPS log saved on the smartphone to the camera.

1

Before taking pictures with the camera, launch OI.Track on the smartphone tobegin saving the GPS log.
• Before starting a GPS track log, you will need to connect once via OI.Track andsynchronize the clock.
• You can use the phone or other apps while the GPS log is saving. Do not terminate
OI.Track.

5
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
254 EN

2

Once you have finished taking pictures with the camera, end tracking in
OI.Share.

3

Tap the V icon in the camera monitor to connect to the smartphone.

4

Upload the GPS log to the camera using OI.Track.

• You can also connect by selecting [TWi-Fi Connect] in the q playback menu
(P. 247).
• The GPS log will be used to add location data to any pictures taken after you
launched OI.Track in Step 1.
• g is displayed on images to which position information has been added.

• Addition of location information can only be used with smartphones that have a GPSfunction.
• Position information cannot be added to movies.

Ending the Connection
End the connection to the smartphone. The camera uses Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® whenconnecting to smartphones. The use of these features may be prohibited in somecountries or regions, in which case they should be disabled.
 Ending the Current Connection

1

Use the [Power Off] slider in the OI.Share or
OI.Track settings dialog.
• Alternatively, you can press the camera MENU button
and tap [Disconnect] in the monitor.
100% w1

Device Connection

Connect to a device.

5

E-M1MarkIII

MENU button

2

Disconnect

Select [Off] for [Power-off Standby] to disable the “auto upload while off”
feature.
• MENU button
e setup menu
Standby][Off][Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings][Power-off

 Disabling Wi-Fi/Bluetooth®

1
2

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

Setup Menu

100%
1

Card Setup

2

X Settings
W

Englishs

j±0 k±0
Off

Rec View
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
FirmwareBack

3

Highlight [Availability] using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

Set
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings

100%

Availability

On

Connection Password
Power-off Standby
RAW+JPEG h

Off
JPEG

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

Disconnect

Reset Settings
Wi-Fi MAC Address
Back

4Highlight [Off] using the FG buttons and press the
Q button.

Set
Availability

100%

Off
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth is completely
deactivated and a connection
cannot be initiated.

Back

Set

EN 255

Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi
Connect the camera and computer via Wi-Fi. Using Wi-Fi, the camera can connect via
a router to a computer on a household network or the like.

Installing Software
Use “OLYMPUS Capture” to connect the camera and computer via Wi-Fi.
OLYMPUS Capture

Use “OLYMPUS Capture” to automatically download and view pictures taken with acamera connected via Wi-Fi to the same network as the computer. To learn more or to
download the software, visit the website below. When downloading the software, be
prepared to provide the camera serial number.

5
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
256 EN

http://app.olympus-imaging.com/olympuscapture/

Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. System requirements andinstallation instructions are available at the website above.

Readying the Computer (Windows)
If Windows is unable to detect a camera connected via a router or access point, follow
the steps below to register the device manually.
 Windows 8/Windows 10

1
2

Click the [Start] button on the computer desktop to display the Start menu.

3

Click [Devices] to display options for [Bluetooth &other devices].

4
5

Click [Add Bluetooth or other devices].

6

Click [E-M1 Mark III].

Click(Settings) to display [Windows Settings]
options.

• An [Add a device] window will open and [E-M1 Mark III] will be displayed after a shortpause.
• When a message is displayed stating the preparation is complete, click [Done].

 Windows 7

1

Launch Windows Explorer and select “Network”.

2

Right-click [E-M1 Mark III] and select [Install].

• [E-M1 Mark III] will be displayed in Windows Explorer.
• A message will be displayed when device registration is complete.
• Check that the device is registered in the Device Manager.

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

Click [+ Everything else].

5

EN 257

Pairing the Computer with the Camera(New Link)

The camera and computer must be paired in order to connect. Up to four computers
can be paired with the camera at a time. To pair a computer with the camera, connect it
via USB. Pairing need only be performed once per computer.

1

After confirming that the camera is off, connect it to the computer using theUSB cable.
USB connector

Small connector

5Connecting the Camera to External Devices

USB port

USB cable• The locations of USB ports vary from computer to computer. See the documentation
provided with the computer for information on USB ports.

2

Turn the camera on.

3

Highlight [0] using FG on the arrow pad andpress the Q button.

• The camera will display a message prompting you to identify the device to which the
USB cable is connected.
• If the message is not displayed, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 190) in G Custom
Menu S.
• If the batteries are very low, the camera will not display a message when connecting
to a computer. Be sure the batteries are charged.
USB

100%

Storage
MTP
PC RAW0
USB PD
Exit
Set

4

Launch the copy of “OLYMPUS Capture” installedon the computer.
• After starting up, “OLYMPUS Capture” will prompt you
to choose the connection type.

USB Connection

Wi-Fi Connection
Create new link

258 EN5

Click the [+] to the right of [Create new link].
• If nothing happens, reconnect the camera.

USB Connection

Wi-Fi Connection
Create new link+

• Enter the name that will be used on the camera to identify
the computer. The default is the computer’s “Computer
Name”.
• The name used on the camera can be up to 15
characters long.

Create new link
Pair camera with this PC?

PC Name:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Settings

Click [Settings] in “OLYMPUS Capture”.
• When a message is displayed stating that pairing iscomplete, disconnect the camera as instructed.

Create new link
Pair camera with this PC?

PC Name:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Settings[Settings]• Repeat the above steps to pair the camera with each additional computer.
• The pairing information stored on the camera can be viewed and deleted using“OLYMPUS Capture”.

Cancel5Connecting the Camera to External Devices

6

Cancel

EN 259Adjusting Wi-Fi Settings(TWi-Fi Connect)

Adjust settings for connection to the network to which the paired computer belongs.
Before the camera can connect to the computer via Wi-Fi, it must be configured forconnection to the network via the Wi-Fi router or access point. Multiple network profiles
can be stored on the camera and recalled as desired. [TWi-Fi Connect] settings canbe adjusted via the following methods:

5
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
260 EN

Connect by WPS

Configure the camera for automatic connection (P. 262).
To connect using a WPS router or access point, simply press thedevice’s WPS button.
[PBC Method]: Connect using only the router WPS button. The
camera connects automatically when the button is pressed.
[PIN Method]: The camera connects in PIN mode. Enter the camera
PIN on the router to connect.

Connect from
Access Point List

Choose the network from a list (P. 266).
The camera will search for available networks; to connect, select a
network from the list and enter the network password.

Connect manually

Adjust connection settings manually (P. 264).
To connect, enter the network name (SSID) and other settings.

• WPS connections require a WPS-compatible router or access point.
• Connecting via WPS in PIN mode requires that the router itself be connected to aadministrator computer from which the PIN can be entered.
• Manual connection requires that you have information on the network to which you areconnecting.
• The camera can connect via routers or access points of the following types:- Standard: IEEE802.11a/b/g/n/ac- Band: 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz- Security: WPA2
• The camera can store settings for up to eight networks. The camera will automaticallyconnect to networks to which it has previously connected.
• Each new connection after the eighth overwrites settings for the connection that has beenleft unused for the longest period of time.
• Adding a network profile for an access point with the same MAC address as existing
profile overwrites the settings for the existing profile.
• For information on using routers or access points, see the documentation provided withthe device.
• Network profiles are not reset when you select [Full] for [Reset / Custom Modes](P. 141) > [Reset] in W Shooting Menu 1. To reset network settings, use [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Settings] (P. 273) > [Reset Settings] in the e setup menu.

 Enabling Camera Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings)
Before connecting to a network via Wi-Fi, you will need to enable Wi-Fi on the camera.
Note that this is not necessary at default settings, as Wi-Fi is enabled by default.
Proceed to page 262.

1
2

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

Setup Menu

100%
1

Card Setup

2

X Settings
W

Englishs

j±0 k±0
Off

Rec View
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
FirmwareBack

3

Highlight [Availability] using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

Set
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings

100%

Availability

On

Connection Password
Power-off Standby

JPEG

Reset Settings
Wi-Fi MAC Address
Back

4Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
Q button.

On• [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] options will be displayed.

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth is made available
for a connection.

Back

5

Set
Availability

100%

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

Set

5
Connecting the Camera to External Devices

RAW+JPEG h

OffEN 261

 Connecting via WPS (Connect by WPS)
Connect using the WPS feature on the router or access point.

1
2

Press the MENU button on the camera to display the camera menus.
Highlight [TWi-Fi Connect] in the q playback
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
• [TWi-Fi Connect] options will be displayed.
• This item is only available when [On] is selected for[Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Availability] in the camera
e setup menu.

3Highlight [Access Point Connection] using the FG
buttons and press the Q button.

Playback Menu

100%
1

R

2

Edit
Reset Protect
Reset share Order
Copy All
TWi-Fi Connect

Back

Device Connection
Access Point Connection

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

Set

Back

4

Highlight [Connect by WPS] using the FG buttons
and press the Q button.

100% w

Access Point Connection

Connect by WPS
Connect from Access Point List
Connect manually

Back

5

Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the Q button.
• If you selected [PBC Method], press the WPS button on
the router or access point.
• Press the camera Q button to start the connection.
• Some time may be required for connection after the
button is pressed.
• If you selected [PIN Method], the camera will display
a PIN; enter it on the router or access point. Press thecamera Q button when the router is ready to connect.

100% w

Set
Connect by WPS

Connect by pressing WPS buttonon the access point.
PBC Method
PIN Method
Back100% w

Set

PIN Method
12345678

Enter PIN code displayed aboveon the access point.
Connection starts
after you press Q.
Back

262 EN

Set
TWi-Fi Connect

100%• [Access Point Connection] options will be displayed.

5On

Print Order

Connect

6

If the camera is able to connect, the network will
be displayed with a check (v) next to the network
name.
• If the camera has been paired with more than one
computer, you will be prompted to choose a computer
before the network is displayed. Highlight the desired
computer using the FG buttons and press the Q
button.
• The camera can be used only with the selectedcomputer. To select a different computer, you must firstterminate the current connection.
• If the connection fails, the camera will display amessage to that effect, followed by the options shown in
Step 5. Repeat Steps 5–6.

100% w

Access Point Connectionw

SSID_001
Connect by WPS
Connect manually

Close

R/

Set

100% w

5
Connection failed

Press the Q button to exit to the shooting display.
• The camera will return to the standard shooting display.
A w icon will be displayed in the monitor.

w icon100% w

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

7

EN 263 Connecting Manually (Manual Connections)
Adjust network settings manually. You will need to provide:SSID

The network name (SSID).

Authentication

The type of security used on the network.

Password

The password for connection to a secured network.

IP Address Assign

Choose whether the camera IP address is assigned automatically by
the network DHCP server.

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway

5
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
264 EN

These fields are required when the IP address is assigned manually.
The settings used vary with the network.

DNS

1
2

Press the MENU button on the camera to display the camera menus.
Highlight [TWi-Fi Connect] in the q playback
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
• [TWi-Fi Connect] options will be displayed.
• This item is only available when [On] is selected for[Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Availability] in the camera
e setup menu.

3Highlight [Access Point Connection] using the FG
buttons and press the Q button.

Playback Menu

100%
1

R

2

Edit

On

Print Order
Reset Protect
Reset share Order
Copy All
TWi-Fi Connect
Back

100%

• [Access Point Connection] options will be displayed.

Set
TWi-Fi Connect

Device Connection
Access Point Connection

Set

Back

4

Highlight [Connect manually] using the FG
buttons and press the Q button.

100% w

Access Point Connection

Connect by WPS
Connect from Access Point List
Connect manually

Back

Set

5

Highlight items using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.
• Options for the selected item will be displayed.

Connect manually

100% w

SSID

SSID_001

Authentication
IP Address Assign

None
Auto(DHCP)

Start Connection
CancelSet

SSID

Enter the network SSID.

Authentication

Select the type of security used on the network. Choose from
[None] and [WPA2].

Password

If you selected [WPA2] for [Authentication], enter the network
password.

Choose from [Auto(DHCP)] and [Manual]. Automatic IP address
IP Address Assign assignment requires a network with a DHCP server configured tosupply IP addresses automatically.
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway

These fields are required when [Manual] is selected for [IPAddress Assign].

DNS

6Highlight [Start Connection] using the FG buttons
and press the Q button.

Connect manually

100% w

SSID

SSID_001

Authentication
IP Address Assign

None
Auto(DHCP)

Start Connection
Cancel7

If the camera is able to connect, the network will
be displayed with a check (v) next to the network
name.
• If the camera has been paired with more than one computer,
you will be prompted to choose a computer before the
network is displayed. Highlight the desired computer using
the FG buttons and press the Q button.
• The camera can be used only with the selectedcomputer. To select a different computer, you must firstterminate the current connection.
• If the connection fails, the camera will display amessage to that effect, followed by the options shown in
Step 6. Repeat Steps 5–6.

100% wSet
Access Point Connectionw

SSID_001
Connect by WPS
Connect manually

Close

R/

Set

5
Connecting the Camera to External Devices

IP Address

100% w

Connection failed

EN 265

8

Press the Q button to exit to the shooting display.
• Standard shooting indicators will be displayed. A w
icon will appear in the monitor.

w icon100% w

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

1:02:03

250 F5.6 0.01023

 Choosing a Network from a List (Connect from Access Point List)
The camera will search for available networks and display them in a list from which you
can choose the network to which you wish to connect.

5
Connecting the Camera to External Devices

1
2

Press the MENU button on the camera to display the camera menus.
Highlight [TWi-Fi Connect] in the q playback
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
• [TWi-Fi Connect] options will be displayed.
• This item is only available when [On] is selected for[Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Availability] in the camera
e setup menu.

3Highlight [Access Point Connection] using the FG
buttons and press the Q button.

1

R

2

Edit

On

Print Order
Reset Protect
Reset share Order
Copy All
TWi-Fi Connect
Back

Set
TWi-Fi Connect

100%• [Access Point Connection] options will be displayed.

Device Connection
Access Point Connection

Set

Back

4

Highlight [Connect from Access Point List] using theFG buttons and press the Q button.

100% w

Access Point Connection

Connect by WPS• A list of available networks will be displayed.

Connect from Access Point List
Connect manually

Set

Back

5

Highlight the desired network using the FG
buttons and press the Q button.
• If the network is password-protected, you will beprompted to enter a password. Enter the password andpress the Q button.
• Press the I button to display [Detail Settings] for thehighlighted network. You can enter an IP address andadjust other settings manually.
• Press the R button to repeat the search and update the
network list.

266 EN

Playback Menu

100%

100% w Connect from Access Point Listw

SSID_001

Back

R/

Connect

6

If the camera is able to connect, the network will be displayed with a check(v) next to the network name.
• Password-protected networks are indicated by a t icon.
• If the camera has been paired with more than one computer, you will be prompted tochoose a computer before the network is displayed. Highlight the desired computer
using the FG buttons and press the Q button.
• The camera can be used only with the selected computer. To select a different
computer, you must first terminate the current connection.
w• If the connection fails, the camera will display amessage to that effect, followed by the options shown in
Step 5. Repeat Steps 5–6.
100%

Connection failed

5
Press the Q button to exit to the shooting display.
• Standard shooting indicators will be displayed. A w
icon will appear in the monitor.

w icon100% w

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023$ Connecting to Previously-Selected Networks• The camera will automatically reconnect to previously-selected networks when you
select [Access Point Connection] via the V icon. You will not be required to supply apassword.
• If multiple networks are available, the camera will connect first to the most recently-usednetwork.
• Once the camera has connected, it will display a list of available networks with the current
network shown by a check mark v.
• To connect to a different network, highlight it in the list and press the Q button.
• If the camera has been paired with more than one computer on the network, you will beprompted to choose a computer before the network list is displayed. Highlight the desired
computer using the FG buttons and press the Q button.

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

7

EN 267

Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken
Take pictures and upload them to a computer on the same network as the camera.
Before proceeding, connect the camera and computer as described in “Pairing theComputer with the Camera (New Link)” (P. 258).

1

Launch “OLYMPUS Capture” on destination
computer.
• If prompted to choose a connection type, click [Wi-Fi
Connection].
• The computer will display the message, [Camera
connected] when the camera is detected.

USB Connection

Wi-Fi Connection
Create new link

Exit

[Wi-Fi Connection]• The camera will display the message shown at rightwhen a connection is established.

5

PC connection started

100%

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

Camera is connected to PC.
Recorded images are automaticallytransferred to PC.

Close

2

Configure “OLYMPUS Capture” to automaticallydownload pictures as they are taken.
• Select the source card slot (1 or 2) and the type of
pictures (JPEG photos, RAW photos, or movies) to be
downloaded.
• Choose a destination for the downloaded pictures.

Select file types to export
Slot 1
Slot 2
Save in

Original
Files waiting

The “OLYMPUS Capture”
control window

3

Take pictures using camera controls.
• The pictures will be uploaded to the computer after they are saved to the camera
memory card.
Image upload• A p (“image upload”) icon will be displayed while
upload is in progress.
wp• The camera will upload only photos and movies
recorded while the camera and computer areconnected. Any pictures taken before Wi-Fi wasenabled on the camera will not be uploaded.
100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

268 EN

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023

5Connecting the Camera to External Devices• While the camera is connected to a network:- Sleep mode is disabled- Interval-timer photography is not available- Some restrictions apply to the options available during playback• [PC connection ended] options will be displayed when the camera’s connection to the
network ends. Upload of any remaining data will resume when the connection is reestablished. Note, however, that remaining data will not be uploaded if:- The Wi-Fi connection is ended using camera controls- The camera is turned off- The source memory card is removed• The upload queue for each card can contain no more than 3000 pictures.
• If “OLYMPUS Capture” displays the message [This application is unable to find a camerain the camera control mode.], check:- that the camera has been paired with the computer,- that you selected the correct computer when connecting to the network, and- that the camera is registered with the computer (Windows only). g “Readying theComputer (Windows)” (P. 257)

EN 269Ending the Connection
End the Wi-Fi connection. The use of Wi-Fi may be prohibited in some countries orregions, in which case Wi-Fi should be disabled.
 Ending the Current Connection

1

Tap V in the camera monitor.

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

5

YF
4K

30p

P

Connecting the Camera to External Devices
270 EN• You will be prompted to confirm whether you wish to
disconnect.
• The network SSID is shown in the display.

250 F5.6 0.0

100% w

1:02:03

1023

Access Point Connection

SSID: SSID_001
Wi-Fi is running
Disconnect
Maintain
Back

Set

2

Highlight [Disconnect] using FG on the arrow pad and press the Q button.

3

To reconnect, tap V or select [TWi-Fi Connect] > [Access Point
Connection] in the q playback menu and press the Q button.

• The camera will terminate the connection and exit to the shooting display.
• A confirmation dialog will be displayed if data remain to be uploaded. To terminate theconnection, highlight [Yes] and press the Q button.

• The camera will automatically reconnect to previously-selected networks.
• To connect to a new network, highlight [Maintain] in Step 2 and press the Q button.
Choose from a list of available networks and adjust settings as described in “Choosing a
Network from a List (Connect from Access Point List)” (P. 266).
• If you turn the camera off while upload is in progress, you will be prompted to choose
whether to power the camera down and terminate the Wi-Fi connection immediately or to
power the camera down only after upload is complete.

 Disabling Wi-Fi/Bluetooth®

1
2

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

Setup Menu

100%
1

Card Setup

2

X Settings• [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] options will be displayed.

W

Englishs

j±0 k±0
Off

Rec View
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
FirmwareBack

3

Highlight [Availability] using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

Set
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings

100%

Availability

On

Connection Password
Power-off Standby
RAW+JPEG h

Off
JPEG

Reset Settings

5

Wi-Fi MAC Address
Back

Highlight [Off] using the FG buttons and press the
Q button.

Availability

100%

Off
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth is completely
deactivated and a connection
cannot be initiated.

Back

Set

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

4

Set

EN 271

Network Settings
Change the password used for Wi-Fi connections from a smartphone or restore default
Wi-Fi settings used for connection to a computer. The latter are not restored when acamera reset is performed and can only be restored as described below.

Changing Passwords(Connection Password)

Generate new passwords for use when connecting to the camera from a smartphone
via Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®.

12

5

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

Setup Menu

100%
1

Card Setup

2

X Settings• [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] options will be displayed.

W

Englishs

j±0 k±0
Off

Rec View

Connecting the Camera to External Devices
272 EN

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
FirmwareBack

3

Highlight [Connection Password] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.
• The current password will be displayed.

Set
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings

100%

Availability

On

Connection Password
Power-off Standby
RAW+JPEG h

Off
JPEG

Reset Settings
Wi-Fi MAC Address
Back

4

Press the R (movie) button.

5

Press the Q button again to exit the [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] menu.

Set• The password changes each time the button is pressed.
• Both the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® passwords change.
• Press the Q button to exit the [Connection Password] display.
• Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
• After changing the password, you will need to update smartphone connection settings(P. 246).

Restoring Default Wi-Fi/Bluetooth® Settings(Reset Settings)

Restore default Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® settings. All settings, including those forconnection via a router and pairing information for the computers on the network, arereset.

1
2

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

Setup Menu

100%
1

Card Setup

2

X Settings• [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] options will be displayed.

W

Englishs

j±0 k±0
Off

Rec View
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
FirmwareBack

3

Highlight [Reset Settings] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.

Set
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings

100%

Availability

On

Connection Password
Power-off Standby
RAW+JPEG h

JPEGReset Settings
Wi-Fi MAC Address
Back

4Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.

100%

Yes
No
Back

5

Set
Reset Settings
Reset all Wi-Fi and Bluetoothsettings?

• Settings will be reset and the camera will exit to the[Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] display.
• Both the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® passwords will be reset.

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

5

Set

Connecting the Camera to External Devices• [Reset Settings] options will be displayed.

Off

EN 273

Connecting to Computers via USB
Connect the camera to a computer using the USB cable.

Compatible Computers
Connect the camera to the computer using the supplied USB cable.
• Note that even if the computer is equipped with USB connectors, operation is notguaranteed with:USB expansion ports, computers not running the operating system with which they
shipped, or homemade computers.

5• The camera can be connected to computers that meet the following system requirements.
Windows: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10
Mac:
OS X versions 10.9 – 10.11, macOS versions v10.12 – v10.14

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

Installing Software
Install the following software to access the camera while it is connected directly to thecomputer via USB.
OLYMPUS Capture

Use “OLYMPUS Capture” to automatically download and view pictures as they aretaken or control the camera remotely. To learn more or to download the software,
visit the website below. When downloading the software, be prepared to provide thecamera serial number.
http://app.olympus-imaging.com/olympuscapture/

Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. System requirements andinstallation instructions are available at the website above.
Olympus Workspace

This computer application is used to download, view, and manage photos and movies
recorded with the camera. When editing RAW data in the Olympus Workspace(Ver. 1.1 or later), high-speed processing using the camera engine has been enabled.
It can also be used to update the camera firmware. The software can be downloaded
from the website below. Be prepared to provide the camera serial number when
downloading the software.
https://support.olympus-imaging.com/owdownload/

Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. System requirements andinstallation instructions are available at the website above.

274 ENUploading Pictures as They Are Taken(0)

Connect the camera to a computer via USB to upload pictures as they area taken.
You can take pictures using the controls on the camera body or while controlling thecamera remotely from the computer.

1

After confirming that the camera is off, connect it to the computer using theUSB cable.
USB connector

Small connector

5

USB cable

2

Turn the camera on.

3

Highlight [0] using FG on the arrow pad andpress the Q button.

• The camera will display a message prompting you to identify the device to which the
USB cable is connected.
• If the message is not displayed, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 190) in G Custom
Menu S.
• If the batteries are very low, the camera will not display a message when connecting
to a computer. Be sure the batteries are charged.
USB

100%

Storage
MTP
PC RAW0
USB PD
Exit
Set

4

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

USB port• The locations of USB ports vary from computer to computer. See the documentation
provided with the computer for information on USB ports.

Launch the copy of “OLYMPUS Capture” installed on the computer.
• When prompted to choose the connection type, click[USB Connection].

USB Connection

Wi-Fi Connection
Create new link

Exit

[USB Connection]

EN 2755Connecting the Camera to External Devices
276 EN

5

Configure “OLYMPUS Capture” for download.

6

Take pictures using camera or computer controls.

• Choose a destination for the downloaded pictures.
• The pictures will be downloaded to the computer according to the options chosen.

• The computer cannot be used to change the camera shooting mode.
• The computer cannot be used to delete pictures from the memory cards inserted in thecamera.
• The camera display frame rate may drop if the view through the camera lens is displayed
simultaneously both on the computer and in the camera monitor.
• See online help for more information on using the software.
• The connection to the computer will end if you:- exit “OLYMPUS Capture”,- insert or remove memory cards, or- turn the camera off.

Connecting the Camera for High-Speed RAW Processing(M PC RAW)

1

After confirming that the camera is off, connect it to the computer using theUSB cable.

2

Turn the camera on.

3

Highlight [M PC RAW] using FG on the arrow
pad and press the Q button.

• The camera will display a message prompting you to identify the device to which the
USB cable is connected.
• If the message is not displayed, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 190) in G Custom
Menu S.
• If the batteries are very low, the camera will not display a message when connecting
to a computer. Be sure the batteries are charged.
100%

USB
Storage
MTP
PC RAW0
USB PD
Exit
Set

4

Launch the copy of “Olympus Workspace” installed on the computer.

5

Choose the location containing the pictures to be processed.

• Click the [USB RAW Data Edit] icon.
• You can choose either a memory card inserted in the connected camera, or a folder
on the computer.
• Only RAW pictures in the chosen location taken with the connected camera oranother camera of the same model can be selected.
• After choosing the source, click [OK].

6

Process RAW images.
• Adjustments can be made to the shooting settings available on the camera and RAW
pictures processed accordingly.
• The processed copies will be saved in JPEG format.
• Enabling USB RAW data editing cancels any changes previously made in the edit
window.
• USB RAW data editing is not available when two or more cameras are connected.

Copying Pictures to the Computer(Storage/MTP)

When connected to a computer, the camera can function as external storage in muchsame way as a hard drive or other external storage device. Data can be copied fromthe camera to the computer.

After confirming that the camera is off, connect it to the computer using theUSB cable.

2

Turn the camera on.

3

Highlight [Storage] or [MTP] using FG on thearrow pad and press the Q button.

• The camera will display a message prompting you to identify the device to which the
USB cable is connected.
• If the message is not displayed, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 190) in G Custom
Menu S.
• If the batteries are very low, the camera will not display a message when connecting
to a computer. Be sure the batteries are charged.

[Storage]: The camera functions as a card reader.
[MTP]: The camera functions as a portable device.

USB

100%

Storage
MTP
PC RAW0
USB PDExit
Set

4

The camera will connect to the computer as new storage device.
• Data transfer is not guaranteed in the following environments, even if your computeris equipped with a USB port.
Computers with a USB port added by means of an extension card, etc., computers
without a factory-installed OS, or home-built computers• Camera functions cannot be used while the camera is connected to the computer.
• If the computer fails to detect the camera, disconnect and reconnect the USB cable.

5
Connecting the Camera to External Devices

1

EN 277Powering the Camera via USB (USB Power Delivery)
Mobile batteries or USB AC adapters conforming to the USB Power Delivery (USB PD)
standard can be used to power the camera. The devices must:
Standard: Conform to the USB Power Delivery (USB PD) standard
Output: Be rated for an output of 9 V 3 A, 15 V 2 A, or 15 V 3 A• This feature cannot be used at battery levels of 10% or less.
• The camera cannot draw power via USB while an optional HLD-9 power battery holder is
attached (P. 24).

1

After confirming that the camera is off, use the USB cable to connect it to thedevice.
USB connector

Mobile battery or other USB
device5Connecting the Camera to External Devices

Type C

USB port

Type CUSB cable• The supplied USB cable (CB-USB11) cannot be used for USB Power Delivery (USBPD).
• The method used for connection varies from device to device. See the documentation
provided with the device for details.
• You may be unable to use USB Power Delivery (USB PD) with some USB devices.
See the manual supplied with the USB device.

2

Turn the camera on.

3

Highlight [USB PD] using FG on the arrow padand press the Q button.

• The camera will display a message prompting you to identify the device to which the
USB cable is connected.
• If the message is not displayed, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 190) in G Custom
Menu S.
• If the batteries are very low, the display will remain blank when the camera isconnected to the USB device. Be sure the batteries are charged.

• The camera will draw power from the connected USB
device.

100%

USB
Storage
MTP
PC RAW0
USB PD
Exit
Set

278 EN

Connecting to TVs or External Displays via HDMI
Pictures can be displayed on televisions connected to the camera via HDMI. Use thetelevision to display pictures to an audience. The TV remote can be used to control thedisplay while the television is connected to the camera. No app or other software isrequired.

5• HDMI cables are available from third-party suppliers. Use an HDMI-certified cable.

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

You can also film movies while the camera is connected to an external monitor or video
recorder via HDMI.

EN 279Viewing Pictures on a TV

(HDMI)

Photos and movies can be viewed on a high-definition TV connected directly to thecamera by means of an HDMI cable. A remote control can be used to operate thedisplay while it is connected to the camera.
 HDMI Output
Choose the signal output to the HDMI device. You can adjust movie frame size andframe rate to match TV specifications and the video standards supported in yourcountry or region. Match output settings to the input settings on the TV.

5
Connecting the Camera to External Devices

Output Size

The format for the video signal output via the HDMI connector canbe chosen from the options below.
• [C4K]: 4K Digital Cinema (4096 × 2160)• [4K]: 4K (3840 × 2160) priority• [1080p]: Full High Definition (1080p) priority• [720p]: High Definition (720p) priority• [480p/576p]: 480p/576p

HDMI Control

When the camera is in playback mode, it can be operated using the
television remote control (P. 282). Choose from [Off] and [On]. When[On] is selected, the camera can be used for playback only.

Output Frame Rate

Choose a frame rate for the signal output via the HDMI connector
according to whether the television supports NTSC (60p) or PAL(50p).

• [HDMI Control] and [Output Frame Rate] settings cannot be changed while the camera isconnected to another device via HDMI.
• Audio can be output only on devices that support the audio format selected with thecamera.
• The options available via [HDMI Control] vary with the device connected. See the device
manual for details.

1
2

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Display G Custom Menu S (Disp/8/PC).

D4. Disp/8/PC

100%
1
2

D1 8
D2 HDMI
D3 USB Mode
D4
E1
E2
E3
F

Set

Back

3

Highlight [HDMI] using FG on the arrow pad andpress the I button.

D4. Disp/8/PC

100%
1
2

D1 8
D2 HDMI
D3 USB Mode
D4
E1
E2
E3
F

Back

280 EN

On
Auto

On
Auto

Set

4

Highlight an item using the FG buttons and pressthe I button.

HDMI

100%

Output Size
HDMI Control
Output Frame Rate

1080p
Off
60p Priority

Back

5

Highlight the desired option using the FG buttons
and press the Q button.

Set
HDMI

100%

Output Size
HDMI Control
Output Frame Rate

• Repeat Steps 4 and 5 as required.

C4K 1080p
Off
4K
60p
Priority
1080p
720p
480p/576p

Back

6

Set

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

1

After confirming that the camera is off, connect it to the TV using an HDMI
cable.
HDMI cable(Connect to the HDMI connector on
the TV.)

HDMI connector
Type D

Type A

2

Switch the TV to HDMI input and turn the camera on.
• The TV will show the contents of the camera monitor. Press the q button to view
pictures.

• If [On] is selected for [HDMI Control] (P. 282), the camera monitor will turn off when an
HDMI cable is connected.
• For information on switching to HDMI input, see the manual provided with the TV.
• Depending on TV settings, the image may be cropped and some indicators may not be
visible.
• HDMI cannot be used while the camera is connected to a computer via USB.
• If [Record Mode] is selected for [n HDMI Output] (P. 164) > [Output Mode] in then video menu, the signal will be output at the current movie frame size. No image will be
displayed if the TV does not support the selected frame size.
• If [4K] or [C4K] is selected, 1080p priority format will be used during still photography.

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

 Connecting the Camera to a TV
Connect the camera using an HDMI cable.

EN 281

Using a TV Remote(HDMI Control)

When connected to a TV via an HDMI cable, the camera can be operated using the
television remote control.
• The television must support HDMI control. See the television manual for more information.
On

The television remote control can be used to operate the camera in playback mode.
The camera can be used for playback only.

OffThe television remote control cannot be used to operate the camera. Indicators
appear only in the TV display.

1
2

5

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Highlight [HDMI] in G Custom Menu S (Disp/8/
PC) and press I on the arrow pad.

12

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

D1 8
D2 HDMI
D3 USB Mode
D4
E1
E2
E3
F

On
Auto

Set

Back

3

Highlight [HDMI Control] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.

HDMI

100%

Output Size
HDMI Control
Output Frame Rate

Back

4

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
Q button.

Set

Output Size
HDMI Control
Output Frame Rate

Back

5
6

1080p
Off
60p Priority

HDMI

100%

1080p
Off
Off
OnPriority
60p

Set

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
Connect the camera and TV via HDMI.
• Play pictures back using the TV remote. Follow the guide displayed on the TV screen.
• In single-frame playback, use the “red” button to choose the information displayed
and the “green” button to switch to the index display.

• Some functions may be unavailable on some televisions.
• The camera monitor turns off while the TV is used for playback.

282 EN

D4. Disp/8/PC

100%

6 Cautions
Battery and charger

6
Cautions• The camera uses a single Olympus lithium-ion battery. Never use any battery other thangenuine OLYMPUS batteries.
• The camera’s power consumption varies widely with usage and other conditions.
• As the following consume a lot of power even without shooting, the battery will be drained
quickly.
• Performing auto focus repeatedly by pressing the shutter button halfway in shootingmode.
• Displaying images on the monitor for a prolonged period.
• When connected to a computer.
• Leaving wireless LAN/Bluetooth® enabled.
• When using a drained battery, the camera may turn off without the low battery warning
being displayed.
• The battery will not be fully charged at the time of purchase. Charge the battery using theprovided charger before use.
• Remove the batteries before putting the camera into storage for periods of a month or
more. Leaving the batteries in the camera for extended periods shortens their lives,potentially rendering them unusable.
• The normal charging time using the supplied charger is approximately 2 hours (estimated).
• Do not attempt to use chargers not specifically designated for use with the supplied
battery, or to use batteries not specifically designated for use with the supplied charger.
• There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced with the incorrect battery type.
• Dispose of the used battery following the instructions “CAUTION” (P. 323) in the
instruction manual.

EN 283

Using your charger abroad• The charger can be used in most home electrical sources within the range of 100 V to240 V AC (50/60 Hz) around the world. However, depending on the country or area you
are in, the AC wall outlet may be shaped differently and the charger may require a plug
adapter to match the wall outlet.
• Do not use commercially available travel adapters as the charger may malfunction.

Usable cards
In this manual, all storage devices are referred to as “cards”. The
following types of SD memory card (commercially available) canbe used with this camera: SD, SDHC, and SDXC. For the latest
information, please visit the Olympus website.

6

SD card write protect switch

Cautions

The SD card body has a write protect switch. Setting the switch to“LOCK” prevents data being written to the card. Return the switch tothe unlock position enable writing.

LOCK• The data in the card will not be erased completely even after formatting the card ordeleting the data. When discarding, destroy the card to prevent leakage of personal
information.
• Access to some playback functions and the like may be restricted when the write-protect
switch is in the “LOCK” position.

284 EN

Interchangeable lenses
Choose a lens according to the scene and your creative intent. Use
lenses designed exclusively for the Micro Four Thirds system andbearing the M.ZUIKO DIGITAL label or the symbol shown at right.
With an adapter, you can also use Four Thirds System and OM Systemlenses. The optional adapter is required.
• When you attach or remove the body cap and lens from the camera, keep the lens mounton the camera pointed downward. This helps prevent dust and other foreign matter fromgetting inside the camera.
• Do not remove the body cap or attach the lens in dusty places.
• Do not point the lens attached to the camera toward the sun. This may cause the camera
to malfunction or even ignite due to the magnifying effect of sunlight focusing through thelens.
• Be careful not to lose the body cap and rear cap.
• Attach the body cap to the camera to prevent dust from getting inside when no lens is
attached.

Lens
Micro Four Thirds system
lens
Four Thirds system lens
OM System lenses

CameraMicro Four Thirds
system camera

Attachment

AF

Metering

Yes

Yes

Yes

Attachment possible
with mount adapter

Yes*1

Yes

No

Yes*2

6
Cautions

 Lens and camera combinations*1 Not available during movie recording or starry sky AF.
*2 Accurate metering is not possible.

EN 285

MF Clutch Lenses
The “MF clutch” (manual focus clutch) mechanism on MF clutch lenses can be used toswitch between auto and manual focus simply by repositioning the focus ring.
• Check the position of the MF clutch before shooting.
• Sliding the focus ring to the AF/MF position at the end of the lens selects autofocus, whilesliding it to the MF position closer to the camera body selects manual focus, regardless ofthe focus mode chosen with the camera.

Cautions

AF/MF

MF

AF/MF

16

5 3 ∞ mm
12
0.5

11 8 5.6 5.6 8 11
16

1
2
0.5

11 8 5.6 5.6 8 11166286 EN

5 3 ∞ mm

Focus distances visible

16

Focus ringMF

• Selecting [Inoperative] for [MF Clutch] (P. 184) in G Custom Menu I disables manual
focus even when the MF clutch is in the MF position.

Optional Accessories
Designated External Flash Units
When using an optional flash unit designed for use with the camera, you can choose
the flash mode using camera controls and take pictures with the flash. See thedocumentation provided with the flash unit for information on flash features and theiruse.
Choose a flash unit to suit your needs, taking into consideration such factors as
the output required and whether the unit supports macro photography. Flash units
designed to communicate with the camera support a variety of flash modes, including
TTL auto and super FP. Flash units can be mounted on the camera hot shoe orconnected using a cable (available separately) and flash bracket. The camera also
supports the following wireless flash control systems:
Radio-Controlled Flash Photography: CMD, #CMD, RCV, and X-RCV Modes

Wireless Remote-Control Flash Photography: RC Mode

The camera controls one or more remote flash units by means of optical signals. The
flash mode can be selected using camera controls (P. 105).

6
Cautions

The camera controls one or more remote flash units by means of radio signals. The
range of locations in which flash units can be placed increases. Flash units can control
other compatible units or be fitted with radio commander/receivers to allow the use ofunits that do not otherwise support radio flash control.

 Features Available with Compatible Flash Units
Flash unit

Supported flash control
modes

GN (Guide Number,
ISO 100)

Supported wirelesssystems

FL-700WR

TTL-AUTO, MANUAL,FP TTL AUTO,
FP MANUAL, MULTI, RC,
SL MANUAL

GN 42 (75/150 mm *1)
GN 21 (12/24 mm *1)

CMD, #CMD, RCV,X-RCV, RC

GN 58 (100/200 mm *1)
GN 27 (12/24 mm *1)

RC

GN 36 (42.5/85 mm *1)
GN 20 (12/24 mm *1)

RC

FL-900R
FL-600R

TTL-AUTO, AUTO,
MANUAL, FP TTL AUTO,
FP MANUAL, MULTI, RC,
SL AUTO, SL MANUAL

STF-8

TTL-AUTO, MANUAL,
RC *2

GN 8.5

RC *2

FL-LM3

Varies with camera
settings.

GN 9.1 (12/24 mm *1)

RC *2*1 Maximum lens focal length at which unit can provide flash coverage (figures following
slashes are 35 mm format equivalent focal lengths).
*2 Functions as commander (transmitter) only.

EN 287

Wireless remote control flash photography
Wireless flash photography is available with compatible flash units that support
wireless remote control (RC). The remote flash units are controlled via a unit mounted
on the camera hot shoe. Settings can be adjusted separately for the camera-mounted
unit and units in up to three other groups.
RC mode must be enabled on both the master and remote flash units (P. 287).
 Enabling RC Mode1

Set the remote flash units to RC mode and place them as desired.

2

Select [On] for [#RC Mode] (P. 193) in G Custom Menu W and press the
Q button.

• Turn the external flash units on, press the MODE button, and select RC mode.
• Select a channel and group for each external flash unit.

• The camera will exit to the shooting display.
• An q icon will be displayed.

6

q iconRC

100%

S-IS AUTO

Cautions

#

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

3

Press the Q button.
• The RC mode super control panel will be displayed.
• The standard LV super control panel can be displayedby pressing the INFO button. The display will change
each time the INFO button is pressed.

1:02:03

250 F5.6 0.0

1023

100%

A ModeTTL
ManualOff
TTL

P

250 F5.6

+5.0
1/8
–
+3.0

Ch

Low
1

1:02:031023

RC mode super control panel

288 EN

4

Adjust flash settings.
• Highlight items using the FGHI buttons and rotate the rear dial to choose
settings.
Flash control mode

Flash mode100%

A ModeTTL
Manual
Off
TTL

Group

+5.0
1/8
–
+3.0

Ch

Low
1

ChannelFlash compensation
P

250 F5.6

1:02:03

1023

Group

Choose a group. Changes to settings apply to all units inthe selected group. Choose Q to adjust settings for the unit
mounted on the camera.

Flash control mode

Choose a flash mode.

Flash compensation

Adjust flash output. When [Manual] is selected for flash mode,
you can a value for manual flash output.

Optical signal
strength

Choose the brightness of the optical control signals emitted by
the flash units. Choose [HI] if you have placed flash units at
close to the maximum distance from the camera. This setting
applies to all groups.

Flash mode/
flash level

Choose # (standard) or FP (super FP). Choose super FP for
shutter speeds faster than the flash sync speed. This setting
applies to all groups.

ChannelChoose the channel used for flash control. Change thechannel if you find that other light sources in the area areinterfering with remote flash control.

6
Cautions

5

Optical signal strength

Set the unit mounted on the camera to [TTL AUTO].
• Flash control settings for the FL-LM3 can only be adjusted using the camera.

 Positioning Remote Flash Units

1

Set the wireless RC flash units to RC mode.

2

Position the flash units.

3

Take pictures after confirming that the remote units and the unit on thecamera are charged.

• After turning compatible flash units on, press the MODE button and choose RC
mode.
• Choose a group for each of the compatible flash units using flash controls and matchthe channel to that selected with the camera.
• Position the wireless units with the remote sensors facing the camera.

EN 289 Wireless Flash Control Range
The illustration is intended as a guide only. The flash control range varies with the typeof flash mounted on the camera and the conditions in the surrounding area.
Flash Control Range for Camera-Mounted FL-LM3 Flash Units
30°
60°

30°

7m
50°
100°

6

50°

5m

Cautions• We recommend that each group contain no more than 3 flash units.
• Wireless flash photography is not available in anti-shock mode or in rear-curtain slow sync
mode when a shutter speed slower than 4 s is selected.
• Start wait times longer than 4 s cannot be selected in anti-shock and silent modes.
• Flash control signals may interfere with exposure if subject is too close to the camera.
This can be mitigated by reducing the brightness of the camera flash, for example byusing a diffuser.

Other external flash units
Note the following when using a third-party flash unit mounted on the camera hot shoe:• Using obsolete flash units that apply currents of more than about 250 V to the X-contact
will damage the camera.
• Connecting flash units with signal contacts that do not conform to Olympus specifications
may damage the camera.
• Select mode M, choose a shutter speed no faster than the flash sync speed, and set[K ISO] to [AUTO].
• Flash control can only be performed by manually setting the flash to the ISO sensitivity
and aperture values selected with the camera. Flash brightness can be adjusted byadjusting either ISO sensitivity or aperture.
• Use a flash with an angle of illumination suited to the lens. Angle of illumination is usually
expressed using 35-mm format equivalent focal lengths.

290 ENPrincipal Accessories
 Remote cable (RM-CB2)
Use when the slightest camera movement can result in blurred pictures, for example
for macro or bulb photography. Connect the cable to the camera remote cable terminal(P. 17).
 Converter lenses
Converter lenses attach to the camera lens for quick and easy fish-eye or macro
photography. See the OLYMPUS website for information on the lenses that can beused.
 Eyecup (EP-13)
You can switch to a large-size eyecup.
Removal61Cautions

2

EN 291

System chart

Viewfinder

Power Supply

6

BLH-1

BCH-1

F-5AC

EP-13

Lithium-ion battery

Lithium-ion Charger

USB-AC Adapter

Eyecup

HLD-9

AC-5

Power Battery
Holder

AC Adapter

Cautions

RemoteOperation
RM-CB2
Remote Cable

Case / Strap

Shoulder Strap /Camera Case

Connection
Cable

USB Cable /HDMI Cable *1

Headphone

Microphone

SoftwareMemory Card

SD/SDHC/
SDXC

Olympus Workspace
Digital Photo Managing Software: E-M1 Mark 3 compatible products: Commercially available products

For the latest information, please visit the Olympus website.
*1 HDMI cables are available from third-party suppliers.
*2 There are restrictions on the lenses that can be used with the adapter. Visit the OLYMPUS website fordetails.
*3 Visit the OLYMPUS website for information on compatible lenses.

292 EN

Converter
Lens*3

Lens

FCON-P01

Micro Four Thirds system lenses

Fisheye

WCON-P01
Wide

MCON-P01
Macro

Four Thirds systemlenses

MMF-2/MMF-3*2
Four Thirds Adapter

MCON-P02
Macro

6
Cautions

Flash

FL-LM3FL-900R

FL-700WR

Electronic FlashElectronic FlashElectronic Flash

STF-8

FC-WR

FR-WR

Macro Flash

Wireless Radiowave
Commander

Wireless Radiowave
ReceiverEN 293

7

Information
Cleaning and storing the camera

Cleaning the camera
Turn off the camera and remove the battery before cleaning the camera.
• Do not use strong solvents such as benzene or alcohol, or a chemically treated cloth.

Exterior:• Wipe gently with a soft cloth. If the camera is very dirty, soak the cloth in mild soapy water
and wring well. Wipe the camera with the damp cloth and then dry it with a dry cloth. If you
have used the camera at the beach, use a cloth soaked in clean water and well wrung.

Monitor:• Wipe gently with a soft cloth.

7
Information
294 EN

Lens:• Blow dust off the lens with a commercially available blower. For the lens, wipe gently witha lens cleaning paper.

Storage• When not using the camera for a prolonged period, remove the battery and card. Storethe camera in a cool, dry place that is well ventilated.
• Insert the battery periodically and test the camera’s functions.
• Remove dust and other foreign matter from the body and rear caps before attaching them.
• Attach the body cap to the camera to prevent dust from getting inside when no lens is
attached. Be sure to replace the front and rear lens caps before putting the lens away.
• Clean the camera after use.
• Do not store with insect repellent.
• Avoid storing the camera in places where chemicals are treated, in order to protect thecamera from corrosion.
• Mold may form on the lens surface if the lens is left dirty.
• Check each part of the camera before use if it has not been used for a long time. Before
taking important pictures, be sure to take a test shot and check that the camera works
properly.

Cleaning and checking the image pickup device
This camera incorporates a dust reduction function to keep dust from getting on theimage pickup device and to remove any dust or dirt from the image pickup device
surface with ultrasonic vibrations. The dust reduction function operates when thecamera is turned on.
The dust reduction function operates at the same time as the pixel mapping, whichchecks the image pickup device and image processing circuitry. Since dust reductionis activated every time the camera’s power is turned on, the camera should be held
upright for the dust reduction function to be effective.

Pixel Mapping - Checking the image processing functions
The pixel mapping feature allows the camera to check and adjust the image pickup
device and image processing functions. For best results, wait at least a minute after
shooting and playback have ended before performing pixel mapping.

1
2

In G Custom Menu b, select [Pixel Mapping] (P. 198).
Press I, then press the Q button.
• The [Busy] bar is displayed when pixel mapping is in progress. When pixel mapping
is finished, the menu is restored.

Information• If you accidentally turn the camera off during pixel mapping, start again from Step 1.

7

EN 295

Shooting tips and information
The camera does not turn on even when a battery is loaded
The battery is not fully charged• Charge the battery with the charger.

The battery is temporarily unable to function because of the cold
• Battery performance drops at low temperatures. Remove the battery and warm it byputting it in your pocket for a while.

No picture is taken when the shutter button is pressed
The camera has turned off automatically

7
Information• If [On] is selected for [Quick Sleep Mode] (P. 199), the camera will enter sleep mode if
no operations are performed for a set period. Press the shutter button halfway to exit thesleep mode.
• The camera automatically enters sleep mode to reduce the drain on the battery if nooperations are performed for a set period of time. g G Custom Menu c > [Sleep](P. 199)
If no operations are performed for a set time after the camera has entered sleep mode,the camera will turn off automatically. g G Custom Menu c > [Auto Power Off](P. 199)

The flash is charging• On the monitor, the # mark blinks when charging is in progress. Wait for the blinking tostop, then press the shutter button.

Unable to focus• The camera cannot focus on subjects that are too close to the camera or that are notsuited to autofocus (the AF confirmation mark will blink in the monitor). Increase thedistance to the subject or focus on a high contrast object at the same distance from thecamera as your main subject, compose the shot, and shoot.
Subjects that are difficult to focus on
It may be difficult to focus with auto focus in the following situations.
AF confirmation
mark is blinking.
These subjects
are not focused.
Subject with low
contrast

Excessively bright
light in center of frame

Subjects at different
distances

Fast-moving subject

AF confirmation
mark lights up but
the subject is not
focused.

296 EN

Subject not inside
AF areaNoise reduction is activated• When shooting night scenes, shutter speeds are slower and noise tends to appear inimages. The camera activates the noise-reduction process after shooting at slow shutter
speeds. During which, shooting is not allowed. You can set [Noise Reduct.] to [Off].
g G Custom Menu T > [Noise Reduct.] (P. 192)

The number of AF targets is reduced
The size and number of the AF target changes depending on the [Digital Tele-converter](P. 143), [Aspect] (P. 98), and group target (P. 69) settings.

The date and time has not been set
The camera is used with the settings at the time of purchase• The date and time of the camera is not set when purchased. Set the date and time before
using the camera. g “Initial setup” (P. 33)

The battery has been removed from the camera• The date and time settings will be returned to the factory default settings if the camera isleft without the battery for approximately 1 day (in-house measurements). The settings
will be canceled more quickly if the battery was only loaded in the camera for a short time
before being removed. Before taking important pictures, check that the date and time
settings are correct.

Settings adjusted in custom modes (modes C1–C4) will be reset to saved values whenanother shooting mode is selected or the camera is turned off. If [Hold] is selected for [Reset/
Custom Modes] > [Custom Mode Save Settings] in W Shooting Menu 1 when a custom
mode is selected, changes to settings will automatically be saved to the selected mode.
g “Updating Custom Modes Automatically” (P. 57)

Information

Set functions are restored to their factory default settings

7

Image taken appears whitish
This may occur when the picture is taken in backlight or semi-backlight conditions. This isdue to a phenomenon called flare or ghosting. As far as possible, consider a composition
where strong light source is not taken in the picture. Flare may occur even when a lightsource is not present in the picture. Use a lens hood to shade the lens from the lightsource. If a lens hood does not have effect, use your hand to shade the lens from the light.
g “Interchangeable lenses” (P. 285)

Unknown bright dot(s) appear on the subject in the picture taken
This may be due to stuck pixel(s) on the image pickup device. Perform [Pixel Mapping].
If the problem persists, repeat pixel mapping a few times. g “Pixel Mapping - Checking theimage processing functions” (P. 295)

Functions that cannot be selected from menus
Some items may not be selectable from the menus when using the arrow pad.
• Items that cannot be set with the current shooting mode.
• Items that cannot be set because of an item that has already been set:
Combinations of [T] (P. 78) and [Noise Reduct.] (P. 192), etc.

EN 297

The subject appears distorted
The following functions use an electronic shutter:movie recording (P. 59), silent mode (P. 81), Pro Capture shooting (P. 81), HighRes Shot (P. 83), focus bracketing (P. 148), focus stacking (P. 149), the live ND filter(P. 159)
This may cause distortion if the subject is moving rapidly or the camera is moved abruptly.
Avoid moving the camera abruptly during shooting or use standard sequential shooting.

Lines appear in photographs
The following functions use an electronic shutter, which may result in lines due to flicker andother phenomena associated with fluorescent and LED lighting, an effect that can sometimes
be reduced by choosing slower shutter speeds:
movie recording (P. 59), silent mode (P. 81), Pro Capture shooting (P. 81), HighRes Shot (P. 83), focus bracketing (P. 148), focus stacking (P. 149), the live ND filter(P. 159)
Flicker can be reduced by choosing slower shutter speeds. You can also reduce flicker using
flicker scan. g G Custom Menu U > [K Flicker Scan] (P. 234), n Video Menu >[n Mode Settings] > [n Flicker Scan] (P. 166)

7
Information
298 ENError codes
Monitor indication

Possible cause
The card is not inserted, or it
cannot be recognized.

Corrective action
Insert a card. Or reinsert thecard properly.

No Card

There is a problem with thememory card in Slot 1.
5Card Error

There is a problem with thememory card in Slot 2.

Remove and reinsert the
memory card. If this does not
solve the problem, format thecard. If formatting fails, the cardcannot be used.

4Card Error

The memory card in Slot 1 iswrite-protected (“locked”).
5Write Protect

4Write Protect

5Card Full

4Card Full

5No Picture

4No Picture• Shooting disabled; thememory card in Slot 1 does
not have space for additional
pictures.
• Shooting disabled; thememory card in Slot 1 is full.

Insert another memory ordelete pictures. Before deleting
pictures, be sure any pictures
you wish to keep have been
copied to a computer.
If [Dual Independent] or [Dual• Shooting disabled; theSame] is selected for [Card Slotmemory card in Slot 2 does
not have space for additional Settings] (P. 237) in G Custom
Menu Y, choose a different
pictures.
setting.
• Shooting disabled; thememory card in Slot 2 is full.

7
Information

The memory card in Slot 2 iswrite-protected (“locked”).

The memory card write-protect
switch is in the “LOCK” position.
Return the switch to theunlocked position (P. 284).

Playback unavailable; thememory card in Slot 1 contains
The selected memory cardno pictures.
contains no pictures. Take
pictures before choosing
Playback unavailable; theplayback mode.
memory card in Slot 2 contains
no pictures.

EN 299

Monitor indication

5Picture Error

Possible cause

Corrective action

The selected file is damaged
and cannot be played back.
Alternatively, the picture is in aformat that is not supported by
the camera.

View the picture using computer
imaging software or the like. If
the picture cannot be displayedon a computer, the file may becorrupt.

Camera retouch features
cannot be applied to pictures
recorded with other devices.

Retouch the picture on acomputer or other device.

4Picture Error

5The Image Cannot Be
Edited4The Image Cannot Be
Edited7

Y/M/D

The clock is not set.

m

Information

Internal camera
temperature is too high.
Please wait for coolingbefore camera use.

Set the clock (P. 33).
Turn off the camera and wait for
the internal temperature to cool.

The internal temperature of
the camera has risen due tosequential shooting.

Wait a moment for the camera
to turn off automatically.
Allow the internal temperatureof the camera to cool before
resuming operations.

The battery is drained.

Charge the battery.

The camera is not correctly
connected to a computer,
HDMI display, or other device.

Reconnect the camera.

Battery Empty

No Connection

300 ENThe lens is locked.
Please extend the lens.

The lens of the retractable lensExtend the lens.
stays retracted.

Please check the statusof a lens.

An abnormality has occurred
between the camera and thelens.

Turn off the camera, check theconnection with the lens, andturn the power on again.

Default Settings*1: Can be added to [Assign to Custom Mode].
*2: Default can be restored by selecting [Full] for [Reset].
*3: Default can be restored by selecting [Basic] for [Reset].

Live Controls/LV Super Control Panel
Shooting mode
Item
ISO
P/A/S/M/B
Flash Modex
Manual Value

*1





*2





*3
g
 75, 91
 86, 105

105

105













97
97
94









―
―
―

96



















―


―


69
64, 91
92
98
77
99
100

























―
―
―
―
―

101
106
110
110
110
111
113







112







113










98
114

94

7
Information

Default
Auto#±0#FULL (flash set to[#MANUAL])
K Image Stabilizer S-IS AUTO
n Image Stabilizer M-IS1
WB
Auto ([On] selected for[W Keep Warm Color])
WB compensation A ±0
WB compensation G ±0
Kelvin5400K ([CWB] selected for[WB])
AF Area
Center; Single
AF Mode
S-AF
Face Priority Off
IFace Priorityj/YoMeteringpStandard
K Save Settings
KK
5 YF (High Res Shot:
IF+RAW)
4 YF (High Res Shot:
IF+RAW)nK
Picture Mode
Natural
Sharpness±0
Contrast±0
Saturation±0
Gradation
Gradation Normal
Effect― ([i-Enhance] selected for[Picture Mode]: 3Standard)Color Filter― ([Monochrome] selected
for [Picture Mode]: N:None)
Monochrome Color ― ([Monochrome] selected
for [Picture Mode]: N:Normal)
Aspect4:3
Color SpacesRGB

EN 301

Shooting mode
Item
Highlight&Shadow
P/A/S/M/B
Control
Movie RISOn (movie)

7
Information
302 EN

Default
f (±0)On[P], [A], or [S] selected for[n Mode] (movie exposuremode): Auto (fixed)[M] selected for [n Mode](movie exposure mode): 200
Flash Mode
Flash Off (fixed)±0 (fixed)x
K Image Stabilizer S-IS AUTO
n Image Stabilizer M-IS1
WB
Auto ([On] selected for[W Keep Warm Color])
WB compensation A ±0
WB compensation G ±0
Kelvin5400K ([CWB] selected for[WB])
AF Area
Center; 9-target group
AF ModeC-AF
Face Priority Off
IFace Priorityj/Yo (fixed)
Metering
p (fixed)
Standard
K Save Settings
KK
5 YF
4 YF
nK
Picture Mode
Natural
Sharpness±0
Contrast±0
Saturation±0
Gradation
Gradation Normal
Aspect16:9 (fixed)
C4K selected for [nK]:
17:9
Color SpacesRGB (fixed)
Highlight&Shadow
f (±0)
ControlPn ModeOn
Movie R

*1


*2


*3


g
115


―







169
75, 91

―
―


―

―
―




―
―




―
―
97
97
94

―
―
―





―
―
―

96




―
―









―




―
―









―



―
―
―
―




―
―
―
―
―

69
64, 91
92
―
―
99
100

―


―


―


―
115

―





―


165
169

94

101
106
110
110
110
111
―

Shooting mode
Item
RC modeQA group A
QB group B
QC group C
Q camera flash
Flash compensation
Flash level#/FP
a optical signal
strength
Channelg
288

Default
TTL
Off
Off
Off
±0 (TTL, Auto)
1/1 (Manual)# (Normal)
Low

*1









*2









*3









1







*1
―

*2


*3
g
― 57, 141

K Shooting Menu
Tab

W

Function
Reset / Custom Reset
Modes
Assign to Custom
Mode

7

―

Picture ModeC Natural





KK

YF (High Res Shot:
IF+RAW)
4:3
Off
o
Off
99
00:00:01
00:00:01
Off
FullHD





106,
142
 100, 142




―











Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
j/YIntrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
Number of Frames
Start Waiting TimeInterval Length
Time Lapse Movie
Movie
Movie
Settings
Resolution
Frame
10fps
Rate



Information

Custom Mode Save
Settings
Recall from Custom
Mode

Default
Basic
Shooting mode: P
Image quality:
YF+RAW
Reset

98
143
78
144

EN 303Tab

X

Function
Bracketing
AE BKTWB BKT

A– B
G– M

Default
Off
3f 1.0EV
Off

*2


*3




―





―



152
154








―

156
157





―





―

158










―
―

159

FL BKT
ISO BKT
ART BKT
Focus BKT
Focus Stacking
Set number of shots

7
Information
304 EN

Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
[Off] selected for[Focus Stacking]: 99[On] selected for[Focus Stacking]: 8
Set focus differential 5
0 sec#Charge Time
HDR
OffMultiple
Number of Frames
Off
Exposure
Auto Gain
Off
OverlayOff
Keystone Comp.
Off
Anti-Shock r/ Anti-Shock r
r 0 sec
Silent s
Silent s
s 0 sec
Off
Noise Reduction s―
Silent s Mode
Settings
8
Not Allow
AF Illuminator
Not Allow
Flash Mode
Not Allow
High Res Shot High Res Shoth0 sec
0 sec#Charge Time
Shooting Method
Handheld
Live ND Shooting
Off
ND Number
ND8(3EV)LV Simulation
On

g
146,
147,
149

*1


n Video Menu
Tabnn ModeSettings

Functionn Moden Flicker Scan

P

*1
―

*2


Off

―











g
161,
165

161,
166

161,
167
75, 161


―

―
―
―







―

161
 94, 161
― 96, 161
 96, 161

―

Defaultn Specification nK
MOVn4K 30p
Settings
b ISO-Auto Set
Upper Limit / Default Upper Limit: 6400
Default: 200
Offb ISO-Auto
Standardn Noise Filter
Auto
n WB
A±0, G±0n All xOnnW Keep Warm
Color
Off
n Picture Moden AF Mode

C-AF







n C-AF Speed
n C-AF Sensitivity
n Image Stabilizern IS Level

±0
±0
M-IS1
±0
















106,
161
64, 91,
162
162
162
97, 162
162

7
Informationn AF/IS
Settings*3―

EN 305TabnFunctionn Button/Dial/LeverFn ButtonFunction
R
u
t
K
d
D

7
Informationn DialFunction

E
Y
Z
m
n
v
w
x
l
P

Position 1
Position 2

A

Position 1
Position 2

S

Position 1
Position 2

M

Position 1
Position 2

n Fn Lever Function
mode2

n Shutter Functionn Elec. Zoom Speed

306 EN

g
163
116,
163

Default

*1

*2

*3

Exposure F
RREC
u View Selection
AEL/AFLISON
N (Electronic
Zoom)
N (WB)
Peaking
MagnifyISO
AEL/AFL
Direct Function
Electronic Zoom
WB
AF Stop
k: F
j: F
k: RVOL
j: RVOL
k: F
j: FNo.
k: RVOL
j: RVOL
k: F
j: Shutter
k: RVOL
j: RVOL
k: FNo.
j: Shutter
k: RVOL
j: ISO
mode2
AF Mode/AF Target Mode/
AF Target Pointw
Normal

―



―

―



―

―



―

―



―

―



―

―



―

163

―
―




―
―

163
163

163

Tab

n

Functionn Display Settingsn Control Settings

*1

*2

*3

Live Control,
Live SCP
Custom1
Drop Frame
Rec Run0:00:00
min
Off
On
±0
±0
On
Off
48kHz/16bit
Off
8
Monitor Mode
Off
On

―



―

―
―
―
―
―
―

―
―
―
―

―

―





















―
―
―
―
―
―

―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

*1

―

*2

―

*3

―

―
―
―
―
―

―
―
―
―
―

―
―
―
―
―

g
164

169

164

q Playback Menu
TabqFunctionR
Edit

Default
On

Sel. Image

RAW Data Edit
JPEG Edit
Movie Edit
R
Image Overlay
Print Order
Reset Protect
Reset share Order
Copy All
TWi-Fi Connect

―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

g
170
170
171
173
136
172
134
175
175
175
247,
262,
264,
266

7
Informationn Info Settings
Time CodeTime Code Mode
Settings
Count Up
Starting Time
8 Display Patterna View Assist
Movie R
Recording
Built-in R
VolumeMIC R
R Volume Limiter
Wind Noise Reduction
Recording RateR Plug-in Power
Headphone Volume
Output Moden HDMI
OutputREC BitTime CodeDefault

EN 307

e Setup Menu
TabeFunction
Card Setup
X Settings

Default
―
―

*1
―
―

*2
―
―

*3
―
―

Englishj±0, k±0, Natural
Off
On

―


―

―




―

―

―

X
Time Zone

Reset Settings

―

―

―

Wi-Fi MAC Address

―
―

―
―

―
―

― 35, 176
―
176
―
176
―
178,
246,
255,
271
―
178,
272
―
178,
249
―
133,
178
―
178,
273
―
178
―
176

Default

*1

*2

*3

S-AF





Off
mode3
mode4
mode3
mode3
Operative
w: On
t: On
mode2
±0
q (All Targets)
5, 9, or 25 targets







 64, 91,
181

200

181,
201

























W
s
Rec View
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Availability
Settings

Connection Password

7

Power-off Standby

Off

―



RAW+JPEG h

JPEG

―



Information

Firmware

G Custom Menu
Tab

G

Function
AF/MF
J K AF mode
K AF+MF
K AEL/AFL S-AF
C-AF
MF
FAF
Half Way AF
Face Priority AF
AF Scanner
K C-AF Sensitivity
K C-AF Center Start
K C-AF Center Priority

308 EN

g
177
33

g

181
203
204
205

Tab

G

Function
K KNMode Settings
AF Area PointerN Set Home

N Select Screen SettingskjAB
N LoopN Loop Selection
Settings
Via qt Target Mode Settings

Reset Lens

On

*1


*2


*3


g
182


―







182
206







207











―

208





































―
210

183

183



183
― 92, 183

183

184

184
―
184,
215
―

184

184

184,
216

184

209

7
Information

K Orientation Linked N
L AF Targeting Pad
AF Limiter
Distance settings
Release Priority
AF Illuminator
IFace Priority
AF Focus Adj. *I Starry Sky AF Setting
Preset MF distance
MF Assist
MagnifyPeaking
MF Clutch
Focus Ring
Bulb/Time Focusing

Default
All; Small; 5-, 9-, or
25-target group
On1
AF Target Mode(q), AF Target
Point
Set 1
NMode
NMode
6Pos
6Pos
Off
No
1×1; vertical andhorizontal step
size: 1
Off
Off
Off
Setting 1
On
On
Off
Off
Speed
999.9 mOff
Off
OperativebOn* Using [Reset] to perform a full or standard reset does not affect saved values.

EN 309

TabG

7Function
Button/Dial/LeverFJ K Button
Function
R
u
t
K
d
D
E
Y
Z
m
n
v
w
x
l
S Center Button

Information

T Direction Key
K DialFunctionP

Position 1
Position 2

A

Position 1
Position 2

S

Position 1
Position 2

M/B

Position 1
Position 2

Menuq

310 EN

Default

*1

*2

*3

g

Exposure F
RREC
u View Selection
AEL/AFLISON
N (Flash Mode)N (j/Y)kPreviewISO
AEL/AFLN
N (Flash Mode)N (j/Y)
AF Stop
Off





―

116,
185





―

N





―

k: F
j: Ps
k: ISO
j: WB
k: F
j: FNo.
k: ISO
j: WB
k: F
j: Shutter
k: ISO
j: WB
k: FNo.
j: Shutter
k: F
j: ISO
k: B
j: A/Valuek: Prev/Next
j: Ga





―

185,
217
185,
217
185

Tab

G

Function
ExposurePs
K Fn Lever Function
mode2

J DialDirection

*2


*3
―

g
185

―



―

185,
219

―

―









―
―
―
―
―

185
185
185
185
185

Off
On










10 fpsOff
18 fpsOff
18 fps
8 shots
25 shots

























186
186
186,
220

15 fpsOff
60 fpsOff
60 fps
14 shots
25 shots
Auto
OffS-IS AUTO
Fps Priority
On
Off












―
















186,
220







―
186,
222
―
 97, 186
―
186
―
186

186

7
Information

Fn Lever/Power Lever
K K Elec. Zoom SpeedqR Function
9 Lockv LockRelease/j/Image Stabilizer
N S-AF Release Priority
C-AF Release Priority
jL Settings
Max fpsj/♦j
Frame Count Limiter
Max fps♥j
Frame Count Limiter
Max fps0Pre-shutter Frames
Frame Count LimiterjH Settings
Max fpsj
Frame Count Limiter
Max fps♥j
Frame Count Limiter
Max fps0Pre-shutter Frames
Frame Count Limiter
Flicker
Anti-Flicker LV
Reduction
Anti-Flicker Shooting
O K Image Stabilizer
j Image Stabilizer
Half Way Rls With IS
Lens I.S. Priority*1

Default
Dial1
Dial1
mode2
AF Mode/AF Target Mode/
AF Target Point
Fn
NormalH
Off
OffEN 311Tab

G

Function
Disp/8/PC
P K Control Settings
G/InfoSettings

7
Information
312 ENq Infoqa Info
LV-Info

Default
Live SCP

Image Only, Overall
All OnImage Only,
Custom1 (u),Custom2 (Level
Gauge)
Informations during On
half way
LV OFF-Info
Shooting Information
25, Calendar
G Settings
Picture Mode Settings
All Onj/Y Settings♥o, T, ♥T, p,
S, ♥S, q, X,
c, hMulti Function Settings
All on except WB
and ISO
Manual Shooting
Off
Q Live View
Boost
Bulb/Time
On2, Frame Rate
Priority
Live Composite
Off
OthersOff
Art LV Mode
mode1
Frame Rate
Normal
LV Close Up LV Close Up Mode
mode2
Settings
Live View BoostOff
Recently
qa Default SettingOffz Settings z Lock
Live View Boost
Off
Preset 1
R Grid Settings Display Color
Displayed Grid
Off
Apply Settings to EVF On
Peaking
Peaking ColorRed
Settings
Highlight Intensity
NormalImage Brightness Adj. Off
Histogram
Highlight
255
Settings
Shadow0Mode Guide
Off
Selfie Assist
On

*1

*2

*3

g





―


―







―
―

187,
224
187,
226





―











―
―
―
―

187
187





―

187







188





―



















―

―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

188
188
188





―

189


―




―
―

189
189,
229

188
189
189

189

Default
On
1080p
Off
60p Priority
Auto

*1

―
―
―
―

*2



―


*3

―
―
―


g
190
190,
230

1/3 EV
1/3 EV
Upper Limit: 6400
Default: 200
AutoAll
Standard
Drive Priority
Auto
8 min
3h
−7
Off













191
191
191






















―





―
―

Live Time

0.5 sec―Composite Settings

1 sec





―

K Flicker Scan

Off







p
Auto
Spot, Spot Highlight,
Spot Shadow
±0
±0
±0













191
191
191
192
192
192
192
192,
232
192,
232
54, 192,
233
192,
234
77, 193
193
193





―

193

1/250







#Slow Limit

1/60







x+F
#+WB
#RC Mode

Off
Off
Off










―


193,
236
193,
236
193
193
193,
288

Tab

G

Function
S 8
HDMI

Output Size
HDMI Control
Output Frame Rate

USB Mode
Exp/ISO/BULB/p
T EV Step
ISO Step
K ISO-Auto Upper Limit / Default
Set
Lowest S/S Setting
K ISO-Auto
K Noise Filter
K Low ISO Processing
Noise Reduct.
U Bulb/Time Timer
Live Composite Timer
Bulb/Time Monitor
Live Bulb

Exposure
Shift#Custom
W #X-Sync.

p
B
C

7
Information

V Metering
AEL Metering
N Spot Metering190

EN 313

Tab

G

Function
K/WB/ColorX K SetPixel Count

Xiddle
Wmall
Shading Comp.
K WB
K All xKW Keep Warm Color
Color Space

Record/Erase
Y Card Slot
Settings

7

K Save Settings
K Save Slotn Save Slotq SlotAssign Save Folder

Information

File Name
Edit Filename
dpi Settings
Copyright
Copyright Info.
Settings *Artist Name
Copyright Name
Lens Info Settings *Z Quick Erase
RAW+JPEG Erase
Priority Set
EVF
a EVF Auto Switch
EVF Adjust EVF Auto Luminance
EVF Adjust
EVF Style
V Info Settings
EVF Grid
Settings

Display Color
Displayed Grid
V Half Way Level
S-OVF

*1

*2

*3

g

K1: YSF
K2: YF
K3: YN
K4: XN
3200×2400
1280×960
OffAuto
A±0, G±0
On
sRGB







194,
236







194,
236














194
 94, 194
―
194

194

114,
194

Standard
55
5
Do not assign
Reset
Off
350dpi
Off
―
―
Off










―
―
―










―
―


Off
RAW+JPEG
No









― 99, 195,
237
―
―
―
―
―
195
―
195
―
195
―
195
―
―
―
195,
239

196

196

196

On1
On
j±0, k±0
Style 3

―





―
―

196
196

―



―

Basic Information,
Custom1, Custom2
Preset 1
Off
On
Off





―

196,
240
196











―
―
―


Default* Using [Reset] to perform a full or standard reset does not affect saved values.

314 EN

197
197
197

Tab

G

Function
K Utilityb Pixel Mapping
Press-andhold Time

Default

*1

*2

*3

g

―

―

―

―

















―
―
























―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

198,
295
198


―







―






―
―



―
―

―

―

―

Level Adjust
Touchscreen Settings
Menu Recall
Fisheye Compensation
Battery Priority
c Battery
Settings
Battery Status
Backlit LCD
Sleep
Auto Power Off
Quick Sleep Mode
Backlit LCD
Sleep
Certification―
On
RecallOff
PBH Battery
―
Hold
1 min
4h
Off
8 sec
10 sec
―

7
198
198
198
198,
242
198

Information

0.7 sec
End LV a
Reset LV a Frame 0.7 sec
0.7 sec
End 6
0.7 sec
Reset 6 Frame
0.7 sec
Reset F
0.7 sec
Reset x
0.7 sec
Reset 7
0.7 sec
Reset c
0.7 sec
Reset N
Call EVF Auto Switch 0.7 sec
0.7 sec
End qa0.7 sec
End D
0.7 sec
Reset D
0.7 sec
Switch G Lock
Call BKT Settings
0.7 sec
End Flicker Scan
0.7 sec

198
199
199
199

199

EN 315

Memory Card Capacity
Memory Card Capacity: Photos
Figures are for a 16 GB SD card used to record photos with an aspect ratio of 4:3.

(Tripod)80(Tripod)
168.2(Tripod)
87(Handheld)
121.3(Handheld)
120(Tripod)
157.5(Tripod)
94(Handheld)
110.6(Handheld)
133

Loss-lesscompression

ORF

10368×7776

1/4

JPEG

5184×3888

Loss-lesscompression

ORI

Loss-lesscompression

ORF

8160×6120

1/4

JPEG

5184×3888

Loss-lesscompression

ORI

Loss-lesscompression

ORF

5760×4320

1/4

JPEG

5184×3888

Loss-lesscompression

ORI

AF

10368×7776

1/4

JPEG

34.9

IF

8160×6120

1/4

JPEG

21.7

634

JF

5760×4320

1/4

JPEG

10.9

1261

Loss-lesscompression

ORF

21.7

690

IF+RAW

7
Information(Tripod)
181.4(Tripod)10368×7776(Tripod)10368×7776(Handheld)
8160×6120(Tripod)10368×7776
JF+RAW(Handheld)
8160×6120

RAW

394

1/2.7

13.1

1054

1/4

8.9

1550

YN

1/8

4.6

3013

XSF

1/2.7

5.1

2697

3.6

3906
7397

YSF

5184×3888

YF

XF

3200×2400

1/4

JPEG

XN

1/8

1.9

XSF

1/2.7

2.0

6975

1/4

1.4

9765

1/8

0.9

16836

XF
XN

316 EN

Number ofstorable still
pictures

Compression
ratio

AF+RAW

File
formatFile size (MB)(approx.)Image size
(Pixel Count)

Record mode

1920×1440

Record mode

Image size
(Pixel Count)

Compression
ratio

WSF
WF

1280×960

1.0

13562

0.8

18083

0.5

28721

0.8

18779

1/4

0.6

24413

1/8

0.3

61032

1/8
1/2.7

WN

Number ofstorable still
pictures

1/4

WSF
1024×768

File size (MB)(approx.)

1/2.7

WN
WF

File
formatJPEG• The number of storable still pictures may change according to the subject, whether or notprint reservations have been made, and other factors. In certain instances, the numberof storable still pictures displayed on the monitor will not change even when you takepictures or erase stored images.
• The actual file size varies according to the subject.
• The maximum number of storable still pictures displayed on the monitor is 9999.
Memory Card Capacity: Movies
Figures are for a 32 GB SDHC memory card.
Compression

Frame rate

Capacity (approx.)

C4K

—

24p

17 minutes—

30p, 25p, 24p

39 minutes

A-I

30p, 25p, 24p

4K

FHD

SF
F
N

60p, 50p, 30p, 25p,
24p

A-I
HD

SF
F
N

20 minutes
1 hour 14 minutes
2 hours 2 minutes
3 hours 11 minutes

7
Information

Frame size

39 minutes
60p, 50p, 30p, 25p,
24p

2 hours 19 minutes
3 hours 55 minutes
5 hours 5 minutes• Figures are for footage recorded at the maximum frame rate. The actual bit rate varies
with the frame rate and scene recorded.
• Individual movie files can be up to 4 GB in size. A new file is created when the size of thecurrent file reaches 4 GB.
• Individual movies can be no more than 29 minutes in length.

EN 317

Specifications
 Camera
Product type
Product type

Digital camera with interchangeable Micro Four Thirds Standard lenssystemLens

M.ZUIKO DIGITAL, Micro Four Thirds System Lens

Lens mount

Micro Four Thirds mount

Equivalent focal length on
a 35 mm film camera

Approx. twice the focal length of the lens

Image pickup device

7

Product type4/3” Live MOS sensor

Total no. of pixels

Approx. 21.77 million pixels

No. of effective pixels

Approx. 20.37 million pixels

Screen size

17.4 mm (H) × 13.0 mm (V)Aspect ratio

1.33 (4:3)

Viewfinder
TypeElectronic viewfinder with eye sensor

No. of pixels

Approx. 2.36 million dots

Information

Magnification

100%

Eye point

Approx. 21 mm (−1 m−1)

Live view
SensorUses Live MOS sensor

Magnification

100%

Monitor
Product type3.0" TFT color LCD, Vari-angle, touch screen

Total no. of pixels

Approx. 1.04 million dots (aspect ratio 3:2)

Shutter
Product typeComputerized focal-plane shutter

Shutter speed

1/8000 - 60 sec., bulb photography, time photography

Flash sync speed

Up to 1/250 sec.

Auto focus
Product typeHi-Speed Imager AF

Focusing points

121 points

Selection of focusing point Auto, Optional

Exposure control
Metering system

318 ENTTL metering system (imager metering)
Digital ESP metering/Center weighted averaging metering/Spot metering

Metered range−2 to 20 EV (f/2.8, ISO 100 equivalent)

Shooting modes

P: Program AE (program shift available); A: Aperture priority AE;
S: Shutter-priority AE; M: Manual; B: Bulb (bulb, time, and composite);
C1/C2/C3/C4: Custom Modes; n: Movie

ISO sensitivity

L64; L100; 200 - 25600 in steps of 1/3 or 1 EV

Exposure compensation±5.0 EV (1/3, 1/2, 1 EV step)White balance
Mode setting

Auto/Preset WB (7 settings)/Customized WB/One-touch WB (camera canstore up to 4 settings)

RecordingMemorySD, SDHC and SDXCUHS-II compatible (Slot 1 only)

Recording system

Digital recording, JPEG (DCF2.0), RAW Data

Applicable standards

Exif 2.3, Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

Sound with still pictures

Wave format

Movie

MPEG-4 AVC/H.264

Audio

Stereo linear PCM, 16 bit; sampling frequency 48 kHz (wave format)
Stereo linear PCM, 24 bit; sampling frequency 96 kHz (wave format)

Playback
Display format

Single-frame playback/Close-up playback/Index display/Calendar display

Drive
Drive mode

Single frame; sequential; anti-shock; silent; Pro Capture; self-timer;
High Res Shot

Sequential shooting

Up to 15 fps (T)Up to 60 fps (♥T, p)
Operation time: 12 sec./2 sec./Customized

Energy saving function

Switch to sleep mode: 1 minute, Power OFF: 4 hours(This function can be customized.)

FlashFlash control mode
X-Sync.

TTL-AUTO (TTL pre-flash mode)/MANUAL
1/250 s or slower

Wireless LAN
Compatible standard

7
Information

Self-timer

IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac *Bluetooth®
Compatible standard

Bluetooth Version 4.2 BLE

External connector
USB (Type C); HDMI micro connector (type D); external flash; remote cable (ø2.5 mm mini-jack);
microphone jack (ø3.5 mm stereo mini-jack); headphone jack (ø3.5 mm stereo mini-jack)Power supply
Battery

Dimensions/weight
Dimensions
WeightLithium-ion Battery ×1
Approx. 134.1 mm (W) × 90.9 mm (H) × 68.9 mm (D) (5.3" × 3.6" × 2.7")(excluding protrusions)
Approx. 580 g (1.3 Ib.) (including battery and memory card)

Operating environment
Temperature−10 °C - 40 °C (14 °F - 104 °F) (operation)/ −20 °C - 60 °C (−4 °F - 140 °F)(storage)

Humidity

30% - 90% (operation)/10% - 90% (storage)

Water resistance

Type: IEC Standard publication 60529 IPX1 (applies if camera is usedwith Olympus water-resistant lens)* Note that cameras have been developed in line with the different standards of the countries.

EN 319 Lithium-ion battery
MODEL NO.

BLH-1

Type

Rechargeable Lithium-ion battery

Nominal voltage

DC 7.4 V

Nominal capacity

1720 mAh

No. of charge anddischarge times

Approx. 500 times (varies with usage conditions)Ambient temperature

0 °C - 40 °C (32 °F - 104 °F) (charging)

Dimensions

Approx. 45 mm (W) × 20 mm (H) × 53 mm (D) (1.8" × 0.8" × 2.1")

WeightApprox. 74 g (2.6 oz.)

 Lithium-ion charger

7

MODEL NO.

BCH-1

Rated input

AC 100 V - 240 V (50/60 Hz)

Rated output

DC 8.4 V, 1100 mA

Charging time

Approx. 2 hours (room temperature)

Ambient temperature

0 °C - 40 °C (32 °F - 104 °F) (operation)/–20 °C - 60 °C (–4 °F - 140 °F) (storage)

Dimensions

Approx. 71 mm (W) × 29 mm (H) × 96 mm (D) (2.8" × 1.1" × 3.8")

Weight (without AC cable)

Approx. 85 g (3.0 oz.)

Information• The supplied power cable is for use exclusively with this camera. Do not use with otherequipment. Do not use the camera with cables for other equipment.
• The appearance and specifications of this product are subject to change without noticeor obligation on the part of the manufacturer.
• Visit the OLYMPUS website for the latest specifications.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo aretrademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the UnitedStates and other countries.

320 EN8 SAFETY PRECAUTIONSSAFETY PRECAUTIONSCAUTIONRISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOTREMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED OLYMPUS SERVICE PERSONNEL.
An exclamation mark enclosed in a triangle alerts you to important operating
and maintenance instructions in the documentation provided with the
product.
WARNING

If the product is used without observing the information given under thissymbol, serious injury or death may result.

CAUTION

If the product is used without observing the information given under thissymbol, injury may result.

NOTICE

If the product is used without observing the information given under thissymbol, damage to the equipment may result.

General Precautions
Read All Instructions — Before you use theproduct, read all operating instructions. Save all
manuals and documentation for future reference.
Power Source — Connect this product only tothe power source described on the product label.
Foreign Objects — To avoid personal injury,
never insert a metal object into the product.
Cleaning — Always unplug this product fromthe wall outlet before cleaning. Use only a damp
cloth for cleaning. Never use any type of liquid oraerosol cleaner, or any type of organic solvent toclean this product.
Heat — Never use or store this product near
any heat source such as a radiator, heat register,
stove, or any type of equipment or appliance thatgenerates heat, including stereo amplifiers.
Attachments — For your safety, and to avoid
damaging the product, use only accessories
recommended by Olympus.
Location — To avoid damage to the product,
mount the product securely on a stable tripod,
stand, or bracket.

WARNING• Do not use the camera near flammable or
explosive gases.
• Rest your eyes periodically when using
the viewfinder.
Failure to observe this precaution could resultin eyestrain, nausea, or sensations similar to
motion sickness. The length and frequencyof the required rest varies with the individual;
use your own judgement. If you feel tired
or unwell, avoid using the viewfinder and if
necessary consult a physician.
• Do not use the flash and LED (including
AF illuminator) on people (infants, smallchildren, etc.) at close range.
• You must be at least 1 m (3 ft.) awayfrom the faces of your subjects. Firing the
flash too close to the subject’s eyes could
cause a momentary loss of vision.
• Do not look at the sun or strong lights
with the camera.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONSWARNING!
TO AVOID THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, NEVER DISASSEMBLE, EXPOSE
THIS PRODUCT TO WATER OR OPERATE IN A HIGH HUMIDITY ENVIRONMENT.

8

EN 321

8
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
322 EN• Keep young children, infants away fromthe camera.
• Always use and store the camera out of
the reach of young children and infants toprevent the following dangerous situations
which could cause serious injury:• Becoming entangled in the camera
strap, causing strangulation.
• Accidentally swallowing the battery,cards or other small parts.
• Accidentally firing the flash into theirown eyes or those of another child.
• Accidentally being injured by themoving parts of the camera.
• Should you notice that the charger isemitting smoke, heat, or an unusual noiseor smell, immediately cease use andunplug the charger from the power outlet,
and then contact an authorized distributor
or service center.
• Stop using the camera immediately if
you notice any unusual odors, noise, orsmoke around it.
• Never remove the batteries with barehands, which may cause a fire or burnyour hands.
• Never hold or operate the camera with wet
hands.
This may cause overheating, exploding,burning, electrical shocks, or malfunctions.
• Do not leave the camera in places where
it may be subject to extremely hightemperatures.
• Doing so may cause parts to deteriorate
and, in some circumstances, cause
the camera to catch fire. Do not use
the charger if it is covered (such as a
blanket). This could cause overheating,resulting in fire.
• Handle the camera with care to avoid
getting a low temperature burn.
• When the camera contains metalparts, overheating can result in a lowtemperature burn. Pay attention to thefollowing:• When used for a long period, thecamera will get hot. If you hold on
to the camera in this state, a lowtemperature burn may be caused.
• In places subject to extremely cold
temperatures, the temperature of thecamera’s body may be lower than theenvironmental temperature. If possible,
wear gloves when handling the camera
in cold temperatures.
• To protect the high-precision technology
contained in this product, never leave thecamera in the places listed below, no matter if
in use or storage:

•

•

•

•
•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

• Places where temperatures and/or
humidity are high or go through extremechanges. Direct sunlight, beaches, locked
cars, or near other heat sources (stove,
radiator, etc.) or humidifiers.
• In sandy or dusty environments.
• Near flammable items or explosives.
• In wet places, such as bathrooms or in
the rain.
• In places prone to strong vibrations.
The camera uses a lithium-ion battery
specified by Olympus. Charge the battery
with the specified charger. Do not use anyother chargers.
Never incinerate or heat batteries in
microwaves, on hot plates, or in pressure
vessels, etc.
Never leave the camera on or nearelectromagnetic devices.
This may cause overheating, burning, or
exploding.
Do not connect terminals with any metallic
objects.
Take precautions when carrying or storingbatteries to prevent them from coming into
contact with any metal objects such as
jewelry, pins, fasteners, keys, etc.
The short circuit may cause overheating,
exploding, or burning, which burn or damageyou.
To prevent causing battery leaks or damaging
their terminals, carefully follow all instructions
regarding the use of batteries. Never attempt
to disassemble a battery or modify it in any
way, solder, etc.
If battery fluid gets into your eyes, flush
your eyes immediately with clear, coldrunning water and seek medical attention
immediately.
If you cannot remove the battery from thecamera, contact an authorized distributor
or service center. Do not try to remove thebattery by force.
Damage to the battery exterior (scratches,etc.) may produce heat or an explosion.
Always store batteries out of the reach ofsmall children and pets. If they accidentallyswallow a battery, seek medical attention
immediately.
To prevent batteries from leaking,overheating, or causing a fire or explosion,use only batteries recommended for use withthis product.
If rechargeable batteries have not beenrecharged within the specified time, stop
charging them and do not use them.
Do not use batteries with scratches ordamage to the casing, and do not scratch
the battery.

• Never subject batteries to strong shocks orcontinuous vibration by dropping or hitting.
This may cause exploding, overheating, orburning.
• If a battery leaks, has unusual odor, becomes
discolored or deformed, or becomesabnormal in any other way during operation,
stop using the camera, and keep away fromfire immediately.
• If a battery leaks fluid onto your clothingor skin, remove the clothing and flush theaffected area with clean, running cold water
immediately. If the fluid burns your skin, seek
medical attention immediately.
• Never use lithium-ion batteries in a lowtemperature environment. Doing so may
cause generation of heat, ignition, or
explosion.
• The Olympus lithium-ion battery is designed
to be used only for the Olympus digital
camera. Do not use the battery to otherdevices.
• Do not allow children or animals/pets tohandle or transport batteries (prevent
dangerous behaviour such as licking,putting in mouth or chewing).

We strongly recommend that you use only thegenuine Olympus dedicated rechargeable battery
and battery charger with this camera.
Using a non-genuine rechargeable battery and/or battery charger may result in fire or personal
injury due to leakage, heating, ignition or damage
to the battery. Olympus does not assume any
liability for accidents or damage that may result
from the use of a battery and/or battery charger
that are not genuine Olympus accessories.

CAUTION• Do not cover the flash with a hand whilefiring.
• Never store batteries where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, or subjected tohigh temperatures in a hot vehicle, near aheat source, etc.
• Keep batteries dry at all times.
• The battery may become hot during
prolonged use. To avoid minor burns, do notremove it immediately after using the camera.
• This camera uses one Olympus lithium-ion
battery. Use the specified genuine battery.
There is a risk of explosion if the battery is
replaced with the incorrect battery type.
• Please recycle batteries to help save ourplanet’s resources. When you throw away
dead batteries, be sure to cover theirterminals and always observe local laws andregulations.

8
SAFETY PRECAUTIONSUse Only Dedicated Rechargeable
Battery and Battery Charger

NOTICE• Do not use or store the camera in dusty or
humid places.
• Use SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards only.
Never use other types of cards.
If you accidently insert another type of card
into the camera, contact an authorized
distributor or service center. Do not try to
remove the card by force.
• Regularly back up important data to acomputer or other storage device to prevent
accidental loss.
• OLYMPUS accepts no liability for any loss ofdata associated with this device.
• Be careful with the strap when you carry thecamera. It could easily catch on stray objects
and cause serious damage.
• Before transporting the camera, remove
a tripod and all other non-OLYMPUS
accessories.
• Never drop the camera or subject it to severe
shocks or vibrations.
• When attaching the camera to or removing
it from a tripod, rotate the tripod screw, notthe camera.
• Do not touch electric contacts on cameras.
• Do not leave the camera pointed directlyat the sun. This may cause lens or shutter
curtain damage, color failure, ghosting on
the image pickup device, or may possibly
cause fires.
• Do not leave the viewfinder exposed to astrong light source or direct sunlight. The
heat may damage the viewfinder.
• Do not push or pull severely on the lens.
• Be sure to remove any water droplets orother moisture from the product before
replacing the battery or opening or closing
covers.
• Before storing the camera for a long period,
remove the batteries. Select a cool, drylocation for storage to prevent condensation
or mold from forming inside the camera. Afterstorage, test the camera by turning it on andpressing the shutter button to make sure that
it is operating normally.
• The camera may malfunction if it is used ina location where it is subject to a magnetic/
electromagnetic field, radio waves, or highvoltage, such as near a TV set, microwave,
video game, loud speakers, large monitor
unit, TV/radio tower, or transmission towers.
In such cases, turn the camera off and on
again before further operation.
• Always observe the operating environment
restrictions described in the camera’s
manual.

EN 323

8
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS• Insert the battery carefully as described in theoperating instructions.
• Before loading, always inspect the battery
carefully for leaks, discoloration, warping, or
any other abnormality.
• Always unload the battery from the camera
before storing the camera for a long period.
• When storing the battery for a long period,
select a cool location for storage.
• Power consumption by the camera varies
depending on which functions are used.
• During the conditions described below, power
is consumed continuously and the battery
becomes exhausted quickly.
• The zoom is used repeatedly.
• The shutter button is pressed halfway
repeatedly in shooting mode, activating
the auto focus.
• A picture is displayed on the monitor foran extended period of time.
• Using an exhausted battery may cause thecamera to turn off without displaying thebattery level warning.
• If the battery’s terminals get wet or greasy,camera contact failure may result. Wipe thebattery well with a dry cloth before use.
• Always charge a battery when using it for
the first time, or if it has not been used for along period.
• When operating the camera with battery
power at low temperatures, try to keep
the camera and spare battery as warm as
possible. A battery that has run down at
low temperatures may be restored after it iswarmed at room temperature.
• Before going on a long trip, and especiallybefore traveling abroad, purchase extra
batteries. A recommended battery may bedifficult to obtain while traveling.

MonitorUsing the wireless LAN/
Bluetooth® functions

Disclaimer of Warranty• Turn off the camera in hospitals and otherlocations where medical equipment ispresent.
The radio waves from the camera may
adversely affect medical equipment, causing
a malfunction that results in an accident. Be
sure to disable wireless LAN/Bluetooth®
functions in the vicinity of medical equipment(P. 255, 271).
• Turn off the camera when onboard
aircraft.
Using wireless devices onboard may hinder
safe operation of the aircraft. Be sure todisable wireless LAN/Bluetooth® functions
onboard aircraft (P. 255, 271).
• Do not use this product where it may
interfere with nearby radar systems.

324 EN• Do not push the monitor forcibly; otherwise
the image may become vague, resulting ina playback mode failure or damage to themonitor.
• A strip of light may appear on the top/bottomof the monitor, but this is not a malfunction.
• When a subject is viewed diagonally in thecamera, the edges may appear zigzagged on
the monitor. This is not a malfunction; it willbe less noticeable in playback mode.
• In places subject to low temperatures, themonitor may take a long time to turn on or its
color may change temporarily.
When using the camera in extremely cold
places, it is a good idea to occasionally place
it in a warm place. The monitor exhibiting
poor performance due to low temperatures
will recover in normal temperatures.
• The monitor of this product is manufactured
with high-quality accuracy, however, there
may be a stuck or dead pixel on the monitor.
These pixels do not have any influenceon the image to be saved. Because of thecharacteristics, the unevenness of the color
or brightness may also be found dependingon the angle, but this is due to the structureof the monitor. This is not a malfunction.

Legal and Other Notices• Olympus makes no representations or
warranties regarding any damages, or
benefit expected by using this unit lawfully,
or any request from a third person, which
are caused by the inappropriate use of thisproduct.
• Olympus makes no representations or
warranties regarding any damages or any
benefit expected by using this unit lawfully
which are caused by erasing picture data.
• Olympus makes no representations or
warranties, either expressed or implied, byor concerning any content of these writtenmaterials or software, and in no event
shall be liable for any implied warranty ofmerchantability or fitness for any particularpurpose or for any consequential, incidental
or indirect damages (including but not limited
to damages for loss of business profits,business interruption and loss of businessinformation) arising from the use or inability
to use these written materials or software
or equipment. Some countries do not allow
the exclusion or limitation of liability forconsequential or incidental damages or of
the implied warranty, so the above limitations
may not apply to you.
• Olympus reserves all rights to this manual.

Warning
Unauthorized photographing or use of
copyrighted material may violate applicable
copyright laws. Olympus assumes noresponsibility for unauthorized photographing,use or other acts that infringe upon the rights ofcopyright owners.

Copyright Notice
All rights reserved. No part of these writtenmaterials or this software may be reproduced
or used in any form or by any means, electronic
or mechanical, including photocopying andrecording or the use of any type of information
storage and retrieval system, without the priorwritten permission of Olympus. No liability
is assumed with respect to the use of theinformation contained in these written materials
or software, or for damages resulting fromthe use of the information contained therein.
Olympus reserves the right to alter the featuresand contents of this publication or software
without obligation or advance notice.

Trademarks• Apical logo is a registeredtrademark of Apical Limited.

• Micro Four Thirds, Four Thirds, and theMicro Four Thirds and Four Thirds logos aretrademarks or registered trademarks of the
OLYMPUS CORPORATION in Japan, theUnited States, the countries of the European
Union, and other countries.
• Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE
OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO INCOMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC
VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THATWAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED
IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIALACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDEAVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR
SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINEDFROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.
MPEGLA.COM
The software in this camera may include third
party software. Any third party software is subject
to the terms and conditions, imposed by theowners or licensors of that software, under whichsoftware is provided to you.
Those terms and other third party software
notices, if any, may be found in the software
notice PDF file stored at
http://www.olympus.co.jp/en/support/imsg/
digicamera/download/notice/notice.cfm

8
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS• Microsoft and Windows are registeredtrademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• Mac, OS X, and macOS are trademarks ofApple Inc.
• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

• The standards for camera file systems
referred to in this manual are the “Design
Rule for Camera File System/DCF” standards
stipulated by the Japan Electronics andInformation Technology Industries Association(JEITA).
• All other company and product names areregistered trademarks and/or trademarks of
their respective owners.

• The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED
logo is a certification markof the Wi-Fi Alliance.

• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by theBluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of suchmarks by OLYMPUS CORPORATION isunder license.

EN 3259Additions/modifications by firmware
update

The following functions are added/modified by firmware update.

Additions/modifications by the firmware version 1.2g

RAW Video Output

326

Focus Indicators for Manual Focus

328

Camera Displays for Lens SET and CALL Functions

328

Default settings

329

Additions/modifications by the firmware version 1.2
RAW Video Output
A [RAW Mode] option has been added to the video menu (MENU
Output][Output Mode]).
Option9Additions/modifications by firmware update
326 ENn[n HDMIg

Descriptionn HDMI Output

Adjust output settings for movies recorded with thecamera connected with an external device via HDMI.

Output Mode

Choose the video output mode. When set to [Monitor
Mode], image and camera information are output. The
camera information is not displayed on the camera
screen.
When set to [Record Mode], only image is output. The
camera information is displayed on the camera screen.
Select [RAW Mode] to output to compatible HDMI
devices in RAW format. RAW-format video is not saved
to the camera memory card. Frame size and soundsettings are adjusted using camera controls.
• For information on HDMI devices that support [RAWMode], visit the OLYMPUS website.
• [RAW Mode] is used to record data to which settings
such as exposure compensation and white balance
have not been applied.
• An HDMI indicator
123
M-IS
appears in the cameralC-AF
monitor while [RAWMode] output is inprogress.

—

min

2

ISO-A
400

4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

HDMI

—

Descriptiong• Video output in [RAW Mode] is not displayed in thecamera monitor, but instead appears on the HDMI
device.
• Video output in [RAW Mode] is recorded in
ProResRAW format.
• During output to compatible HDMI devices in [RAWMode], [n Picture Mode] is set to [On] and [PictureMode] to [l OM-Log400].
• The following restrictions apply to settings when [RAWMode] is selected:- [nK]: Restricted to [C4K] and [4K]. High-speed
and slow- and fast-motion movies cannot berecorded.
- [n Image Stabilizer]: Restricted to [M-IS Off] and[M-IS2].
- [Digital Tele-converter]: Set to [Off].
- [n AF Mode]-selection for Four Thirds lenses:
Restricted to [MF] and [PreMF].

—

OptionOutput Mode Connecting the Camera to HDMI Devices
Connect the camera to the HDMI device using an HDMI cable.
HDMI connector
HDMI cable (Connect to HDMI
connector on HDMI device)

Type D

Additions/modifications by firmware update

Type A• See the documentation supplied with the HDMI device for information on adjusting device
settings.

9

EN 327

Focus Indicators for Manual Focus
A [Focus Indicator] option has been added to the custom menus (MENU[MF Assist]).

G

I

Magnify

Magnifies a portion of the screen. The portion to be magnified can be
set in advance using AF target. g “Choosing a Focus Target (AFTarget Point)” (P.72)

Peaking

Displays clearly defined outlines with edge enhancement. You canselect the enhancement color and intensity. g G Custom Menu R >[Peaking Settings] (P.189)

Focus Indicator

Rotating the focus ring during manual
focus displays an indicator showing thedirection and approximate amount ofrotation required to bring the subject into
focus.

100%

S-IS AUTO

MF
ISO
200

YF
4K

30p

M

250 F5.6 -2.0

1:02:03

1023• These indicators may be reversed in the case of third-party lenses equipped with afocus clutch, in which case you will need to change the option selected for [Focus Ring](P.184).
• The focus indicator is not displayed when a lens with a Four Thirds mount is used.

9Additions/modifications by firmware update
328 EN

Camera Displays for Lens SET and CALL Functions
The camera displays “SET(” when the focus position is saved using the SET option
and “CALL(” when a saved focus position is restored using the CALL option. For
more information on SET and CALL, see the lens manual.
SET

100%

CALL

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF

YF

4K

4K

1:02:03

1:02:03

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1023

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.01023

Default settings
The default settings for new functions and the modified default settings are as follows.
*1: Can be added to [Assign to Custom Mode].
*2: Default can be restored by selecting [Full] for [Reset].
*3: Default can be restored by selecting [Basic] for [Reset].

G Custom Menu
Tab

G

I MF Assist

Function
MagnifyPeaking
Focus Indicator

Default
Off
Off
Off

*1




*2




*3
―
―
―

g
184,
215

9
Additions/modifications by firmware update
EN 329IndexSymbols0 (Protect) .....................................131
8 (Beep sound) ...............................190
n Mode (movie exposure mode) .....165
n Save Slot......................................237
P (Trimming) ...................................171
qR Function ..................132, 133, 185
qa Default Setting.........................229
qa Info ..................................187, 227
q Info ......................................187, 226
q Slot ..............................................237#RC Mode ........................................288#Slow Limit.......................................236#X-Sync. ..........................................236#+WB ...............................................193
G (Index display/Calendar display) .129
G/Info Settings ................................226
j/Y (Drive Mode) ......................78, 98
j/Y Settings ..................................187
jH Settings ............................186, 220
jL Settings .............................186, 220
j Image Stabilizer ..........................186s (Monitor brightness adjustment) .176
KNMode Settings ............69, 71, 182
K Orientation Linked N ................210
K Save Settings ..............................237
K Save Slot .....................................237
 (Single-frame erase) .....................132
N Select Screen Settings ...............207
N Set Home............................182, 206
N Spot Metering .............................193
N Loop Settings..............................208
W (Language) ...........................35, 176
0 (Uploading Pictures) ................275v (Image selection) .........................133
9 Lock..........................................185
I (Face priority AF) ............................92
I Face Selection ..............................122a (Close-up playback) .....................129
R (Image rotation) ...........................170
V Half Way Level .............................197

330 ENV Info Settings .................................196
W Keep Warm Color .........................94
Movie ..............................................161
Still image .................................96, 194
t Target Mode Settings .................209
x+F ...............................................193
S Center Button ...............................217
T Direction Key ................................217
v Lock ..............................................185z Settings .........................................189
FAF....................................................64
M PC RAW .......................................231

A
A (Aperture priority mode) ..................46
AC adapter ..........................................25
Accessories ...............................287, 291
AdobeRGB ........................................ 114
AE bracketing ....................................146
AEL/AFL ............................................201
AEL Metering .....................................193
AE lock ........................................77, 201
AF Area Pointer .................................182
AF Focus Adj. ............................183, 212
AF Illuminator ....................................183
AF Limiter ..........................................183
AF+MF...............................................200
AF ModeMovie ..............................................162
Still image ...................................64, 91
AF Scanner........................................181
AF Targeting Pad ...............................183
AF Target Mode ...................................69
AF Target Point ....................................72
AF Target Selection .......................69, 72
AF tracking ..........................................64
All x .................................................96
Movie ..............................................161
Still image .......................................194
Anti-Flicker LV ...........................186, 222
Anti-Flicker Shooting .................186, 223

Anti-shock shooting .....................80, 157
Aperture-Priority AE .............................46
Apps ..................................................245
ART bracketing ..................................147
Art Filter settings................................106
Art LV Mode .......................................188
Aspect ratio..........................................98
Assign Save Folder ...........................237
Assign to Custom Mode ....................142
Audio recording
Movie ..............................................169
Still image .......................................136
Auto Power Off ..................................199
Available recording time ....................317

B
Backlit LCD ........................................198
Battery charge ...............................20, 22
Battery level .........................................32
Battery Settings .................................198
Beep sound .......................................190
Bit rate .......................................102, 167
Bluetooth® ................................246, 273
Bracketing..........................................146
Bulb .....................................................52
Bulb/Time Focusing ...................184, 216
Bulb/Time Monitor .............................192
Bulb/Time Timer ................................192
Button function................................... 116
Movie ..............................................163
Still image .......................................185

C
Cable clip .............................................19
C-AF Center Priority ..................182, 205
C-AF Center Start ......................182, 204
C-AF (Continuous AF) .........................64
C-AF Release Priority ........................186
C-AF Sensitivity .........................181, 203
C-AF+TR (AF tracking)........................64
Calendar display ................129, 137, 228
Card .............................................26, 284
Card Setup ........................................177

Card Slots ............................................27
Card Slot Settings..............................237
Certification........................................199
Close-up playback .............................129
Color Creator .....................................108
Color Filter ......................................... 112
Color Space ............................... 114, 194
Composite Settings .....................54, 233
Compression rate ......100, 102, 236, 316
Connecting via USB ............22, 274, 278
Connection
Computer ................................256, 274
Smartphone ....................................245
Continuous AF .....................................64
Contrast ............................................. 110
Control Settings
Movie ..............................................164
Still image ...............................187, 224
Copying Pictures
Copy ...............................................131
Copy All...........................................175
Copyright Settings .............................195
Custom Menu ............................181, 308
Custom Mode (C1/C2/C3/C4) ...........56
Custom Self-timer ................................80
Custom Settings ................................183

D
Date/time setting (X) ..........................33
Dial Direction .....................................185
Dial Function
Movie ......................................163, 168
Still image .......................................185
Digital Tele-converter .........................143
Diopter adjustment ..............................38
dpi Settings ........................................195
DPOF.................................................134

E
Edit ....................................................170
Edit Filename.....................................195
Effect (i-Enhance) .............................. 113
Electronic Zoom.................................121

EN 331Elec. Zoom Speed
Movie ..............................................163
Still image .......................................185
Erase
All images .......................................177
Selected images .............................133
Single-frame ...................................132
EVF Adjust .........................................196
EVF Auto Switch ................................196
EVF Grid Settings ..............................197
EVF Style...........................................240
EV Step .............................................191
Exif data.............................................195
Exposure compensation ......................68
Exposure Shift ...................................193
External flash units ............................287
External power sources .......................22
Eyecup...............................................291
Eye priority AF .....................................92

F
Face Priority ......................................122
Face priority AF ...........................92, 201
Fast-motion movie .............................104
File format..................................100, 316
File Name ..........................................195
File size .............................................316
Firmware............................................176
Fisheye Compensation ......................242
Flash ....................................................84
Flash intensity control (x)...............105
FL bracketing .....................................147
Flicker Reduction .......................186, 222
Flicker Scan
Movie ..............................................166
Still image .......................................234
Fn Lever Function
Movie ..............................................163
Still image .......................................219
Fn Lever/Power Lever .......................185
Focus bracketing ...............................148
Focus mode ...................................64, 91
Focus Ring ........................................184
Focus Ring Lock ................................122

332 EN

Focus Stacking ..................................149
Format ...............................................177
Formatting the card ...........................177
Frame Rate
Movie ..............................102, 167, 317
Still image .......................................188
Frame size .................................102, 317

G
GPS log .............................................254
GPS tag .............................................254
Gradation ........................................... 111
Grid Settings ......................................189

H
Half Way Level ..................................197
Half Way Rls With IS .........................186
HDMI .........................190, 230, 279, 280
HDMI Control .....................................282
HDMI Output......................................164
HDR (High Dynamic Range) .............152
Highlight&Shadow Control................. 115
High Res Shot (High resolution shooting)83, 158
Histogram display ................................39
Histogram Settings ............................189

I
Image aspect .......................................98
Image Overlay ...................................172
Image quality
Movie (nK) .........................101, 167
Still image (KK) .................100, 142
Image quality settings
Movie (n Specification Settings) ...161
Still image (K Set) ................194, 236
Image size
Movie ..............................................167
Still image .......................100, 236, 316
Image Stabilizer ...................97, 162, 186
Index display......................129, 137, 228
INFO button ................................39, 127
Information display ..............................36
Playback .........................................126

Info Settings
G/Info Settings ......................187, 226
V Info Settings ..............................196
In-Movie Image Capture ....................173
Installing Apps ...................................245
Installing Software .............................256
Interchangeable lenses .....................285
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse ........................144
ISO-Auto
Movie ........................................75, 161
Still image .......................................191
ISO-Auto Set
Movie ..............................................161
Still image .................................75, 191
ISO bracketing ...................................147
ISO sensitivity ................................75, 91
ISO Step ............................................191

K
Keystone Comp. ................................156

L
Language setting (W) ...............35, 176
Lens Info Settings ..............................239
Lens I.S. Priority ................................186
Level Adjust .......................................198
Level Disp ..........................................120
Level Gauge ........................................40
Light box display ................................226
Live Bulb ......................................52, 232
Live composite photography................54
Live Composite Timer ........................192
Live control ........................................225
Live ND Shooting...............................159
Live Time .....................................52, 232
Live View Boost .................................188
Location data .............................244, 254
Long exposure (BULB/TIME) ..............52
Low ISO Processing ..........................191
LV Close Up Settings.........................188
LV-Info .......................................187, 227
LV OFF-Info ...............................187, 227
LV super control panel ...........88, 90, 301

M
M (Manual mode) ................................50
Manual Exposure.................................50
Manual focus .......................................64
Manual focus clutch (MF clutch) ........286
Menu..........................................139, 301
Menu Recall.......................................198
Metering.........................................77, 92
MF (AF/MF toggle) ............................ 118
MF Assist ...........................................215
MF Clutch ..........................................286
MF (Manual focus)...............................64
Mode Guide .......................................189
Monochrome Color ............................ 113
Movie R .............................................169
Movie H ...................................123, 125
Movie exposure mode .......................165
Movie playback ..................................130
Movie recording .............................59, 60
Movie Trimming .................................174
Multi Function ....................................124
Multi Function Settings ......................187
Multiple Exposure ..............................154
My Menu ............................................179

N
Noise Filter
Movie ..............................................161
Still image .......................................191
Noise Reduct. ....................................192
Number of storable still pictures ........316

O
OI.Palette...........................................245
OI.Share ............................................245
OI.Track .............................................245
OLYMPUS Capture ...........256, 268, 274
Olympus Workspace .........................274
One-touch white balance (k) .... 95, 118

P
P (Program mode) ..............................44
Partial Color .......................................109
Peaking......................................120, 215

EN 333

Peaking Settings................................189
Picture Mode .............................106, 142
Picture Mode Settings .......................187
Pixel Count ........................194, 236, 316
Pixel Mapping ....................................295
Playback
Movie ......................................128, 130
Still image .......................................128
Playback Menu ..........................170, 307
Position information ...........................254
Power Battery Holder ..........................24
Power lever..................................32, 185
Power-off Standby .............................249
PreMF (Preset MF) ................64, 67, 121
Preset MF ..............................64, 67, 121
Preset MF distance............................184
Press-and-hold Time .........................198
Preview .............................................. 117
Priority Set .........................................196
Pro Capture shooting...........................81
Program AE .........................................44
Program shift (Ps) ..............................45
Protect ...............................................131
Ps (Program shift) ..............................45

Q
Quick Erase .......................................196
Quick Sleep Mode .............................199

R
RAW Data Edit ..................................170
RAW image .......................................100
RAW+JPEG h ..........................133, 178
RAW+JPEG Erase ....................132, 196
RC Mode (#RC Mode) .....................288
Recall from Custom Mode ...................58
Rec View ...........................................176
Remote Photography.........................253
Reset .................................................141
Reset Lens ........................................184
Reset Protect .....................................175
Reset Settings (Wi-Fi/Bluetooth) .......273
Reset share Order .............................175
Rotate ................................................130334 ENS
S (Shutter priority mode) .....................48
S-AF Release Priority ........................186
S-AF (Single AF)..................................64
Saturation .......................................... 110
Save Settings ..............................99, 237
Save Slot ...........................................237
SD card..............................................284
Formatting the card.........................177
Selfie Assist .......................................229
Self-timer .................................78, 80, 98
Sequential shooting .......................78, 98
Setup Menu ...............................176, 308
Shading Comp. ..................................194
Share Order .......................................132
Sharpness ......................................... 110
Shooting
Movie ................................................60
Still image .........................................41
Shooting Menu ..........................141, 303
Shooting modes...................................41
Shutter-Priority AE ...............................48
Silent controls ......................................61
Silent shooting .............................81, 157
Single AF .............................................64
Sleep ...................................................32
Slow motion movie ............................104
Software ............................................256
S-OVF................................................197
sRGB ................................................. 114
Starry Sky AF.......................................64
Starry Sky AF Setting ........................184
Storage ..............................................277
Super control panel ...............88, 90, 301
Super Spot AF .....................................73

T
Test Picture ........................................ 118
Time .....................................................52
Time Code Settings ...........................164
Time Lapse Movie .............................144
Time lapse shooting ..........................144
Touch AF..............................................43
Touch screen operations .............43, 137

Touchscreen Settings ........................198
TV ......................................................230

U
USB Mode .........................................190
USB Power Delivery ..........................278
User registration .................................. 11

V
Video Menu ...............................161, 305

W
WB
Movie ..............................................194
Still image .........................................94
WB bracketing ...................................146
WB Compensation...............................96
White balance ..............................94, 194
White balance compensation ..............96
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings ....178, 246, 261
Wi-Fi Connection ...............245, 256, 260
Wireless remote control flash ............288

Z
Zoom frame AF ....................................73

EN 335

date of issue 2020.02.

WD656901